John Deere 9400 9500 and 9600 Combine PDF Operator S Manual

Y
C
9400, 9500
D
and 9600
Combines
OPERATORS MANUAL
9400, 9500 and 9600
Combines
OMH161694 Issue C7 English
C 7
O M H 1 6 1 6 9 4
John Deere Harvester Works

OMH161694 Issue C7
(This manual replaces OMH159576 A7)
LITHO IN U.S.A.
ENGLISH
Introduction
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to the identification numbers in a secure place off the
operate and service your machine correctly. Failure to machine.
do so could result in personal injury or equipment
damage. This manual and safety signs on your WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere’s
machine may also be available in other languages. support program for customers who operate and
(See your John Deere dealer to order.) maintain their equipment as described in this manual.
The warranty is explained on the warranty certificate
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a which you should have received from your dealer.
permanent part of your machine and should remain
with the machine when you sell it. This warranty provides you the assurance that John
Deere will back its products where defects appear
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both within the warranty period. In some circumstances,
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only John Deere also provides field improvements, often
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and without charge to the customer, even if the product is
inch fasteners may require a specific metric or inch out of warranty. Should the equipment be abused, or
wrench. modified to change its performance beyond the
original factory specifications, the warranty will
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined become void and field improvements may be denied.
by facing in the direction of forward travel. Setting fuel delivery above specifications or otherwise
overpowering machines will result in such action.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
(P.I.N.) in the Specification or Identification Numbers THE TIRE MANUFACTURER’S warranty supplied
section. Accurately record all the numbers to help in with your machine may not apply outside the U.S.
tracing the machine should it be stolen. Your dealer
also needs these numbers when you order parts. File
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State
of California to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.
-UN-19AUG96
H48062
HX,H161694,IFC -19-24MAR97
240397
PN=3
Find manuals at https://best-manuals.com
Contents
Page Page
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-1

Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-1
Safety Decal Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Ground Drive and Rear Axle Service . . . . 110-1
Operators Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Air Conditioning and Heater Service . . . . 115-1
Lights and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-1
Prestarting Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-1
Operating the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-1
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1 Machine Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . 135-1
Crop Settings and Seed Loss Charts . . . . . 45-1 Crime Prevention Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140-1
Combine Cleanout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1 John Deere Literature Available . . . . . . . . 145-1
Feeder House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1 Index
Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-1
Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Straw Chopper and Spreaders . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Grain Tank and Unloading System . . . . . . . 75-1
Fuels and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-1
Lubrication and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 85-1
Engine Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1
Electrical System Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-1
All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

the latest information available at the time of publication. The right is
reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
OMH161694 C7-19-24MAR97
COPYRIGHT˚ 1997
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION Manual
Previous Editions
Copyright1996,1995,1994,1993,1992,1991,1990,1989,1988 Deere & Company
i 240397
PN=387
Contents
ii 240397
PN=388

Safety Features
COMBINE SAFETY FEATURES
-19-17SEP96
H48061
HX,9000SP,A -19-17SEP96
05-1 240397
PN=4
Safety
RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION
This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see this

symbol on your machine or in this manual, be alert to
the potential for personal injury.
-UN-07DEC88
Follow recommended precautions and safe operating
practices.
T81389
DX,ALERT -19-03MAR93
UNDERSTAND SIGNAL WORDS
A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is

used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the
most serious hazards.
-19-30SEP88
DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near
specific hazards. General precautions are listed on
CAUTION safety signs. CAUTION also calls attention to
safety messages in this manual.
TS187
DX,SIGNAL -19-03MAR93
FOLLOW SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on

your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
-UN-23AUG88
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are
available from your John Deere dealer.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use

controls properly. Do not let anyone operate without
TS201
instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.

Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair
the function and/or safety and affect machine life.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and

need assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
DX,READ -19-03MAR93
10-1 240397
PN=5
P
DRIVING THE COMBINE
Operate combine only when all guards are fitted and in

their correct position.
Before driving away, check immediate vicinity of machine

for bystanders. Use the horn as a warning immediately
before driving away.
Attach headers to combine with extreme care.
H01,9000SA,A -19-11SEP92
KEEP RIDERS OFF MACHINE
Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.
Riders are subject to injury such as being thrown off the
-UN-23AUG88
machine. Riders also obstruct the operator’s view
resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe
manner.
On machines equipped with a passenger seat, one rider

is permitted.
TS253
H01,9000SA,B -19-20MAR90
BALLASTING FOR SAFE GROUND

CONTACT
Operating, steering and braking performance of combine

can be considerably affected by heavy front end
-UN-15APR94
attachments which alter the center of gravity of the
combine.
To maintain the necessary ground contact, ballast the

combine at the rear end as necessary.
H46192
Observe the maximum permissible axle loads and total
weights.
HX,9000SA,G -19-12SEP94
10-2 240397
PN=6

P
AVOID ELECTRICAL POWER LINES
Put the grain tank unloading auger in transport position

before driving on public roads.
-UN-10MAR90
Secure radio aerial in its transport position before driving
on public roads, it may come into contact with
low-hanging electrical cables. This would result in the
operator suffering a severe electrical shock.
H41757
H01,9000SA,H -19-09OCT91
PARK THE COMBINE SAFELY
Lower headers or other equipment to the ground before

leaving the combine. Set park brake, turn off engine and
remove keys.
-UN-15APR94
H46193
HX,9000SA,I -19-12SEP94
OPERATE THE ENGINE OUTDOORS
Never operate the engine in a closed building.
-UN-23AUG88
TS220
H01,9000SA,J -19-09OCT91
HANDLE FUEL SAFELY—AVOID FIRES
Handle fuel with care: it is highly flammable. Do not

refuel the machine while smoking or when near open
flame or sparks.
-UN-23AUG88
Always stop engine before refueling machine. Fill fuel

tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated

trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
TS202
DX,FIRE1 -19-03MAR93
10-3 240397
PN=7
P
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES
Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
-UN-23AUG88
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance
service, hospital, and fire department near your
telephone.
TS291
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93
HANDLE STARTING FLUID SAFELY
Starting fluid is highly flammable.
Keep all sparks and flame away when using it. Keep
-UN-18MAR92
starting fluid away from batteries and cables.
To prevent accidental discharge when storing the

pressurized can, keep the cap on the container, and
store in a cool, protected location.
TS1356
Do not incinerate or puncture a starting fluid container.
DX,FIRE3 -19-16APR92
WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

appropriate to the job.
-UN-23AUG88
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
TS206
DX,WEAR2 -19-03MAR93
10-4 240397
PN=8

P
HANDLE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS SAFELY
Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause

serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with
John Deere equipment include such items as lubricants,
-UN-26NOV90
coolants, paints, and adhesives.
A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific

details on chemical products: physical and health
hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response
TS1132
techniques.
Check the MSDS before you start any job using a

hazardous chemical. That way you will know exactly
what the risks are and how to do the job safely. Then
follow procedures and recommended equipment.
(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical

products used with John Deere equipment.)
DX,MSDS,NA -19-03MAR93
STAY CLEAR OF HEADER
Many moving parts such as the cutting platform auger,

reel, gatherer chain and stalk rolls of the corn head,
cannot be completely shielded due to their function. Stay
-UN-10JAN91
clear of these moving elements during operation! Always
disengage header drive, shut off the engine and remove
key before servicing or unclogging header.
H42442
H01,9000SA,C -19-11SEP92
KEEP HANDS AWAY FROM KNIVES
Never attempt to clear obstructions in front of or on

header unless separator is disengaged, engine shut off
and key removed.
-UN-23AUG88
Everyone must be clear of the combine before starting

the engine
TS254
H01,9000SA,D -19-20MAR90
10-5 240397
PN=9
P
USE SAFETY LIGHTS AND DEVICES
Prevent collisions between other road users, slow moving

tractors with attachments or towed equipment, and
self-propelled machines on public roads. Frequently
check for traffic from the rear, especially in turns, and
use hand signals or turn signal lights.
Use headlights, flashing warning lights, and turn signals

day and night. Follow local regulations for equipment
lighting and marking. Keep lighting and marking visible
-UN-12APR90
and in good working order. Replace or repair lighting and
marking that has been damaged or lost. An implement
safety lighting kit is available from your John Deere
dealer.
TS951
DX,FLASH -19-12SEP95
USE SEAT BELTS
Use the seat belt whenever you operate the combine or

ride as an observer.
-UN-25OCT95
H47137
HX,9000SA,K -19-25OCT95
TRANSPORT COMBINE WITH HEADER

SAFELY
Before driving combine on public roads, raise the

header. It must not, however, obstruct operator’s view of
-UN-15APR94
the road. H46194
HX,9000SA,F -19-12SEP94
10-6 240397
PN=10
P
PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE
Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep

area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is

moving. Keep hands, feet , and clothing from
power-driven parts. Disengage all power and operate
controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the
ground. Stop the engine. Remove the key. Allow
machine to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be

raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.

Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
Disconnect battery ground cable (-) before making
-UN-23AUG88
adjustments on electrical systems or welding on
machine.
TS218
DX,SERV -19-03MAR93
REMOVE PAINT BEFORE WELDING OR

HEATING
Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
-UN-23AUG88
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is
heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Do all work outside or in a well ventilated area. Dispose

of paint and solvent properly.
TS220
Remove paint before welding or heating:
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.

Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper

with soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes
before welding or heating.
DX,PAINT -19-03MAR93
10-7 240397
PN=11
P
AVOID HEATING NEAR PRESSURIZED
FLUID LINES
Flammable spray can be generated by heating near

pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to
-UN-15MAY90
yourself and bystanders. Do not heat by welding,
soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or
other flammable materials. Pressurized lines can be
accidentally cut when heat goes beyond the immediate
flame area.
TS953
DX,TORCH -19-03MAR93
AVOID CONTACT WITH MOVING PARTS
Keep hands, feet and clothing away from power driven

parts. Never clean, lubricate or adjust machine when it is
running.
-UN-23AUG88
TS256
H01,9000SA,E -19-15JUN90
AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.
-UN-23AUG88
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect
X9811
hands and body from high pressure fluids.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,FLUID -19-03MAR93
10-8 240397
PN=12
P
PROTECT AGAINST HIGH PRESSURE
SPRAY
Spray from high pressure nozzles can penetrate the skin

and cause serious injury. Keep spray from contacting
-UN-18MAR92
hands or body.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

high pressure spray injected into the skin must be
surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may
TS1343
result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should
reference a knowledgeable medical source. Such
information is available from Deere & Company Medical
Department in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,SPRAY -19-16APR92
DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY
Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the

environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil,
-UN-26NOV90
fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not

use food or beverage containers that may mislead
someone into drinking from them.
TS1133
Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or
into any water source.
Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can

damage the Earth’s atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.
Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste

from your local environmental or recycling center, or from
your John Deere dealer.
DX,DRAIN -19-03MAR93
10-9 240397
PN=13
P
SERVICE COOLING SYSTEM SAFELY
Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling

system can cause serious burns.
-UN-23AUG88
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool
enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to
first stop to relieve pressure before removing completely.
TS281
DX,RCAP -19-04JUN90
10-10 240397
PN=14
Safety Decal Location
-19-12AUG96
H48051
HX,9000SS,A -19-17SEP96
15-1 240397
PN=15
-19-24OCT96
H48128
HX,9000SS,B -19-14JAN97
15-2 240397
PN=16
-19-12AUG96
H48053
HX,9000SS,C -19-17SEP96
15-3 240397
PN=17
-19-12AUG96
H48054
HX,9000SS,D -19-17SEP96
15-4 240397
PN=18
-19-12AUG96
H48055
HX,9000SS,E -19-17SEP96
15-5 240397
PN=19
Operators Station
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL IDENTIFICATION
-UN-23AUG91
H43877
A—Air Conditioning/Heater, E—Ether Aid Button J—Brake Pedals O—Accumulator Gauge
Temperature Control F—Steering Wheel K—Gearshift Lever (Optional)
B—Cab Fan Speed Control Lock Knob L—Horn Button P—Manual Park Brake Pedal
C—Reverser Control G—Turn Signal Lever M—Seat Position Lever Q—Park Brake Disengage
D—Steering Column Tilt H—Turn Signal Indicators N—Seat Height Lever Pedal
Pedal I—Start Switch
H01,9000OS,A -19-24MAR97
20-1 240397
PN=20
Operators Station
SWITCH AND KNOB COLORS
Before operating this combine for the first time, become

familiar with the switches and controls. These controls
are color “coded” to help you quickly locate them when
-UN-11SEP90
operating the combine.
Red - Engine Stop

Orange - ground drive and engine speed.
Yellow - drive engagement.
H42330
Black - operating adjustments and controls.
H01,9000OS,B -19-24MAR97
ARMREST CONTROL PANEL
A—DIAL-A-MATIC™ (Optional)
B—DIAL-A-SPEED™ Control (Optional)
C—Header Engage
D—Unloading Auger Engage
E—Separator Engage
F—Manual Reel Speed
G—Reel Fore-and-Aft (Optional)
H—CONTOUR MASTER™ On/Off Switch (Optional)
I—Cylinder Speed
J—Concave Spacing
K—Cigarette Lighter
L—Cleaning Fan Speed
M—Four-Wheel Drive (Optional)
N—Engine Speed
O—Unloading Auger Swing
P—Ash Tray
Q—Hydrostatic Drive Control Lever
R—Reel Lift/Feederhouse Speed
S—Header Lift
T—CONTOUR MASTER™ Manual Tilt Switch
(Optional)
-UN-13DEC94
H46248
OM,9500OS,C -19-21DEC94
20-2 240397
PN=21
Operators Station
DIAL-A-MATIC (OPTIONAL)
The knob controls header automatic height with three

“ON” positions. See your header Operator’s Manual for
details.
-UN-06AUG91
The DIAL-A-MATIC automatically shuts off when the
header is raised by using the rocker switch in the hydro
handle. The system will turn itself back on when the
header is lowered.
H43710
If the reel lift, variable speed feeder house or variable
speed cylinder drive are operated when the
DIAL-A-MATIC is functioning, these systems may not
work properly.
IMPORTANT: Be certain knob is in the “OFF”

position when the platform cutterbar is
locked out.
H01,9000OS,AC -19-09OCT91
DIAL-A-SPEED (OPTIONAL)
The DIAL-A-SPEED knob controls the ratio of the reel

speed or the belt pickup to ground speed.
-UN-18FEB97
To operate, start the engine and drive forward with the
separator and header engaged.
Turn the DIAL-A-SPEED knob to position 3.
H48241
Watch the speed of the reel or belt pickup and adjust
the DIAL-A-SPEED knob until you get the desired ratio
to ground speed.
The reel or belt pickup will now speed up or slow down

in relation to the ground speed.
H01,9000OS,AD -19-24MAR97
20-3 240397
PN=22
Operators Station
DIAL-A-SPEED will not operate if ground speed is less

than 1.2 kph (0.75 mph).
Use the manual reel speed switch to get the desired reel
speed or belt pickup speed.
-UN-06AUG91
-UN-18FEB97
H48242
H43693
H01,9000OS,CB -19-24MAR97
The minimum reel speed and belt pickup speed can be

increased when operating at slower speeds. To change
the minimum speed:
Turn the DIAL-A-SPEED knob to the “OFF” position.
-UN-06AUG91
-UN-18FEB97
Press the manual switch to get the minimum reel or belt
pickup speed desired.
H48242
H43693
H01,9000OS,CC -19-24MAR97
Turn the DIAL-A-SPEED knob to the check position for

two or three seconds.
Return the DIAL-A-SPEED knob to the prior setting and

continue operating. This minimum speed is kept until the
-UN-14FEB90
engine is shut off.
H41589
H01,9000OS,CD -19-11SEP92
20-4 240397
PN=23
Operators Station
HEADER ENGAGE (YELLOW)
The switch turns on header. Lift and push to turn on, or

pull to turn off. This switch must be off to start the
engine.
-UN-06AUG91
Operator must be seated to operate header. If operator
leaves seat after engagement, header will continue to
operate for five seconds before it disengages. To
re-engage, sit in seat then turn switch off and then back
H43694
on.
If the header fails to engage or stops suddenly, sit

squarely on the seat, turn the switch off, lift and push
switch to re-engage.
H01,9000OS,AE -19-09OCT91
UNLOADING AUGER ENGAGE (YELLOW)
Switch turns on unloading auger. Pull to turn on; push to

turn off. This switch must be off to start the engine.
-UN-06AUG91
H43695
H01,9000OS,AF -19-13DEC93
SEPARATOR ENGAGE (YELLOW)
Switch turns on separator. Lift and push to turn on; pull

to turn off. Switch must be in OFF position to start
engine.
-UN-06AUG91
The cylinder speed adjust and the fan speed adjust

systems only work when the separator is engaged. The
separator should be engaged at low idle, however, the
separator may be engaged at fast idle without damage
H43697
to the drive.
H01,9000OS,AG -19-13DEC93
20-5 240397
PN=24
Operators Station
AUTOMATIC UNLOADING AUGER SWING

(YELLOW)
Push upper part of switch to swing out. Push lower part

of switch to swing in. Auger will stop automatically at the
-UN-06AUG91
full out or full in positions. The limit switch, located at top
of auger turret, stops the auger. Return switch to neutral
position to stop auger in any desired position. The switch
must be in neutral position before engine will start.
H43698
If the reel lift, variable speed feeder house or cylinder
speed are operated when swinging the auger, these
systems may operate the opposite way.
H01,9000OS,AI -19-09OCT91
MANUAL REEL SPEED (BLACK)
Switch controls reel speed. Push and hold rabbit symbol

to go faster or push and hold turtle symbol to go slower.
If equipped with DIAL-A-SPEED, the automatic function
-UN-06AUG91
can be overridden by the manual control, but will resume
auto operation when the switch is released.
H43693
H01,9000OS,AJ -19-13DEC93
REEL FORE-AND-AFT (BLACK) (OPTIONAL)
Engine must be running for this control to function.
The switch controls position of reel. Push and hold

-UN-06AUG91
forward arrow symbol to go to front. Push and hold

rearward arrow symbol to go to rear.
H43699
H01,9000OS,AK -19-13DEC93
20-6 240397
PN=25
Operators Station
CONTOUR MASTER AUTOMATIC TILT

ON/OFF SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
Press top of switch to engage or bottom of switch to

disengage Contour Master automatic tilt.
-UN-13DEC94
H46249
HX,CTSOS,A -19-08JAN96
ENGINE SPEED (ORANGE)
The switch controls engine rpm. Push:
•Turtle (slow idle) 1350 rpm 9400 Combine

1200 rpm 9500 and 9600 Combine
-UN-06AUG91
•Mid Speed 9500 and 9600 Combines
-1650 rpm
•Rabbit (fast idle) 9400 Combine-2350 with
Separator engaged
9500 and 9600 Combines-2340
with separator engaged-
H43700
2200 rpm rated
H01,9000OS,AL -19-13DEC93
20-7 240397
PN=26
Operators Station
CYLINDER SPEED (BLACK)
The switch controls cylinder rpm. Separator must be

running to adjust the cylinder speed. Push and hold
rabbit symbol for higher rpm or push and hold turtle
-UN-06AUG91
symbol for lower rpm. Check rpm on tachometer.
This switch also inputs to the tachometer for low cylinder

speed alarm that is displayed in the overhead panel.
Whenever cylinder speed is changed, the low cylinder
H43701
speed alarm is also reset.
As system oil temperature increases, cylinder speed may

increase about 30 rpm in four hours. Readjust cylinder
speed as needed.
If any of the following controls are operated when

operating this switch, the system may not respond
properly:
•Auger Swing
•Reel Lift
•Reel Fore-and-Aft
•Header Lift
H01,9000OS,AN -19-13DEC93
20-8 240397
PN=27
Operators Station
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (ORANGE) (OPTIONAL)
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the hydrostatic

system, do not switch 4-Wheel Drive on
or off while driving combine in third
-UN-06AUG91
gear (road gear) at maximum travel
speed.
Move hydrostatic control lever to

number (4) on decal (when in third
H43702
gear) before switching 4-Wheel Drive
on or off.
When driving the combine in conditions

which cause high pressures in the
hydrostatic system and the combine
slows down or stops, move hydrostatic
drive lever to neutral and shift to a
lower gear.
The switch controls 4-wheel drive. Push upper symbol of

switch to engage or push lower symbol of switch to
disengage.
N CAUTION: Ground speed will increase when

disengaging four-wheel drive and will decrease
when engaging four-wheel drive.
It is NORMAL for front wheels to lose traction and spin

out before the rear wheels in most conditions. In
extremely muddy conditions, it may be necessary to
apply both brakes momentarily to increase hydrostatic
pressure to the 4-wheel drive motors.
When the drive is engaged, these approximate

reductions in ground speed occur:
•First Gear: 20%
•Second Gear: 30%
•Third Gear: 50%
H01,9000OS,AO -19-13DEC93
20-9 240397
PN=28
Operators Station
CONCAVE CLEARANCE (BLACK)
Switch controls concave clearance. Push plus (+) symbol

for more clearance or push minus (-) symbol for less
clearance.
-UN-06AUG91
Concave clearance changes can be seen on the
indicator outside the right hand cab window.
The indicator will not show more than 10 when the
H43703
concave is opened all the way.
H01,9000OS,AP -19-09OCT91
CLEANING FAN (BLACK)
Switch controls cleaning fan speed. Separator must be

running to adjust fan speed. Push and hold rabbit
symbol for faster speed or push and hold turtle symbol
-UN-06AUG91
for slower speed.
The fan speed motor has a thermal (heat) shutoff that

will stop the motor from working if any of the following
happen:
H43705
•Switch is used continuously for more than 2 to 3
minutes.
•Adjustment system is up against the stop while the

motor is still trying to change speed.
•Excessive binding or dragging in the linkage.
If any of the above causes are suspected, clean and

adjust the system as necessary.
Allow 10 to 15 minutes for the motor to cool, then try the

switch again.
H01,9000OS,AQ -19-13DEC93
HEADER LIFT SWITCH (BLACK) (ON HYDRO

LEVER)
Engine must be running to raise or lower header.

-UN-06AUG91
Switch controls lifting and lowering of header. Press and

hold bottom of switch to raise; press and hold top of
switch to lower.
H43706
H01,9000OS,AR -19-13DEC93
20-10 240397
PN=29
Operators Station
VARIABLE SPEED FEEDER HOUSE/REEL

LIFT (BLACK) (ON HYDRO HANDLE)
Switch controls lifting and lowering of reel. Push and

hold plus (+) symbol to raise. Push and hold minus (-)
-UN-06AUG91
symbol to lower.
When equipped with variable speed feederhouse and

corn head, or row-crop head, this switch controls front
end speed. Push and hold minus (-) symbol to reduce
H43707
speed. Push plus (+) symbol to increase speed. Engine
and header must be running to adjust speed.
If the DIAL-A-MATIC or automatic auger swing are

operating when this switch is used, the reel or the
variable speed feeder house response may be incorrect.
H01,9000OS,AS -19-13DEC93
20-11 240397
PN=30
Operators Station
CORNERPOST MONITORS
A—Combine Data Center (Optional)

B—Fuel Gauge
C—Engine Temperature Gauge
D—HARVESTRAK™ Monitor Gauge
E—Selector Symbol
F—Separator Hours
G—Engine Hours
H—Ground Speed
I—Engine RPM
J—Backshaft Speed
K—Digital Display
L—Cylinder RPM
M—Fan RPM
-UN-19AUG94
H46199
HX,9000OS,A -19-24MAR97
20-12 240397
PN=31
Operators Station
COMBINE DATA CENTER
The combine data center provides the operator with the

following information:
Yield/Acre Mode
•Acres harvested
•Total acres harvested (since last cleared)
•Bushels harvested
•Total bushels harvested (since last cleared)
•Bushels per acre
Machine Settings
•Machine/crop settings (factory recommended)

•Machine/crop settings (operator’s preference)
-UN-19AUG94
H46200
HX,9000OS,B -19-24MAR97
20-13 240397
PN=32
Operators Station
•Area (A) indicates the number of acres harvested. The

displayed acres will increase as long as the engine is
running, the header is engaged, the header lower switch
is pressed and released to lower header, and the
machine is moving.
Acres will stop counting when the header raise switch is

activated for more than 1-1/2 seconds, the header is
disengaged or the machine stops.
To clear area, press the “CLEAR” button (E) while the

area light is on.
•Total Area (B) indicates the total acres harvested since

last cleared. To clear the displayed sum of acres, press
the “CLEAR” button while the total area light is on.
•Width (C) select header width by using the up/down

arrow buttons (F) until the width light is lit. To change
the width, press the “MEMORY” button (G), change th
-UN-10DEC94
width with the arrow buttons, and press the “MEMORY”
button again to store the new value.
NOTE: While in the “width” mode, you also have a

partial width of cut feature. It is possible to
H46246
temporarily decrease the width of cut by
increments of one fourth. This allows the operator
to account for passes through the field with less
than a full cut (like making the last pass in a
given field). The effective header width will
decrease by one fourth every time the clear
button is pushed. Raising the header for more
than 1.5 seconds will cause the header width to
return to the full width value.
•bu (D) indicates the number of bushels being unloaded.

The displayed bushels will increase as long as the
unloading auger is engaged and the grain door at at the
end of the unloading auger is open. To clear the
displayed bushels, press the “CLEAR” button while the
bushel light is on.
NOTE: If the grain door at the end of the unloading

auger does not return to the fully closed position
when the unloading auger is stopped, the display
will alternate between bushel reading and
“DOOR”. Check the operation of the door.
HX,9000OS,C -19-17FEB97
20-14 240397
PN=33
Operators Station
Total bu (H) indicates the total bushels harvested since

last cleared. To clear the displayed sum of bushels,
press the “CLEAR” button while the bushels per acre
light is on.
bu/A (I) indicates the bushels per acres harvested since

last cleared. To clear the displayed bushels per acre,
press the “CLEAR” button while the bushels per acre
light is on.
NOTE: bu/A will show “----” after clearing until the first
grain tank is unloaded.
Cal (J) is the bushel correction factor (see Calibrating

Bushel Counter).
ARROW buttons (K) are used to raise and lower values

while in the memory mode and to change the meters
function.
-UN-19AUG94
MEMORY button (L) must be pressed to change certain
values and pressed again to store the new value.
CLEAR button (M) is used to clear displayed values,

acres, total bushels, etc.
H46201
DISPLAY SELECT button (N) is used to select
performance, select crop and machine settings modes.
HX,9000OS,D -19-12SEP94
20-15 240397
PN=34
Operators Station
To calibrate the bushel counter:
•Harvest a full tank of grain.
•Use the up/down arrow buttons (A) until the “Cal” light
(B) is lit.
•Press the CLEAR button (C) to clear the previous

calibration number.
•Unload a known amount of grain (this may be one or

more tank full). You must be in the “Cal” mode anytime
you are unloading grain that you want to use in the
calibrate procedure (if four grain tank fulls are required to
fill the truck which will be weighed at the elevator, you
must be in the “Cal” mode for each of the four tank
fulls).
•Exit the calibrate position and continue to harvest until

unloaded grain gets measured.
-UN-19AUG94
•When the unloaded grain measurement value is known,
set the Data Center to the “calibrate” mode.
•Press MEMORY button (D).
H46202
•Use the arrows to change the displayed values to the
bushel amount of the measured unloaded grain.
•Press the MEMORY button again to store this new

calibration number.
NOTE: You cannot calibrate the counter with less than

50 bushels of crop. Also, do not attempt to
increase or decrease the “Cal” number to the
point that the actual unload rate exceeds 154
bu/min or is less than 24 bu/min. If you do
“ERROR” will flash and you will see the value
that is equivalent to the maximum (154) or
minimum (24) unloading rate.
The display will temporarily show “ERROR” if you

try to leave the calibrate position with the auger
engaged.
HX,9000OS,E -19-08JAN96
20-16 240397
PN=35
Operators Station
For crop selections, press the DISPLAY SELECT button

(A) to change the display until crops are displayed.
Use the arrows (B) to select the proper crop. All crops
with a “1” suffix are preloaded values. If a machine
setting for a particular crop is changed, then the suffix
will change to a “2” (see MACHINE SETTINGS).
There are five memory locations to load specialty crops

or settings. They are displayed as CROP 1, CROP 2,
CROP 3, CROP 4 and CROP 5.
-UN-19AUG94
H46203
HX,9000OS,F -19-12SEP94
Following the crop selection procedure, press the

DISPLAY SELECT button (A) to change the display to
the machine settings.
Use the arrow buttons (B) to view the various machine

settings. To change a setting:
•Press MEMORY button (C).
•Use arrow buttons to change the setting.
•Press the MEMORY button again to store the new

value.
-UN-19AUG94
H46204
HX,9000OS,G -19-12SEP94
20-17 240397
PN=36
Operators Station
FUEL GAUGE
With key on, fuel gauge needle will move to right,

showing amount of fuel in tank. Red/orange color shows
low fuel (about one hour of fuel remaining). Green color
-UN-14MAR89
shows 1/4 full or more.
The needle may be in any position with the key off.
Fuel tank capacity is 530 L (140 U S gal.).
H39097
OM,9500OS,Z -19-24MAR97
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Needle should read in the black zone during operation.
If the red light on the Warning Display Panel turns on
-UN-06AUG91
and the buzzer sounds, stop engine and check problem
immediately.
H43691
H01,9000OS,Z -19-24MAR97
HARVESTRAK® MONITOR
The HARVESTRAK monitor checks grain loss by

measuring a sample of losses over the cleaning shoe
and/or straw walkers. A change in the loss rate is
-UN-14MAR89
indicated by the control panel meter.
Refer to MONITORS section for additional information.

See your John Deere dealer for parts.
H39096
H01,9000OS,AA -19-24MAR97
20-18 240397
PN=37
Operators Station
DIGITAL TACHOMETER
The engine hour meter (A) records hours only when the
engine is running. The display shows only full hours but
updates the memory in quarter hours.
-UN-06AUG91
No hours are added unless the engine is running.
Separator hours are recorded only when the header and

separator drives are engaged and the engine is running.
H43692
For engine hours, press the ground speed symbol (B)
and the engine rpm symbol (C) at the same time.
For separator hours, press the cylinder rpm symbol (D)

and the fan rpm symbol (E) at the same time.
For backshaft speed, press the engine rpm symbol (C)

and the fan rpm symbol (E) at the same time.
Two squares will be displayed on indicator (F) to show

which symbols were pressed.
H01,9000OS,AB -19-24MAR97
20-19 240397
PN=38
Operators Station
OVERHEAD WARNING DISPLAY PANEL
-19-06JUN91
H43339
Overhead Warning Display Panel
Shows a red, yellow or blue light and sounds a Blue Light—Be aware of condition.
buzzer for the following conditions.
When key is in start position, all lights on the panel
Red Light—Stop engine at once and correct will come on.
problem.
Yellow Light—Service or correct problem. Stop These warning lights dim at night when the field or
engine as required. road lights are on.
OM,9500OS,E -19-11SEP92
20-20 240397
PN=39
Operators Station
UNLOAD AUGER ON
Blue light will come on, buzzer will sound three short
pulses, a 15 second pause and then repeat.
-UN-07JUN91
H43532
H01,9000OS,CH -19-11SEP92
LOW FUEL
The fuel level low light will be come on and the buzzer
will sound four beeps every five minutes until fuel is
added. The alarm will sound when the fuel gauge is in
-UN-07JUN91
the middle of the red/orange area (remaining fuel left for
approximately one hour of field operation).
H43531
OM,9500OS,G -19-13DEC96
PARK BRAKE ON
Yellow light on whenever the park brake is depressed.

The buzzer will sound steadily if the hydro lever is out of
neutral.
-UN-07JUN91
H43530
OM,9500OS,H -19-23JAN92
SEP (SEPARATOR) DRIVE FILTER
Yellow light on. Buzzer sounds four beeps every five

minutes until error is corrected.
-UN-07JUN91
Replace oil filter.

H43340
OM,9500OS,I -19-21DEC94
20-21 240397
PN=40
Operators Station
SEP (SEPARATOR) DRIVE TEMP
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily when oil in

the gearcase reaches 93˚ (200˚F). Check oil level and
clean oil cooler.
-UN-07JUN91
If the light still stays on, see your John Deere dealer.
H43341
OM,9500OS,J -19-23JAN92
HYDRAULIC OIL TEMP
Yellow light comes on and the buzzer sounds steadily.

Clean oil cooler and check oil level in main hydraulic
reservoir.
-UN-07JUN91
H43342
OM,9500OS,K -19-23JAN92
VOLTAGE
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if voltage

drops below 10 volts and will stay on until voltage
increases to 11 volts. Check wiring, alternator belt,
-UN-11OCT88
batteries and cables.
This light may come on for a short period of time after

starting the engine, if the batteries are low.
H39237
H01,9000OS,J -19-09OCT91
ENG (ENGINE) AIR FILTER
Yellow light comes on when engine air filter is plugged.

Buzzer sounds three beeps every 30 minutes until the
problem is corrected.
-UN-07JUN91
Clean or replace primary filter element. Replace safety

element only if needed.
H43344
OM,9500OS,M -19-23JAN92
20-22 240397
PN=41
Operators Station
SEPARATOR PLUGGED
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds after two seconds

when walkers are plugged. Clean off walkers. Light must
be on for two seconds to sound buzzer. Header drive
-UN-07JUN91
must be on to turn on the system.
If the light still stays on, check switch adjustment (over

walkers).
H43345
SH9500OS,A -19-11SEP92
GRAIN TANK FULL
Blue light comes on and buzzer sounds two short pulses

when grain tank is full. The light stays on until tank is
emptied. Sensor must be tripped for two seconds to turn
-UN-07JUN91
on light.
If the header switch is off, then the buzzer will not sound
but the light will stay on.
H43346
If the light still stays on after the grain tank is empty,
check switch paddle in tank for free movement and clean
if necessary.
OM,9500OS,N -19-23JAN92
HYDRO CHARGE PRESSURE
Red light on and buzzer pulsates after four seconds.

Stop engine and check oil level in the reservoir. Add oil
as needed or change filter.
-UN-07JUN91
H43347
H01,9000OS,N -19-09OCT91
20-23 240397
PN=42
Operators Station
SEP (SEPARATOR) DRIVE PRESSURE
Red light on and buzzer pulses. Stop engine and check

oil level in the reservoir. Add oil as needed. If warning
continues, change filter.
-UN-07JUN91
H43348
OM,9500OS,P -19-23JAN92
ENG (ENGINE) TEMPERATURE
Red light on and buzzer pulses. Stop engine and check:
• radiator coolant level
-UN-07JUN91
• plugged radiator or rotary screen leaking hoses
• broken fan belt
• correct engine fan speed (see Engine Service)
H43349
OM,9500OS,Q -19-13DEC93
ENG (ENGINE) OIL PRESSURE
Red light on and buzzer pulses if oil pressure drops

below 2 bar (25 psi). Stop engine and check oil level,
lines and filter.
-UN-07JUN91
NOTE: This sensor also provides the interlock so the

header lift, reel lift, reel fore/aft, and
DIAL-A-MATIC will not function unless the engine
is running.
H43350
OM,9500OS,R -19-23JAN92
20-24 240397
PN=43
Operators Station
STRAW CHOPPER (OPTIONAL)
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steady if the straw

chopper is running below 85 percent of it’s proper speed.
Header drive must be on and the operator must be in
-UN-07JUN91
the seat. Stop engine, inspect drives and look for
plugging (see Low Shaft Speed Monitor in the Monitors
section of this manual).
H43351
OM,9500OS,S -19-24MAR97
GRAIN SEPARATOR
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if the straw

walkers are running below 85 percent of their proper
speed. Header drive must be on and the operator must
-UN-06AUG91
be seated. Stop engine, inspect drives and look for
H43708
H01,9000OS,CJ -19-24MAR97
AUGER CONVEYOR
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if the augers

are running below 85 percent of their proper speed.
Header drive must be on and the operator must be
-UN-08AUG91
seated. Stop engine, inspect drives and look for plugging

(see Low Shaft Speed Monitor in the Monitors section of
this manual).
H43709
OM,9500OS,U -19-24MAR97
GRAIN ELEVATOR
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if the clean

grain elevator is running below 85 per cent of it’s proper
-UN-07JUN91

H43354
OM,9500OS,V -19-24MAR97
20-25 240397
PN=44
Operators Station
TAILINGS ELEVATOR
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if the tailings

elevator is running below 85 per cent of it’s proper
-UN-07JUN91
H43355
OM,9500OS,W -19-24MAR97
CYLINDER SPEED
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds steadily if rpm drops

to less than 80 percent of current setting of cylinder
speed. Engine must be running, header drive must be
-UN-07JUN91
on, and cylinder drive must be above 90 rpm to work.
When the light and buzzer come on, stop engine and
check for plugging. The sensor behind the cylinder
sheave should be a half turn from contacting the tone
H43356
wheel. If the light still stays on, see your John Deere
dealer.
NOTE: Cylinder speed light will not come on when

reducing engine speed to low idle. Engine speed
must be steady when cylinder speed drops for
warning light to come on.
OM,9500OS,X -19-23JAN92
ENGINE SPEED
Yellow light on and buzzer sounds if rpm drops below

2000 on the Combine.
-UN-07JUN91
When the light and buzzer come on, reduce the load on
the engine.
H43357
OM,9500OS,Y -19-23JAN92
20-26 240397
PN=45
Operators Station
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

CONTROLS
The recirculation fan controls air coming out the louvers.

Lever (A) has three speeds and an off position. Off is
provided for cold weather start-up before engine/heater
comes up to operating temperature.
If maximum air conditioning is needed, slide lever (B) to

“MAX COLD” and slide lever (A) to the fastest fan
speed. Lower the fan speed to medium as the cab cools,
then lower the fan speed to low if necessary. Wait three
to four minutes between adjustments for the temperature
to stabilize.
If the cab is still too cool, slide lever (B) toward “MAX
HOT”, 3 mm (1/8 in.) at a time until the air is
comfortable.
If the compressor stays off 3 to 4 minutes and the air
-UN-08MAR93
smells musty, move lever (B) slightly toward HOT and
increase the fan speed one position.
H45804
H01,9000OS,AT -19-13DEC93
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH AND

OPTIONAL WINDSHIELD WASHER
The standard length wiper will stop on the left hand side
only.
-UN-06JAN92
The optional extra long wiper can be stopped on either

side of glass, depending on when the switch is returned
to the off position (A).
H42603
The key switch must be in the on position for the wiper

to work.
A windshield washer is available from your John Deere

dealer for use with the optional full view wiper.
Move lever to wash position (C) to spray window.

Washer will spray as long as lever is held in this
position. When released, it will return to the wipe position
(B).
H01,9000OS,AV -19-11SEP92
20-27 240397
PN=46
Operators Station
FULL VIEW™ WIPER (OPTIONAL)
-UN-22AUG91
H43876
H01,9000OS,AW -19-09OCT91
FILLING WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

(ATTACHMENT)
Remove cap (A) and fill reservoir with automotive

windshield washer solution.
-UN-11OCT88
The windshield washer is offered for use only with the
optional full view wiper.
H39261
H01,9000OS,AX -19-20MAR90
TOOL BOX
Located on the left-hand rear side of the combine.

-UN-19AUG96
H48059
H01,9000OS,AY -19-17OCT96
20-28 240397
PN=47
Operators Station
ARMREST STORAGE BOX
The arm rest lid lifts for storage.
Keep your COMBINE SETTINGS card (A) in this storage
-UN-09JAN92
box.
The decal (B) shows engine starting information.
H42611
H01,9000OS,AZ -19-24MAR97
COMBINE VIDEO
A combine video of basic adjustments for the best

combine performance, is located in the arm rest storage
box.
-UN-09JAN92
H42612
H01,9000OS,CF -19-11SEP92
STORAGE TRAY/RECIRCULATOR FILTER
A tray is located in left-hand rear corner of cab. Remove

it for access to recirculator air filter.
-UN-11OCT88
H39387
H01,9000OS,BA -19-20MAR90
MANUAL STORAGE
Keep your manuals in the holder at rear of seat.

-UN-11OCT88
H39389
H01,9000OS,BC -19-20MAR90
20-29 240397
PN=48
Operators Station
CAB DOOR LOCK
This lock uses the start key.
-UN-11OCT93
H45899
H01,9000OS,BD -19-13DEC93
EMERGENCY EXIT
Pull tab (A) to begin removal of rubber rope (B).
Continue to pull until rope is removed from around
-UN-11OCT88
window. The window can now be pushed out and
allowed to fall free.
See your John Deere dealer for window replacement.
H39671
H01,9000OS,BE -19-13DEC93
CUP HOLDER
The cup holder (A) is big enough to accommodate large

beverage cans or cups.
-UN-26AUG94
H46209
HX,9000OS,I -19-08JAN96
20-30 240397
PN=49
Operators Station
PERSONAL POSTURE™ SEAT (STANDARD)
The personal posture seat is equipped with an operator’s

presence system.
-UN-11OCT88
You must be seated for the header and feeder house to
operate.
After leaving the seat, the header and feeder house will
stop in five seconds.
H39392
To engage, sit down, shut header off and then turn it on.
Header and feeder house should start running again.
This procedure is shown on a decal under the armrest

storage box lid. Also see Header Engage in this manual.
HX,9000OS,BF -19-24MAR97
ADJUSTING SEAT UP AND DOWN OR

FORWARD AND REARWARD
To adjust the seat up or down , remove your weight

from the seat and raise lever (A).
-UN-01MAR90
To move the seat forward or rearward, push lever (B) to
the left.
The right-hand side control console moves with the seat.
H41730
HX,9000OS,BG -19-24MAR97
ADJUSTING LEFT-HAND ARMREST AND

SEAT BACK
Push button (A) to raise or lower armrest.
-UN-11OCT88
Slide knob (B) for lower back support adjustment.
Slide knob (C) to adjust seat back angle.

H39393
HX,9000OS,BH -19-24MAR97
20-31 240397
PN=50
Operators Station
ADJUSTING ARMREST UP AND DOWN OR

To adjust the armrest up or down, loosen flange nuts (A)

under console. Tighten flange nuts.
To adjust the armrest forward or rearward, loosen three

screws (B).
Slide arm rest to desired position and tighten screws.
-UN-05FEB97
Armrest will slide approximately 50 mm (2-in.)
H48234
HX,9000OS,BI -19-24MAR97
PERSONAL POSTURE™ AIR SUSPENSION

SEAT (OPTIONAL)
The personal posture seat now has an air suspension

system for added operator comfort. The seat has a
-UN-30AUG94
self-contained electric compressor to adjust the seat
suspension to match the operator’s height and weight.
The seat has four main adjustments:
•Vertical Shock Dampener
H46206
•Height Adjustment
•Fore/Aft Adjustment
•Fore/Aft Attenuator Lock-Out
HX,9000OS,H -19-08JAN96
20-32 240397
PN=51
Operators Station
SEAT SUSPENSION AND FORWARD AND

REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Vertical shock dampener control (A) allows the operator

to limit the amount of “upward motion” the seat
suspension provides. Based on operating conditions, this
control has three detent positions.
These three detent positions usually cannot be felt. Push

control (A) all the way down for the softest ride. Move
the control all the way up for the firmest ride. Between
these two positions is the medium firmness position.
-UN-26AUG94
Height adjustment is made with a push/pull knob (B). To
raise the seat, push in on the knob. To lower the seat,
pull out on the knob.
H46207
NOTE: The suspension can be adjusted to reach limits
in the minimum and maximum heights, which in
effect, locks out the suspension system, making it
rigid. The suspension height control will also hit A—Vertical Shock Dampener Control
the limits if adjusted too close to the extremes. B—Height Adjustment Knob
C—Fore/Aft Adjustment Knob
Control (C) allows the seat to slide forward or rearward D—Fore/Aft Attenuator Lock-Out Handle
for best working position.
Attenuator lock-out handle (D) locks out or releases the

forward or rearward movement. Pull up on the handle to
lock; push down on the handle to release.
NOTE: If the seat does not float or “pump” up, see your
John Deere dealer.
The air seat also has the operator’s presence system

that is used on the standard seat. You must be seated
for the header and feeder house to operate.
After leaving the seat, the header and feeder house will
stop in five seconds.
To engage, sit down, shut header off and then turn it on.
Header and feeder house should start running again.
This procedure is shown on a decal under the armrest.

Also see Header Engage in this manual.
HX,9000OS,L -19-24MAR97
20-33 240397
PN=52
Operators Station
ADJUSTING LEFT-HAND ARMREST AND

SEAT BACK
Push button (A) to raise or lower the left-hand armrest.
Slide knob (B) for lower back support adjustment.
Slide knob (C) to adjust seat back angle.
-UN-05FEB97
H48234
HX,9000OS,J -19-24MAR97
ADJUSTING ARMREST UP AND DOWN OR

To adjust the armrest up or down, loosen flange nuts (A)

under console. Tighten flange nuts.
To adjust the armrest forward or rearward, loosen three

screws (B).
Slide arm rest to desired position and tighten screws.
-UN-05FEB97
Armrest will slide approximately 50 mm (2-in.)
H48234
HX,9000OS,BI -19-24MAR97
20-34 240397
PN=53
Operators Station
SEAT BELTS
Seat belts are standard equipment on both the operator

and passenger seats. The lap type seat belts have push
button quick release and automatic belt retraction to
allow unrestricted exiting and entering of the seats.
-UN-19OCT95
H47127
HX,9000OS,BJ -19-25OCT95
AUXILIARY POWER OUTLET
The outlet provides two 30-amp terminals. When

connected, one power terminal provides a continuous
power source, the other terminal provides power only
-UN-30AUG94
when the ignition key is turned to the “accessory or start”
position.
H46210
HX,9000OS,K -19-12SEP94
POWER STRIP ELECTRICAL OUTLETS

(ATTACHMENT)
-UN-17SEP96
The power strip (A) with six additional electrical outlets,

provides key-switched or unswitched power.
H48081
HX,9000OS,N -19-17SEP96
20-35 240397
PN=54
Operators Station
GREENSTAR™ (FACTORY INSTALLED

ATTACHMENT)(COMPONENT HARDWARE
ONLY)
GreenStar yield mapping is a fully integrated precision

farming package, which consists of a GreenStar display
monitor, mass-flow sensor, moisture sensor and mapping
processor.
-UN-19AUG96
H48057
HX,9000OS,M -19-24MAR97
CAB LADDER
The ladder can be positioned from the ground or the

landing with lever (A). Swing ladder forward or rearward.
The ladder will lock into place (3 positions).
-UN-27APR92
N CAUTION: Do not ride or attempt to climb front
or rear ladders while combine is moving.
If the ladder latch appears loose, clean out the latch pin
H44249
area. Do not use oil or grease in this area.
H01,9000OS,BK -19-13DEC93
CAB LADDER POSITIONS
Normal operating field position (A).
Pull down latch and swing ladder to position (B) for

-UN-11OCT88
combines with a small header, a ladder extension or

duals.
Pull down latch and swing ladder to position (C) for truck
transport.
H39395
H01,9000OS,BL -19-13DEC93
20-36 240397
PN=55
Operators Station
CAB LANDING SAFETY CHAINS
Safety chains (A) must be tight when ladder is in the full

forward position. Adjust chains with pins (B).
-UN-19AUG96
H48060
H01,9000OS,BM -19-17OCT96
FIRE EXTINGUISHER RECOMMENDATIONS
Two 10 lb. ABC type fire extinguishers should be

mounted on the combine. See your John Deere dealer
for TY15629 (not available in Canada) fire extinguisher
-UN-11OCT88
and TY15630 mounting bracket.
Read the manual provided with the extinguisher for

operating instructions. Once the extinguisher is
discharged, no matter for how long, it must be
H39760
recharged.
H01,9000OS,BN -19-20MAR90
20-37 240397
PN=56
Operators Station
FRONT FIRE EXTINGUISHER MOUNTING
Center mounting bracket on front side of ladder using

dimensions shown.
-UN-22FEB90
On machines using position (A), swing ladder to
transport position. Locate bottom of extinguisher 6 mm
(1/4 in.) above top of feederhouse access step and 19
mm (3/4 in.) back from bolts as shown.
H41593
Use bracket as template to mark four holes. Drill holes
with 5/16 in. bit and secure bracket with truss head bolts
(not supplied) with head of bolts toward the fire
extinguisher.
A—9400, 9500 Combines w/o Duals or Axle
Install extinguisher and secure with clamp. Spacers
B—9400, 9500 Combines w/Duals or Axle Spacers
and 9600 Combines
H01,9000OS,BO -19-09OCT91
REAR FIRE EXTINGUISHER MOUNTING
Mount rear fire extinguisher on rear landing as follows:
Attach mounting bracket (A) to rear ladder landing (B)
-UN-11OCT88
with truss head bolts, (not supplied) flat washers and
lock nuts. Secure the bracket in three places (C) with the
bolt heads toward the fire extinguisher.
H39739
H01,9000OS,BP -19-20MAR90
20-38 240397
PN=57
Operators Station
WASHING CAB WINDOWS, SERVICING

HEAD LIGHTS AND WIPER
Use ladder and landing to clean left side of cab.
N CAUTION: Raise feeder house completely and

install safety stop on left-hand side feeder
house lift cylinder. Close cab door securely
and use hand holds.
IMPORTANT: Do not manually move the wiper arm,
-UN-22FEB90
this could cause damage to the wiper
mechanism.
Stand on raised feeder house to clean front cab window

and service head lights or wiper.
H41594
Access feeder house by using step on left-hand side.
Use step and landing to clean right side of cab.
-UN-22FEB90
H41595
H01,9000OS,BR -19-14JAN97
20-39 240397
PN=58
Operators Station
RIGHT-HAND SIDE CAB ACCESS
Raise feeder house.
N CAUTION: Engine must be off and key
-UN-11OCT88
removed.
Turn engine off, remove key and lower safety stop.
IMPORTANT: Close cab door before using safety rail
H39767
next to cab door.
On 9400 and 9500 Combines, use step (A) to get to

landing (B).
On 9600 combines, step directly from feederhouse to

landing (B).
H01,9000OS,BQ -19-20MAR90
GRAIN TANK WINDOW/REAR CAB WINDOW

CLEANING

removed
-UN-11OCT88
Loosen clamps (A) and swing grain tank window (B) up
for cleaning.
H39265
H01,9000OS,BS -19-20MAR90
HORN
Press button (A) to sound horn.

-UN-11OCT96
H48120
H01,9000OS,BT -19-17OCT96
20-40 240397
PN=59
Operators Station
SHIFTING FEEDER HOUSE/HEADER

REVERSER
IMPORTANT: Reel must be raised before engaging

reverser. Backing out a crop “slug”
-UN-28FEB90
into a turning reel will bend it.
1. Stop header by switching off yellow header drive

switch.
H41726
2. Throttle engine to slow idle.
3. Step and hold down on left side of pedal.
NOTE: The pedal must be held down or it will not shift. A—Normal Operating Position (Down)
B—Reversing Position (Down)
4. Lift and push header drive switch to start header.
5. Run header and feeder house in reverse to free

“slug”.
6. Stop header by switching yellow header drive switch

off as soon as free of “slug”.
7. Step on right side of pedal.
8. Momentarily engage header to allow shifter to engage

in forward direction.
9. Repeat step 8, if necessary, to engage in forward

direction.
10. Throttle engine to high idle.
11. Resume harvesting. Do not attempt to force “slugs”

through combine by repeated cycling of reversing drive.
Repeated cycling shortens the life of components.
H01,9000OS,BV -19-11SEP92
STEERING WHEEL HEIGHT ADJUSTING
N CAUTION: Adjust steering wheel only when

combine is stopped.
-UN-20FEB90
Loosen hub (A). Push or pull wheel to position. Tighten

hub to lock.
Only a slight tightening of the hub is needed to hold

steering wheel in position.
H41597
H01,9000OS,BW -19-20MAR90
20-41 240397
PN=60
Operators Station
STEERING COLUMN TILT ADJUSTING
N CAUTION: To prevent momentary loss of

control, adjust column only when combine is
stopped.
-UN-19JUL91
Press pedal (A) to release lock on steering column. Put
column in desired position. Column locks when pedal is
released.
H43501
Column is spring loaded to the upright position. Do not
step on pedal without holding steering wheel in both
hands.
H01,9000OS,BX -19-13DEC93
GEAR SHIFT LEVER
IMPORTANT: Stop the combine and move hydro

lever to neutral before shifting from
one gear to another.
-UN-05FEB97
When shifting with the gear shift lever (A), the shift is a
straight line pattern with detents for 1, 2 and 3. A lesser
detent is felt for neutral between 1st and 2nd gears.
H48235
H01,9000OS,BY -19-24MAR97
MANUAL PARKING BRAKE
IMPORTANT: The combine is equipped with manual

engage and disengage parking brake
pedals. Be certain to engage the
-UN-19JUL91
parking brake when engine is running

and combine is parked and before
leaving the combine with the engine
turned off.
H43502
Press pedal (A) to engage the parking brake and pedal

(B) to disengage the parking brake.
H01,9000OS,CG -19-09OCT91
20-42 240397
PN=61
Operators Station
BRAKE PEDALS
Leave brake pedals (A) unlocked for field use. Lock

brake pedals together with lock (B) for transporting.
-UN-19JUL91
H43503
-UN-19JUL91
H43504
H01,9000OS,BZ -19-09OCT91
20-43 240397
PN=62
Operators Station
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE CONTROL LEVER
IMPORTANT: If the hydro charge pressure light

comes on in the warning display panel
when the lever is moved, check
-UN-12SEP90
hydrostatic/hydraulic oil level or replace
filter. If this doesn’t correct the
problem, see your John Deere dealer.
Move lever forward to go forward.
H42342
Move lever to the right and rearward to go backward.
To adjust handle angle, turn handle (A) counterclockwise

to loosen collar (B). Position handle, tighten collar with
fingers, then turn handle clockwise to tighten collar
firmly.
If additional tightness is required, position hydro handle

approximately 20 degrees counterclockwise from the
desired position. Tighten collar with fingers. Hold collar
with fingers and turn handle clockwise to desired
position.
Do not use pliers on collar, tighten with fingers.
H01,9000OS,CA -19-13DEC93
20-44 240397
PN=63
Operators Station
DEERE-DELCO AM/FM STEREO RADIO
-UN-26AUG91
H43878
A—Power On/Off-Volume D—Treble Control G—Recall (Time/Frequency) J—Band AM/FM
B—Balance Left/Right E—Bass Control H—Set K—Preset Pushbuttons
C—Fade Front/Rear F—Seek I—Tune AM/FM
Features a digital display, clock, seek, tune, recall, RCL (CLOCK/FREQUENCY) - If time-of-day is not on
five AM/FM preset memories, off/on knob and display, press RCL (G). Press and hold SET button
volume, bass/treble/fade balance, band switch and set (H) and at the same time press and hold TUNE (I)
controls. (down arrow side) until the correct hour appears.
OFF/ON AND VOLUME KNOB - To turn radio on Press and hold SET button and at the same time,
and increase the volume, turn ON-OFF control knob press and hold TUNE (up arrow side) until correct
(A) to the right. Turn knob to left to turn radio off. minute appears (seconds will set to 00 when
adjusting minutes).
BALANCE/FADE - The left-right stereo balance is
adjusted by turning balance control knob (B) in the If radio is turned on and time is being displayed,
corresponding direction. press RCL to display frequency.
Using the tab behind BAL control, adjust FAD control The radio will automatically switch to stereo when
(C) to right to FADE toward rear speakers. Adjust to tuned to an FM station broadcasting stereo. Stereo
left to FADE toward front speakers. indicator light ST will be displayed.
NOTE: FADE and BALANCE controls have a detent MANUAL TUNING UP/DOWN - Each time tuning
position at the center for a balance of front to button (I) (up arrow) is pressed, selector will move to
rear and left to right. next higher station.
TREBLE/BASS - Turn the TRE control (D) to left to Each time tuning button (down arrow) is pressed,
decrease treble; turn TRE control to right to increase selector will move to previous station.
treble.
When manual tuning switch is held for approximately
Turn the bass control tab (E) right to increase bass; 0.5 second, tuner will scan in desired direction at rate
turn control tab to left to decrease bass. of approximately 10 stations per second.
NOTE: Both controls have a detent position at the When tuner reaches the end of the frequency band, a
center for a balance of treble and bass. “wrap around” to opposite end of the band will occur,
and tuning will continue until switch is released.
SEEK - Press SEEK (F) to automatically search for
next higher or lower listenable station and stay there.
It will find another station each time you press the
button.
H01,9000DDR,A -19-13DEC93
20-45 240397
PN=64
Operators Station
CLOCK - If time of day is not on the display, press RCL

(G).
Press and hold SET button (H) and at the same time
press and hold TUNE (down arrow side) (I) until correct
hour appears.
Press and hold SET button and at the same time press
and hold TUNE (up arrow side) until correct minute
appears.
BAND - Press BAND switch (J) to select desired band

(AM/FM).
NOTE: The last station heard on each band will be

stored in memory. When switching back to that
band, it will automatically return.
PUSHBUTTON - Five AM/FM stations can be stored for

immediate recall by pressing pushbuttons (K).
The SET button (H) is used to store stations in each of

the preset memories as follows:
Tune to station to be stored, using manual, seek, or

scan tuning methods.
Press SET button. SET appears in display. The station

frequency will flash five seconds or until set.
Press pushbutton that you want to establish for that

station. The radio will now return to that frequency each
time that button is pressed and released.
NOTE: If the set function is activated and no further

action occurs, the set function is automatically
cancelled after approximately five seconds.
H01,9000DDR,E -19-23JAN92
20-46 240397
PN=65
Operators Station
DEERE-DELCO AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CASSETTE AND WEATHERBAND
-UN-26AUG91
H43879
A—Power On/Off-Volume E—Bass Control I—Tune L—Tape Eject Button
B—Balance Left/Right F—Seek J—Band AM/FM and Weather M—Cassette Player
C—Fade Front/Rear G—Recall (Time/Frequency) Band N—Program
D—Treble Control H—Set K—Preset Pushbuttons
AM/FM and Weather Band
Is a AM/FM stereo radio with clock, cassette player SEEK - Press SEEK (F) to automatically search for
and weatherband. The radio features seek, tune, next higher or lower listenable station and stay there.
recall, five AM/FM preset memories, off/on knob and It will find another station each time you press the
volume, bass/treble/fade balance, band switch and set button.
controls. The cassette player features auto-reverse
with fast forward and reverse. RCL (CLOCK/FREQUENCY) - If time-of-day is not on
display, press RCL (G). Press and hold SET button
OFF/ON AND VOLUME KNOB - To turn radio on (H) and at the same time press and hold TUNE (I)
and increase the volume, turn ON-OFF control knob (down arrow side) until the correct hour appears.
(A) to the right. Turn knob to left to turn radio off.
Press and hold SET button and at the same time,
BALANCE/FADE - The left-right stereo balance is press and hold TUNE (up arrow side) until correct
adjusted by turning balance control knob (B) in the minute appears (seconds will set to 00 when
corresponding direction. adjusting minutes).
Using the tab behind BAL control, adjust FAD control If radio is turned on and time is being displayed,
(C) to right to FADE toward rear speakers. Adjust to press RCL to display frequency.
left to FADE toward front speakers.
The radio will automatically switch to stereo when
NOTE: FADE and BALANCE controls have a detent tuned to an FM station broadcasting stereo. Stereo
position at the center for a balance of front to indicator light ST will be displayed.
rear and left to right.
MANUAL TUNING UP/DOWN - Each time tuning
TREBLE/BASS - Turn the TRE control (D) to left to button (I) (up arrow) is pressed, selector will move to
decrease treble; turn TRE control to right to increase next higher station.
treble.
Each time tuning button (down arrow) is pressed,
Turn the bass control tab (E) right to increase bass; selector will move to previous station.
turn control tab to left to decrease bass.
When manual tuning switch is held for approximately
NOTE: Both controls have a detent position at the 0.5 second, tuner will scan in desired direction at rate
center for a balance of treble and bass. of approximately 10 stations per second.
H01,9000DDR,B -19-23JAN92
20-47 240397
PN=66
Operators Station
When tuner reaches the end of the frequency band, a

“wrap around” to opposite end of the band will occur,
and tuning will continue until switch is released.
CLOCK - If time of day is not on the display, press RCL

(G).
Press and hold SET button (H) and at the same time
press and hold TUNE (down arrow side) (I) until correct
hour appears.
Press and hold SET button and at the same time press
and hold TUNE (up arrow side) until correct minute
appears.
BAND - Press BAND switch (J) to select desired band

(AM/FM) or Weatherband.
NOTE: The last station heard on each band will be

stored in memory. When switching back to that
band, it will automatically return.
PUSHBUTTON - Five AM/FM and Weatherband stations

can be stored for immediate recall by pressing
pushbuttons (K).
The SET button (H) is used to store stations in each of

the preset memories as follows:
Tune to station to be stored using manual, seek, or scan

tuning methods.
Press SET button. SET appears in display. The station

frequency will flash five seconds or until set.
Press pushbutton that you want to establish for that

station. The radio will now return to that frequency each
time that button is pressed and released.
NOTE: If the set function is activated and no further

action occurs, the set function is automatically
cancelled after approximately five seconds.
H01,9000DDR,F -19-29APR92
20-48 240397
PN=67
Operators Station
INSERTING TAPE - Insert tape into door (A) marked

AUTO REVERSE. Raised portion of cassette cartridge
should be to the right.
NOTE: The arrows (B) or (C) point in the direction the
-UN-26AUG91
tape is playing.
PROGRAM - Press both direction buttons (D)

simultaneously. The direction arrows (B) will change in
the graphic display and the player will change tracks.
H43880
FAST FORWARD - View the direction arrow. Press
button with arrow pointing in the same direction to
activate fast forward. Press other button lightly to cancel
and return to playing speed.
FAST REVERSE - View the direction arrow. Press

button with arrow pointing in the opposite direction to
activate fast reverse. Press other button lightly to cancel
and return to playing speed.
EJECT BUTTON - Press EJT button (E) firmly to eject

tape.
NOTE: When tape is ejected, the radio becomes

operative. It is not necessary to eject a tape
when leaving the cab, a solenoid removes
internal pressure automatically.
H01,9000DDR,C -19-23JAN92
WEATHERBAND
The weatherband is a service of the “Voice of the

National Weather Service.” It provides continuous
broadcasts of the latest weather information directly from
National Weather Service offices. Taped weather
messages are repeated every four to six minutes and
are routinely revised every one to three hours, or more
frequently if needed. Most of the stations operate 24
hours daily.
The weather radio network frequencies are:
162.400 MHz 162.425 MHz 162.450 MHz

162.475 MHz 162.500 MHz 162.525 MHz
162.550 MHz
H01,9000DDR,D -19-23JAN92
20-49 240397
PN=68
Lights and Signals
LIGHT SWITCHES
(A) Dimmer, for all cab interior lights.

(B) Off position.
(C) Warning (flashing) lights and turn signals when turn
-UN-26AUG94
signal lever is used.
(D) Warning (flashing) and four head lights, instrument
lights, tail lights and turn signals when turn signal lever
is used.
(E) Six head lights, instrument lights, tail light, grain tank
H46211
and header lights (field position) and side finder lights
(optional) on.
(F) Six head lights, instrument lights, tail light, grain tank
and header lights, side finder lights (optional) and auger
tube light.
(G) Auxiliary Field Lights switch (optional).
The auger light will be turned on only when the auger is

swung out at least 10 degrees.
HX,9000LS,A -19-12SEP94
WARNING LIGHTS
N CAUTION: Lights must be turned on when

transporting.
-UN-11OCT88
-UN-05FEB97
When transporting on a road, flashing lights give warning

to other drivers. These lights are located on both sides
at the front and rear of the combine.
H48236
H39404
-UN-12SEP90
H42343
H01,9000LS,B -19-24MAR97
25-1 240397
PN=69
Lights and Signals
TURN SIGNALS
When operating combine on road or highway, use turn

signals.
-UN-12SEP90
NOTE: The turn signals only operate in the warning and
road light positions. The turn signals are not self
cancelling so the lever must be moved back to
neutral.
H42344
With light switch lever on (hazard or road position),
warning light flashers will operate at 60 flashes per
minute. When turn signal is set for right-hand turn, the
right-hand warning light will flash 90 flashes per minute
while the left-hand warning light stays on (not flashing).
The opposite happens for left-hand turn.
NOTE: The indicator light on the steering column glows

steadily and indicates a turn.
H01,9000LS,C -19-05NOV90
CAB INTERIOR LIGHTS
A—Front Console and Armrest Console Light

B—Dome Light
-UN-11OCT88
C—Dome Light Switch
H39405
H01,9000LS,D -19-20MAR90
SIDE FINDER LIGHTS
The side finder lights (A) are used when additional light
to the sides is needed.
-UN-19AUG96
These lights are controlled by the turn signal lever and

operate only when the light switch is in either of the field
light positions.
These lights do not work when the flashing warning

H48063
lights are on.
H01,9000LS,E -19-17OCT96
25-2 240397
PN=70
Lights and Signals
UNLOADING AUGER LIGHT
Only operates when the light switch is in the last position

and the auger is swung out at least 10 degrees.
-UN-12SEP90
H42346
H01,9000LS,F -19-05NOV90
AUXILIARY FIELD LIGHTS (OPTIONAL)
Additional halogen lights are available for better overall

visibility of the ends of the header and for improved
visibility in front of the header. The lights are attached to
-UN-19OCT95
the left- and right hand side handrails on each side of
the cab.
H47128
HX,9000LS,H -19-25OCT95
25-3 240397
PN=71
Lights and Signals
SERVICE POWER RECEPTACLES (OPTIONAL)
-UN-20FEB90
H41599
IMPORTANT: Receptacles are powered whenever These wires are located in the left-hand side wiring
batteries are connected. harness (A), the engine compartment (B) and
right-hand side wiring harness (C).
Connect the service power receptacles to the wires
provided.
H01,9000LS,G -19-20MAR90
25-4 240397
PN=72
Prestarting Checks
BEFORE STARTING CHECKS
Before starting the engine for the first time each day:
• Check engine oil level. Do not operate engine when oil
-UN-29JUN92
-UN-29JUN92
level is below low mark on dip stick.
• Check coolant level in recovery tank. Fill to “Cold”

mark.
H44602
H44601
H01,9000PSC,A -19-13DEC93
• Check hydrostatic/hydraulic oil level with header on

ground and all cylinders retracted. Oil must cover sight
glass (A) and be below top of sight glass (B). Add oil as
needed. Do not over fill.
-UN-07AUG91
-UN-05FEB97
• With engine off, check hydraulic oil at engine gearcase.
Oil must not be below the low mark on dipstick (C). Do
not overfill.
H43757
H48237
H01,9000PSC,B -19-24MAR97
• With key on, fuel gauge needle will show the amount
of fuel in tank. Red/orange color shows low fuel (about
one hour of fuel remaining). Green color shows 1/4 full
or more.
-UN-14MAR89
The needle may be in any position with the key off.
• Fuel tank capacity is 530 L (140 U S gal.).
H39097
H01,9000PSC,C -19-13DEC93
• Drain water out of water trap (A) and engine filters.

(See DRAINING FILTER ELEMENT).
• If dirty fuel has been used, change filter (A) before

changing the engine filters.
-UN-07AUG91
H43759
H01,9000PSC,D -19-13DEC93
30-1 240397
PN=73
Prestarting Checks
• If engine has not been operated for a long time, bleed

entire fuel system to remove air. (See ENGINE
SERVICE).
• Grease combine and header.
-UN-29JUN92
H44603
H01,9000PSC,E -19-13DEC93
START SWITCH
N CAUTION: Sound horn before starting engine

to clear people away from the combine.
-UN-14FEB90
Start switch is located on right side of steering column.
Key positions are:
First Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off

Second Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories
Third Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories and Run
H41574
Fourth Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start
Turn key to the fourth position to start. All lights on the

warning display panel will come on.
When released, it will return to run or third position.
If engine will not crank, check for:
-UN-14JAN92
• Hydro lever in neutral.
• Separator off.
• Header off.
• Auger swing switch in neutral.
H42613
• Unloading auger off.
The decal (A) on the storage box lid shows engine

starting information.
H01,9000OS,BU -19-13DEC93
30-2 240397
PN=74
Operating the Engine
STARTING THE ENGINE
N CAUTION: Engine exhaust fumes can cause

sickness or death. If it is necessary to run an
engine in an enclosed area, remove the
-UN-12SEP90
exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension,

open the doors and get outside air into the
H42348
area.
1. Move hydrostatic lever (A) to neutral.
2. Turn yellow unloading auger drive switch (B) off. A—Hydrostatic Lever
B—Unloading Auger Drive Switch
C—Unloading Auger Swing Switch
3. Move yellow unloading auger swing switch (C) to
D—Engine Speed Control Switch
neutral. E—Separator Switch
F—Header Switch
4. Place orange engine speed control switch (D) in slow
idle position.
5. Turn yellow separator switch (E) off.
6. Turn yellow header switch (F) off.
N CAUTION: If the combine can be started with

any of these five switches on (A, B, C, E, F),
the starting system needs diagnosing. See
H01,9000OE,A -19-13DEC93
35-1 240397
PN=75

to clear people away from combine.
7. Turn the key switch to the on position. The buzzer will

sound once due to low oil pressure.
-19-06JUN91
8. Turn the key switch to ignition position. Engine oil
pressure warning light, hydro charge pressure warning
light, separator drive pressure warning light and parking
brake indicator light will come on if the park brake has
H43528
been applied and the buzzer will sound one short pulse.
If amber voltage light (A) comes on, this shows that
battery voltage is low and combine may not start.
9. Turn key switch clockwise to start. All lights on the

warning display panel will come on. Release key when
engine starts.
IMPORTANT: To prevent starter damage, do not

operate starter for more than 30
seconds at a time. If engine does not
start, wait at least two minutes before
trying again.
If temperature is below 40˚F (5˚C) it may be necessary

to use ether aid ( see ETHER AID in Operating the
Engine section). After engine starts, let it run at low idle
for five minutes to warm the oil. After the engine starts,
all lights except the park brake must be out. If any other
lights stay on, stop the engine and correct.
NOTE: (9500 and 9600 Combines Only) If the combine

fails to start and the tachometer is displaying a
three digit number followed by an “E” (---E), there
is a problem with the engine control system.
Refer to MONITORS section for further
information.
OM,9000OE,B -19-13DEC93
35-2 240397
PN=76
10. When engine starts, press engine rpm symbol (A),

engine will be at 1200 rpm at low idle.
11. For turbocharger lubrication, run engine at low idle

for a few minutes before applying a load to the engine.
-UN-17JUN91
H43599
OM,9000OE,C -19-13DEC93
Amber light (A) will momentarily come on if the batteries

are in a low charged state and will stay on if the
combine electrical system voltage drops below 10 volts.
-19-06JUN91
H43529
OM,9000OE,D -19-13DEC93
STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. Lower header or reel to the ground. If equipped with

optional reel fore/aft, move reel all the way forward.
-UN-07AUG91
2. Move hydrostatic lever (A) to neutral and stop header
(B) and separator (C).
3. Before stopping engine that has been operating at

working load, idle at least one minute to cool
H43760
turbocharger.
IMPORTANT: Cooling of turbocharger and some

engine parts is provided by engine oil.
Stopping a hot engine might cause
damage to these parts.
4. Turn key and all other switches off.
N CAUTION: Remove key from switch to prevent

accidents and battery discharge.
HX,9000OE,A -19-25OCT95
35-3 240397
PN=77
BREAKING-IN ENGINE
For the first 100 hours, avoid unnecessary engine idling.
The combine comes from the factory with SAE 10W-30
-UN-06AUG91
break-in engine oil. Change the oil after the first 100
hours. Use oil recommended in the Fuel and Lubricants
section of the manual.
The temperature gauge needle should read in the black
H43691
zone.
If needle moves into red/orange zone indicating 115˚C

(240˚F), stop engine and check problem immediately.
HX,9000OE,F -19-14JAN97
Check engine oil level periodically. Watch for leaks.
-UN-29JUN92
H44602
H01,9000OE,G -19-24MAR97
Check coolant level periodically. Watch for signs of

leaks. Pour coolant into recovery tank to the correct
level.
Until you become familiar with the sound and feel of

-UN-29JUN92
your combine, be extra alert.

H44601
H01,9000OE,H -19-24MAR97
35-4 240397
PN=78
AFTER 100 HOURS OF ENGINE OPERATION
Drain crankcase oil (A), change filter (B) and refill. See
Lubrication section. Repeat every 200 hours, or once a
season, whichever occurs first.
IMPORTANT: If diesel fuel sulfur content exceeds 0.7

percent, change oil every 100 hours.
Check unloading auger drive belt for stretch and adjust

cylinder rod stop as necessary (see Unloading Auger
-UN-29JUN92
Drive Cylinder Adjustment in the Grain Tank and
Unloading System section of this manual).
H44604
H01,9000OE,I -19-13DEC93
35-5 240397
PN=79
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
Use winter grade fuel. Fill tank at the end of each day to
prevent condensation.
-UN-29JUN92
Fuel tank cap (A) is non-vented. Instead, a breather (B)
extends from top of fuel tank.
The combine is shipped from the factory with permanent

type ethylene glycol antifreeze in the cooling system.
H44605
Leave antifreeze in cooling system all year around. If
coolant is lost or drained, it must be replaced with the
correct coolant and conditioner (See the
recommendations given in Fuels and Lubricants section
in this manual).
After adding antifreeze, turn heater on and run engine

until it reaches operating temperature. This mixes the
solution and circulates it through the system.
IMPORTANT: Do not try to drain cooling system to

protect against freezing. The heater
does not drain completely, so freeze
damage might result.
When the temperature drops below freezing, keep

batteries fully charged. Discharged batteries will freeze.
In freezing weather, do not add water to batteries unless

engine is to be run for 30 minutes or more or batteries
are charged after water is added.
Fill optional windshield washer reservoir with automotive

washer solution.
H01,9000OE,J -19-13DEC93
35-6 240397
PN=80
COOLANT HEATER
N CAUTION: To avoid shock or hazardous

operation, always use a three wire heavy duty
electrical cord equipped with three wire
-UN-23AUG88
connectors. If a two to three contact adapter is
used at the wall receptacle, always connect
green wire to a good ground.
Before connecting heater to power source, be

sure that element is immersed in coolant.
TS210
NEVER energize heater in air. Doing so can
cause element sheath to burst causing
personal injury.
The 1000-watt 115-volt coolant heater mounts in the

freeze plug opening in front of the engine block. By
warming engine coolant, the heater reduces oil drag,
-UN-13JUN91
eases starting, and shortens warm up time.
H43523
H01,9000OE,K -19-24MAR97
HANDLE STARTING FLUID SAFELY
Starting fluid is highly flammable.
Keep all sparks and flame away when using it. Keep
-UN-18MAR92
starting fluid away from batteries and cables.
To prevent accidental discharge when storing the

pressurized can, keep the cap on the container, and
store in a cool, protected location.
TS1356
Do not incinerate or puncture a starting fluid container.
DX,FIRE3 -19-16APR92
35-7 240397
PN=81
USING STARTING FLUID
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage, inject fluid

only in small amounts and only when
engine is turning. Do not press button
-UN-11OCT96
longer than one second at a time.
The ether aid will work only when the key switch is in
the run or start position.
H48121
Press button (A) to inject fluid.
H01,9000OE,L -19-18NOV96
35-8 240397
PN=82
HOT WEATHER OPERATION
N CAUTION: Coolant conditioner contains alkali.

Avoid contact with eyes. Do not take internally.
In case of contact, immediately wash skin with
-UN-29JUN92
soap and water. For eyes, flush with large
amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Call
a physician. Keep out of reach of children.
The cooling system must be clean and in good condition
H44601
for operation. Loss of pressure results in over heating
and loss of coolant.
Check for:
• recovery tank coolant level

• plugged radiator
• leaking hoses
-UN-14DEC88
• broken fan belt or rotary screen belt
• engine fan should be at high speed
The combine is shipped from the factory with permanent

type 50/50 ethylene glycol antifreeze in the cooling
RG4690
system.
Leave antifreeze in cooling system all year around. If

coolant is lost or drained, it must be replaced with the
correct coolant and conditioner (see the
recommendations given in Fuels and Lubricants in this
manual).
To prevent mineral deposits, do not use hard water.
The use of RE23182 Liquid Coolant Conditioner is

recommended to protect against engine and cooling
system wear. Add .9L (one quart) to radiator when
coolant is changed.
H01,9000OE,O -19-13DEC93
35-9 240397
PN=83
Transporting
DRIVING THE COMBINE ON ROADS
1. Lock brake pedals together with lock (A) when driving

on roads. Leave pedals unlocked for field operation.
-UN-16DEC91
IMPORTANT: Travel at a reasonable speed for road
or field conditions. Never transport on
the road with grain in the tank. Always
use warning lights.
H42556
Check local width laws before
transporting combine on road by
driving.
2. Fasten seat belt.
N CAUTION: Use the seat belt whenever you

operate the combine or ride as an observer.
-UN-19OCT95
H47127
HX,CTSTR,A -19-24MAR97
40-1 240397
PN=84
Transporting

to clear people away from the combine.
3. Sound horn and start engine. Use cold weather

starting aid if needed.
-UN-12SEP90
4. Raise header with header switch (A).
5. Disengage manual parking brake (B) with pedal (C).
H42352
6. Shift gears and slowly move hydro lever (D) forward
or rearward. When coming to the top of a hill, pull back
on the hydro lever before starting down the other side.
N CAUTION: If a 1243 or 1293 Corn Head is

attached, never transport combine faster than
13 km/h (8 mph) to assure adequate braking
performance and control.
-UN-27JUN91
H43525
HX,9000TR,B -19-25OCT95
40-2 240397
PN=85
Transporting
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to the hydrostatic

system, do not switch 4-Wheel Drive on
or off while driving combine in third
gear (road gear) at maximum travel
speed.
-UN-06AUG91
In third gear, the hydrostatic control
lever should be moved below number 4
on the decal before switching 4-wheel
drive on or off.
H43702
Turn 4-wheel drive off before going
down a steep grade.
Driving the combine in heavy load

conditions that cause the combine to
slow down or stop can cause high
pressures in the hydrostatic system.
It is not necessary to engage the 4-wheel drive except

for additional traction in muddy conditions.
It is NORMAL for front wheels to lose traction and spin

before the rear wheels in most conditions. When this
occurs, shift the transmission from first gear to second
gear. In very muddy conditions, it may be necessary to
apply both brakes momentarily to increase hydrostatic
pressure to the 4-wheel drive motors. If rear wheels are
spinning excessively, shift from second gear to first gear
HX,9000TR,C -19-13DEC93
40-3 240397
PN=86
Transporting
N CAUTION: When transporting on a road or

highway, flashing warning lights and taillights
on both sides provide a warning to operators
of vehicles approaching from the front and
rear. These warning lights must be turned on
-UN-09JAN92
when driving the combine on a public road. Do
not operate flashing warning lights if
prohibited by law.
7. Turn light switch (A) to (B) for daytime travel or to (C)
H44070
for night travel. Warning lights automatically operate
when switch is in either position.
8. Use turn signals as needed. They are not self

cancelling.
NOTE: Turn signal lights on the steering column burn

steadily to indicate a turn.
HX,9000TR,D -19-25OCT95
40-4 240397
PN=87
Transporting
TRANSPORTING COMBINE ON A TRAILER
1. Empty grain tank and remove header.
2. To reduce overall height, swing unloading auger back,
-UN-06JAN92
fold down grain tank extensions (A) (if equipped) and
remove loading auger (B).
3. If equipped with folding grain tank loading auger,

loosen clamps and lower auger.
H42607
4. Drive combine on trailer and put hydrostatic lever in
neutral.
5. Fold radio antenna (C) down.
6. Tape exhaust pipe cap (D) closed to prevent damage

to turbocharger.
7. Wire down cover over engine.
8. Wire side access door latches.
-UN-15FEB95
H46916
-UN-06JAN92
-UN-06JAN92
H42608
H42609
HX,9000TR,H -19-25OCT95
40-5 240397
PN=88
Transporting
8. Open left-hand side access shield (A) and swing

warning lamp (B) forward inside of access shield. Close
access shield.
9. Swing right-hand side warning lamp (C) rearward.
-UN-29JUN92
IMPORTANT: Fasten combine to trailer with chains.
H44606
-UN-11OCT93
H46104
-UN-11OCT93
H46105
HX,9000TR,F -19-13DEC93
40-6 240397
PN=89
Transporting
TOWING
Do not tow the combine except in an emergency for Tow in the forward direction by attaching a chain
a short distance at 8km/h (5 mph). To tow the around the main axle. Be certain the chain will not
combine, proceed as follows: damage any hydraulic lines. Have a driver in the
operator’s seat to steer and brake the combine.
Empty grain tank and remove header.
Turn on warning lights, unless prohibited by law.
Swing auger back. Fold grain tank extensions.
Travel at a safe and reasonable speed, not to exceed
Swing ladder to front of tire and fold down radio 8 km/h (5 mph).
antenna.
IMPORTANT: When towed in this manner, the
Disengage park brake. transmission lube pump is not
N
working and exceeding 8 km/h (5
CAUTION: Do not remove couplers. When mph) could damage the
couplers are removed, brakes are disabled. transmission.
Place gearshift and hydrostatic drive control lever in

neutral. N CAUTION: Do not tow combine with wire
rope. If rope breaks, the whipping action
could cause bodily injury.
HX,9000TR,G -19-13DEC93
40-7 240397
PN=90
Crop Settings and Seed Loss Charts
HARVESTING HINTS
This combine can be adjusted to harvest almost any

crop under most conditions. Become familiar with the
following before beginning:
-UN-11OCT88
The crop must be ready to thresh. Moisture content must
not be too high and straw must not be too green. Grain
with 12 per cent moisture or less, and corn with 14 per
cent moisture or less, is considered dry enough for safe
H39280
storage.
H01,9000CSL,A -19-20MAR90
Adjust the combine for the crop being harvested and the
field condition.
Use a ground speed that will not overload the combine.

The engine must be at full rpm to keep the separator at
-UN-11OCT88
full speed. Use ground speed for slower travel or shift to
a lower gear, but do not slow down the engine.
H39100
H01,9000CSL,B -19-20MAR90
If the concave is set too close for the crop being

harvested, the straw will be excessively ground up and
more horsepower will be required to thresh the crop.
If the concave is set too wide, the crop will not be
-UN-11OCT88
completely threshed.
After the concave is properly adjusted, the cylinder

speed is then adjusted to achieve maximum threshing
with the least crop damage. If crop damage does occur,
H39281
do not widen the concave clearance. Instead, reduce the
cylinder speed. Concave spacing in these crops has very
little effect on seed damage.
Crops, such as edible beans and peas, are easily

cracked and can require the use of a special slow speed
cylinder drive. When combining edible beans and peas,
keep the combine full to provide enough material to
cushion the crop against cracking.
H01,9000CSL,C -19-20MAR90
45-1 240397
PN=91
When using a cutting platform, cut the crop as high as

possible without loss of low heads. Adjust reel position
and speed for even feeding. Keep the cutterbar in
register and the guards in alignment for clean cutting.
When harvesting corn, keep the corn head only as low

as necessary for ears. Keep it centered in the rows to
prevent ear loss.
When using a belt pickup, keep the windrow centered so

material is fed evenly into the feeder house. The grain
heads must be lying in one direction. Operate the
combine so the heads are picked up first.
-UN-11OCT93
When harvesting soybeans with a row-crop head, keep
the header as low as possible. When harvesting crops
such as milo or sunflowers, operate the header just low
enough to cut the heads from the stalks.
H46106
Adjust chaffer openings with tool (A) to pass the grain or
seed to the lower sieve in the first two-thirds of the
chaffer without admitting too much coarse material.
Adjust the precleaner to the minimum setting for all
crops except corn.
Use as much air as possible without blowing over clean

grain and seed. Heavy crops require more air than light
seed crops.
H01,9000CSL,D -19-13DEC93
CROP SETTINGS
The following settings for various crops are for average

conditions. Varying crop and field conditions may require
slightly different settings.
NOTE: Some of these settings are on the card in the

storage area under the arm rest.
H01,9000CSL,E -19-12APR90
45-2 240397
PN=92
ALFALFA
Cylinder Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500-660
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 0
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
-UN-11OCT88
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm Fixed Hole
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm (1/2 in.)
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 mm Fixed Hole
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 mm (1/2 in.)
H39591
H01,9000CSL,AC -19-12APR90
BARLEY (FEED AND MALTING)

Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
-UN-11OCT88
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm (1/4 in.)
H39586
HX,9000CSL,F -19-13DEC93
BEANS (EDIBLE) AND BLACK-EYED PEAS

Cylinder Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 160-180
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 3-6
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 1000
-UN-11OCT88
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . Closed
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 mm (7/16 in.)
H39587
HX,9000CSL,G -19-13DEC93
BEANS (SOY)
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
-UN-11OCT88
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm (3/8 in.)
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 mm (3/8 in.)
H39588
HX,9000CSL,H -19-13DEC93
45-3 240397
PN=93
CANOLA (CANADIAN SPRING)

Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
-UN-11OCT88
H39598
HX,9000CSL,Q -19-13DEC93
CANOLA (U.S.WINTER)
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
-UN-11OCT88
H39598
HX,9000CSL,AA -19-13DEC93
CORN (SHELLED)
Cylinder Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . (Dry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300-425
Cylinder Speed (rpm) . . . . . . (Wet) . . . . . . start at 350 go up/down
in 10 rpm increments
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . (Dry) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
-UN-11OCT88
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . (Wet) . . . . . . Start at 4 (go

up/down in 6 mm [1/4-in.] increments
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Wet) . . . . . . . . . . . 1250-1300
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Dry) . . . . . . . . 8 mm (5/16 in.)
H39589
Precleaner . . . . . . (Wet) 6 mm (1/4 in.) up to 180 bu. yield

open slightly as needed
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 mm (7/16 in.) never less than 6 mm
(1/4-in.)
NOTE: Concave inserts installed.
HX,9000CSL,I -19-17OCT96
45-4 240397
PN=94
CORNCOB MIX
Concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/8 in. at front inspection hole
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
-UN-06MAR90
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 rpm and up
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corncob Element
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corncob Element
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removed
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed
H41739
H01,9000CSL,AB -19-09OCT91
FLAX
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
-UN-11OCT88
H39590
H01,9000CSL,J -19-12APR90
GRASS SEEDS
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500-750
-UN-11OCT88
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 to 10 mm (1/4 to 3/8 in.)
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 in.)
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 to 16 mm (1/2 to 5/8 in.)
H39591
H01,9000CSL,AD -19-09OCT91
GUAR (CLUSTER BEAN)

Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 2
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900
-UN-11OCT88
H39592
H01,9000CSL,K -19-12APR90
45-5 240397
PN=95
MILLET (PROSO)
Cylinder Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 500-550
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . 2-3
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . . . 950
-UN-11OCT88
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... . Closed
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 mm (3/8 x 1/2 in.)
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 mm (3/8 x 1/2 in.)
H39593
H01,9000CSL,L -19-05NOV90
MUSTARD
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
-UN-11OCT88
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 mm (1/8 x 1/4 in.)
H39594
H01,9000CSL,M -19-20MAR90
OATS
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
-UN-11OCT88
H39595
HX,9000CSL,N -19-13DEC93
PEAS (FIELD)
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
-UN-11OCT88
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 mm (5/16 to 3/8 in.)
H39596
H01,9000CSL,O -19-09OCT91
45-6 240397
PN=96
POPCORN
Cylinder Speed (rpm) (10 rpm increments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300-520
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator (1/4 increments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200-1300
-UN-11OCT88
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm (5/8-in.)
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mm (3/8-in.)
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Less than 10 mm (3/8-in.)
NOTE: Maximizer combines only, install rear concave
H39597
inserts should unthreshed losses occur, or the
rear concave opening become blocked by husks.
H01,9000CSL,P -19-17OCT96
RICE
Cylinder Speed (rpm)(Rasp Bar) . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650-800
Cylinder Speed (rpm)(Spike Tooth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600-750
Cylinder-to-Concave Indicator . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Beater Grate (Rasp Bar) . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
-UN-11OCT88
Finger Bar (Spike Tooth) . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed
Chaffer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 mm (5/8 in.)
Sieve Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 mm (1/4 in.)
Extension Setting . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 mm (5/8 in.)
H39599
HX,9000CSL,R -19-13DEC93
RYE
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
-UN-11OCT88
H39600
H01,9000CSL,S -19-20MAR90
45-7 240397
PN=97
SAFFLOWER
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
-UN-11OCT88
H39601
H01,9000CSL,T -19-20MAR90
SORGHUM
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up or Down
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
-UN-11OCT88
H39602
HX,9000CSL,U -19-13DEC93
SUNFLOWERS
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
-UN-11OCT88
H39603
HX,9000CSL,V -19-13DEC93
WHEAT
Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Up
Fan Speed (rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050
-UN-11OCT88
H39604
HX,9000CSL,W -19-13DEC93
45-8 240397
PN=98
SEED LOSS CHART (PLATFORMS)
The following seed loss chart shows the number of

seeds that equal a 50 kg per hectare loss (bushel per
acre). A few seeds behind the combine does not call for
numerous adjustments.
PLATFORM MODEL
913 915 918 920 922 925 930

Combine Crop Seeds in a .3 m Square (Seeds per Square Foot)
9400, 9500 BARLEY 44 (49) 51 (59) 62 (68) 68 (76) 75 (76) 82 (91) 103 (113
9600 BARLEY -- 42 (35) 51 (57) 57 (63) 62 (69) 68 (76) 86 (95)
9400, 9500 FLAX 228 (295) 260 (351) 317 (408) 349 (454) 383 (498) 418 (544) 526 (592
9600 FLAX -- 216 (293) 260 (340) 291 (378) 320 (415) 349 (453) 438 (566
9400, 9500 OATS 36 (26) 41 (31) 50 (36) 55 (41) 61 (45) 66 (49) 83 (53)
9600 OATS -- 34 (26) 41 (30) 46 (34) 50 (37) 55 (41) 69 (51)
9400, 9500 RYE 82 (105) 93 (125) 113 (145) 125 (161) 136 (177) 149 (194) 188 (212
9600 RYE -- 77 (104) 93 (121) 104 (134) 114 (147) 125 (162) 156 (202
9400, 9500 SORGHUM 43 (55) 49 (66) 59 (76) 65 (85) 72 (94) 78 (102) 98 (110)
9600 SORGHUM -- 40 (55) 49 (63) 54 (71) 60 (78) 65 (85) 82 (106)
9400, 9500 SOYBEAN 8 (10) 9 (12) 10 (14) 12 (16) 13 (17) 14 (19) 17 (20)
9600 SOYBEAN -- 7 (10) 9 (12) 10 (13) 11 (14) 12 (16) 14 (20)
9400, 9500 WHEAT 40 (55) 45 (65) 55 (76) 60 (84) 84 (92) 73 (101) 91 (111)
9600 WHEAT -- 37 (54) 45 (63) 51 (70) 55 (77) 60 (84) 76 (105)
These figures are approximate and vary with seed size

and variety.
Seeds are gathered directly behind the separator without

a straw spreader or straw chopper.
H01,9000CSL,X -19-13DEC93
45-9 240397
PN=99
SOYBEAN LOSS CHART (ROW-CROP

HEADS)
To determine soybean losses, operate the row-crop head

in from the ends of the field and where the crop is
-UN-14MAR89
typical of the entire field. Stop and back the combine
(4.5 m) 15 ft. away from standing soybeans.
Mark off an area from where drive tire tracks stop (A),
0.6 m (2 ft.) to point (B). Now mark off header width.
H39605
Check this area (C) for losses.
Soybean losses are determined by counting the number

of beans in the plot for any or all of the following types
of gathering losses.
1. Stubble Loss: Pods left attached to stalk stubble.

2. Uncut Stalk: Lodge or down stalks not gathered by
the row-crop head.
3. Cut Stalk Loss: Stalks cut but lost in the gathering
process.
4. Pods: Loose pods detached from stalks.
5. Shatter: Loose soybeans on the ground.
Pre-harvest losses (loose soybeans and pods in the

rows) are generally low and can be included in the total
loss count.
TOTAL NUMBER OF SOYBEANS

COUNTED IN PLOT FOR A ONE BUSHEL PER ACRE LOSS
Row-Crop Head Number of

Model Row Spacing Soybeans
454A 914 mm (36 In.) 86

965 mm (38 In.) 91
1016 mm (40 In.) 96
653A 711 mm (28 In.) 101

762 mm (30 In.) 108
654A 914 mm (36 In.) 129

965 mm (39 In.) 136
853A 711 mm (28 In.) 135

762 mm (30 In.) 144
The above soybean loss figures are based on

approximately 2600 soybeans per lb. (0.45 kg).
H01,9000CSL,Y -19-20MAR90
45-10 240397
PN=100
COMBINE AND CORN HEAD CHECK LIST
NOTE: The following items must be checked and

adjusted properly before attempting to use the
set-up flow chart in this section.
Combine:
• Feeder house front drum in “corn” position.
• Feeder house conveyor drive on “small” sprocket.
• Feeder house conveyor chain tension is properly
adjusted.
• Cylinder has full set of corn filler plates.
• Cylinder rasp bars are free of nicks and abrasions.
New non-chrome bars require at least 50 hours use prior
to harvesting high-moisture corn to smooth rough edges.
NOTE: Chrome rasp bars are not recommended unless

free of sharp or rough edges, nicks and
abrasions.
• Concave is leveled and proportioned to cylinder.

• Full set of “raised” inserts installed in concave.
• Beater grate curtain option is recommended.
• Full set of straw walker risers.
• All elevator chains are properly tensioned.
• All augers are free from nicks, cracks and sharp edges.
Corn Head:
• All points level and adjusted for field condition.
• Stalk rolls in good condition.
• Trash knives adjusted properly.
• All gathering chains set with lugs offset.
• Deck plates in good condition and adjusted properly.
• Cross auger adjusted “up” and “forward”.
• Cross auger has full set of paddles in good condition.
• Row unit drive sprockets set for at least a 1:1 drive
ratio.
• Cross auger drive has a “slow down” sprocket
(standard equipment on 1995 and later 90 series corn
heads).
HX,9000CSL,A -19-24MAR97
45-11 240397
PN=101
45-12 240397
PN=102
-19-17SEP96
H48082
HX,9000CSL,B -19-17SEP96
45-13 240397
PN=103
-19-17SEP96
H48083
HX,9000CSL,C -19-17SEP96
45-14 240397
PN=104
CORN KERNEL LOSS CHART
The following kernel loss chart shows the number of

kernels that must be lost per square foot before a total
of one bushel per acre is lost. It also points out that a
few kernels lost behind the combine does not call for
numerous adjustments on the combine.
Corn Row Number Kernels Per Sq. Ft. for One Bu. Loss Per Acre
Head Spacing of
Number (Inches) Rows 9400 and 9500 9600
443 711 mm (28) 4 4 —

762 mm (30) 4 4 —
493 762 mm (30) 4 4 —
444 914 mm (36) 4 5 —
965 mm (38) 4 5 —
1016 mm (40) 4 5 —
494 914 mm (36) 4 5 —
965 mm (38) 4 5 —
546 914 mm (36) 5 6 5
594 914 mm (36) 5 6 5
965 mm (38) 5 6 5
643 711 mm (28) 6 6 4
762 mm (30) 6 6 5
693 762 mm (30) 6 6 5
644 and 694 914 mm (36) 6 7 7
965 mm (38) 6 8 7
645 1016 mm (40) 6 8 7
843 711 mm (28) 8 8 6
762 mm (30) 8 8 7
892 711 mm (28) 8 8 6
893 762 mm (30) 8 8 7
844 and 894 914 mm (36) 8 — 8
965 mm (38) 8 — 9
1092 711 mm (28) 10 — 8
1243 and 1293 762 mm (30) 12 — 10
1290 508 mm (20) 12 — 7
1291 559 mm (22) 12 — 7
These figures are approximate and vary with seed size

and variety.
Seeds are gathered directly behind the separator without

a straw spreader or straw chopper.
H01,9000CSL,Z -19-24MAR97
45-15 240397
PN=105
POWER SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE
NOTE: This procedure is the correct method for

performing a power shutdown of the separator.
The purpose of a power shutdown is to
determine the machine’s performance in the
threshing and separating areas by taking a
“snap-shot” of the material on the straw walkers.
This is valuable is determining where the losses
behind the machine are generated and what
adjustments can be made to correct the
condition.
1. Operate the machine to fill with crop.
2. Pull the hydrostatic lever to neutral and then quickly

complete step 3.
3. Momentarily shut off the key switch to kill the engine

while reaching over with left hand and disengage the
header and separator engage switches on the armrest
console. Quickly restart the engine to allow for turbo
charger lubrication.
4. After 30-60 seconds shut off the engine.
5. Inspect all five areas outlined in the Adjustment Flow

Chart in this section.
6. Inspect for excessive grain damage, kernels left on

the cobs, and free grain loss before making any
adjustments.
7. Once you have decided what adjustments need to be

made, open the concave clearance and engage the
separator (this will avoid undue stress to the cylinder
drive area during clean out).
8. Adjust the machine to the desired settings and

proceed harvesting.
9. Repeat this procedure and verify grain quality and

losses behind the combine.
10. Once acceptable loss levels are attained, set the

sensitivity on the HarvesTrak Monitor and continue to
harvest.
HX,9000CSL,D -19-17SEP96
45-16 240397
PN=106
Combine Cleanout
CLEANING OUT THE COMBINE
N CAUTION: To prevent injury, never clean the

combine with the engine running and the
separator engaged.
-UN-11OCT88
The following instructions are recommended when
cleaning out the combine for certified seed crops or
when transporting the combine inter-state.
H39281
H01,9000CC,A -19-20MAR90
Drive combine over end rows or bumps to jar and shake

dirt loose. Stop engine and remove key.
Open or remove all doors and drain holes.
-UN-11OCT96
-UN-14FEB90
CAUTION: Sound horn (A) to clear everyone
from area.
Start engine and let separator run until chaff stops

coming out rear. Lower engine rpm to low idle and
H48120
H41574
engage separator several times. The “jogging” of
separator at low idle removes dirt from inside of cylinder.
Move throttle to high rpm and run for a few minutes.
Repeat cycle until chaff no longer comes out of rear.
Stay clear of the combine when chaff discharge. Raise
reel until it stops. Also engage unloading auger to empty
it.
Stop engine and remove key.
H01,9000CC,B -19-17OCT96
N CAUTION: Block header safely so it will not

move. Lower reel safety stops.
Remove header from combine.

-UN-11OCT88
H39606
H01,9000CC,C -19-20MAR90
50-1 240397
PN=107
Combine Cleanout
N CAUTION: Sound horn to clear everyone from

area, then start engine.
Drive combine straight back 3 m (10 ft.) onto blocking so

right-hand side is about 150 mm (6 in.) higher, or park
-UN-11OCT88
on incline so dirt can run out. Set park brake and block
wheels.
Stop engine and remove key.
H39607
CAUTION: When working with compressed air
in dusty conditions, you must wear goggles
and dust mask for personal protection. Air
hose must have a 2 m (6 ft.) wand (end).
Start at top of combine and work down.
H01,9000CC,D -19-20MAR90
Remove cleanout doors (A), (B) and (C).
Clean grain from under grain tank cross augers over to

the sump.
Clean grain from edges of unloading auger sump to the

bottom. Grain must be cleaned out these doors as you
are standing on the ground.
-UN-12SEP90
H42408
H01,9000CC,E -19-05NOV90
Open lower clean grain elevator door.
Remove nuts (A) and take off top cleanout door.
Clean top area and down into clean grain elevator to

-UN-11OCT88
clean elevator chain. Clean all sides.

H39284
H01,9000CC,F -19-20MAR90
50-2 240397
PN=108
Combine Cleanout
Loosen clamps (A) and swing grain tank window (B) up.
Clean out area behind cab, around primary countershaft

and over cylinder.
-UN-11OCT88
H39265
H01,9000CC,G -19-20MAR90
Remove panel in rear of grain tank and clean out this

side of engine area.
-UN-11OCT88
H39299
H01,9000CC,H -19-20MAR90
Open cover (A), shield (B) and swing up ladder (C).
Clean entire engine compartment area, especially under

engine and over condenser.
Wipe up oil and grease.
-UN-07AUG91
H43771
H01,9000CC,I -19-09OCT91
50-3 240397
PN=109
Combine Cleanout
Clean radiator, oil cooler, condenser, and rotary screen

from inside out. Clean off top of fuel tank.
-UN-01JUL92
H44608
H01,9000CC,J -19-11SEP92
Open lower tailings elevator door (A). Remove wing nuts

(B) and remove door (C) at upper end of elevator.
Clean down all sides of elevator and clean out cross

auger trough.
-UN-12SEP90
H42409
-UN-12SEP90
H42410
H01,9000CC,K -19-11SEP92
50-4 240397
PN=110
Combine Cleanout
Clean out chaff between cylinder and side sheets. Clean

remaining chaff and seed from concave and cylinder.
Also clean inside of cylinder. Clean upper tailings auger
housing on the inside and the area around it.
-UN-11OCT88
H39610
H01,9000CC,L -19-20MAR90
N CAUTION: The feed plate seal, through normal

operation, develops a sharp edge. Avoid bodily
injury from contact with sharp edge when
servicing this area.
Clean feeder house through top doors (A) and (B). Lift
conveyor chain and let snap back several times while
cleaning.
-UN-01JUL92
H44609
HX,9000CC,M -19-13DEC93
N CAUTION: Stop engine, remove key and lower

safety stop before working under feeder house.
Lower stone trap and feed plate. Clean areas out. -UN-08DEC93
H46117
HX,9000CC,N -19-13DEC93
50-5 240397
PN=111
Combine Cleanout
Remove conveyor auger door. Use scraper to loosen

material, then clean out through the sides of the
combine. Then clean off top of axle and transmission.
-UN-11OCT88
H39612
-UN-19AUG96
H48064
HX,9000CC,O -19-17OCT96
Loosen bolts (A) and pull out pans. Clean out straw
walker return pans and grain pan.
-UN-12SEP90
H42359
H01,9000CC,P -19-05NOV90
50-6 240397
PN=112
Combine Cleanout
N CAUTION: When cleaning straw walker and

beater area, cardboard, canvas, or carpet must
be placed on top of walkers.
Remove straw walker curtains, then clean walkers
-UN-11OCT88
through inspection door. Clean deflectors at front of
walkers and work your way to the rear. Clean between
walkers and between walkers and sidesheets and around
crank bearings.
H39614
Clean beater and its wings. Also clean between beater
and shield on side sheet and inside of beater and wings.
H01,9000CC,Q -19-20MAR90
Remove sieve, chaffer and precleaner sections. Clean

out chaff from areas where sides meet. Open sieve,
chaffer and precleaner as far as possible and clean. Also
clean out tailings and clean grain auger troughs.
-UN-11OCT88
H39615
H01,9000CC,R -19-20MAR90
Clean rear axle area.
-UN-01JUL92
H44610
H01,9000CC,S -19-11SEP92
50-7 240397
PN=113
Combine Cleanout
Remove shield (A) and clean out cleaning fan area.
Reinstall shield.
-UN-12SEP90
H42361
H01,9000CC,T -19-05NOV90
Pull down and rotate locking pin under stop (A).
-UN-01JUL92
H44611
H01,9000CC,W -19-11SEP92
IMPORTANT: Sensor connector (A) must be

unplugged or it may be pulled apart
and cause damage to the sensor wire.
Unplug sensor connector (A) and connect sensor to
-UN-07AUG91
storage connector (B).
H43772
HX,9000CC,X -19-13DEC93
Move straw chopper to the forward position.
Loosen nuts (A) and adjust straw chopper blades out.

Then clean chopper. Clean around belt drive shields and
rear deck.
-UN-01JUL92
(Not Illustrated) Clean chaff from straw spreader belt

drive shield and from inside of cones.
H44613
H01,9000CC,U -19-24MAR97
50-8 240397
PN=114
Combine Cleanout
Clean out chaff from rear to front from under platform

auger. Clean cutterbar area.
Clean off platform drives and behind drives. Also clean

inside of cutterbar storage area.
-UN-16DEC91
After cleaning, attach header, replace or close all doors.
H42562
H01,9000CC,V -19-11SEP92
50-9 240397
PN=115
Feeder House
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER SAFETY STOP

removed.
Cracking of hydraulic line fittings to lower

feeder house results in an instantaneous
dropping of feeder house and header.
Lower safety stop (A) onto hydraulic cylinder rod.
-UN-22JUL93
H45814
HX,9000FH,A -19-13DEC93
FEEDER HOUSE DOORS

removed.
-UN-27JUN91
Loosen nuts (A) and slide toward combine. Pull door (B)
forward to remove.
Lift doors (C).
H43639
H01,9000FH,B -19-12JUL91
CYLINDER TOP ACCESS DOOR

removed.
-UN-11OCT88
Turn handles (A) to unlock door.
Pull on handles to remove door.

H39103
H01,9000FH,C -19-20MAR90
55-1 240397
PN=116
Feeder House
BOTTOM FEEDER HOUSE DOOR AND

FEEDPLATE SEAL SUPPORT
N CAUTION: Raise feeder house, lower safety

stop, shut off engine and remove key.
-UN-19AUG96
IMPORTANT: Lever will be bent if left open when
feeder house is lowered.
Move lever (A) down and to rear to open door.
H48065
Pull lever forward and up to close.
HX,9000FH,D -19-24MAR97
If feederhouse door is not sealing tight at (A) grain

leakage could occur.
Loosen cap screws (B) on both sides.
-UN-22JAN93
Turn eccentric (C).
Tighten cap screw securing eccentric.
Tighten remaining cap screws.
H44976
HX,9000FH,AM -19-13DEC93
RAISED FEED PLATE ADAPTER KIT (FOR

SMALL GRAIN ONLY)
Raises the angle of the feeder house feed plate that

directs crop material into the cylinder concave area. In
-UN-29NOV93
“hard-to-thresh” small grains, raising the feed plate can

help improve threshing performance without having to
use excessive threshing speeds that can damage the
grain. Raising the feeder house feed plate is
recommended for use in small grain application only.
H46115
HX,9000FH,AN -19-13DEC93
55-2 240397
PN=117
Feeder House
STONE TRAP
A stone trap protects the cylinder and concave from

damage.
-UN-18SEP90
Raise feeder house, lower safety stop, shut off engine
and remove key.
To dump stone trap, move lever (A) up. Close by

pushing lever down.
H42397
H01,9000FH,E -19-09OCT91
LEVELING HEADER
Remove cap screws (A) and move shims (B) from side
to side on top beam of feeder house to level header.
-UN-18SEP90
H42391
H01,9000FH,F -19-05NOV90
FEEDER HOUSE STRIPPERS
Feeder house strippers (A) are now installed on each

side of the feeder house. These strippers will help
reduce the number of ears thrown by the auger on corn
-UN-18OCT96
heads where ear throwing is excessive. It is not
necessary to remove these strippers when operating
other headers.
H48127
HX,9000FH,AO -19-18OCT96
55-3 240397
PN=118
Feeder House
ADJUSTING FEEDER CONVEYOR CHAIN
Set conveyor drum “float” to grain position (see Adjusting

Conveyor Float in this manual).
-UN-18SEP90
Remove left-hand side feeder house shield.
Adjust eyebolt (A) until left- and right-hand side outer

chains just touches wear strip (B). This setting is the
tightest the chain should ever be run.
H42390
Do not over-tighten chain to make center strands as tight
as outer strands. Center strands normally sag more
because of weight of slats and upward force from crop
material.
Bent eyebolts indicate excessive chain tension or slug

feeding.
-UN-01JUL92
Out-of-round sprockets or drum and bent shafts can
cause chain tension to be uneven, too tight, or too loose.
Shaft and bearing failure are often caused by excessive
H44615
chain tension.
When the adjusting eyebolt can go no further and the

chain needs more tensioning, remove a half link (see
Removing Conveyor Chain Links in this manual).
Install shield.
HX,9000FH,G -19-13DEC93
55-4 240397
PN=119
Feeder House
REMOVING CONVEYOR CHAIN LINKS
First Adjustment (Approximately 500 Hrs):
Remove offset links (A) for initial chain adjustment.
Second Adjustment (Approximately 1200 Hrs):
Remove inside link (B) and replace it with an offset link.

Order AH131105 (C) ([3] for 9400 and 9500 Combines)
or ([4] for 9600 Combine). The offset link now becomes
the coupler link. Remove the top shaft end for end at the
same time the half links are installed.
Repeat this procedure on all strands of chain.
When adjustment is all used up from step 2 the chain is

worn out and should be replaced.
-UN-11OCT88
H39621
H01,9000FH,H -19-20MAR90
CHECKING FEEDER CONVEYOR “FLOAT”
Conveyor chain must clear the floor by 3 mm (1/8 in.) for

grain or 25 mm (1 in.) for corn as measured between a
conveyor slat and feeder house bottom, directly under
-UN-11OCT96
feeder drum at (A).
H48122
H01,9000FH,I -19-17OCT96
55-5 240397
PN=120
Feeder House
ADJUSTING CONVEYOR “FLOAT”
Float cams are located on both sides of feeder house.

To set float:
-UN-07OCT96
Loosen nut (A).
For small grain, rotate bolt until hole (B) aligns through
side sheet. A wrench flat is provided on bolt.
H48112
For grain slat clearance, loosen nut (C) and rotate cam
(D) to get 3 mm (1/8 in.) slat clearance between slat and
feeder house bottom on both sides.
To get the 25 mm (1 in.) clearance for corn, loosen nut

(A). Rotate bolt until hole (B) is aligned in upper end of
slot. Torque nut (A) to 115 N·m (85 lb-ft).
Tighten nut (A) and (C).
Cam (D) is not adjusted for corn.
HX,9000FH,AI -19-17OCT96
55-6 240397
PN=121
Feeder House
CHANGING FEEDER CONVEYOR SPEED
The feeder house is shipped from the factory with the

chain on the small sprocket (B) on small grain combines
or on the large sprocket (C) on rice combines. For all
-UN-18SEP90
crops, the chain should be left on the small sprocket for
better feeding and material handling.
If you have material handling problems, move the chain

to the larger sprocket.
H42387
Remove shield.
Loosen nut (A) and push sprocket forward.
Loosen set screws (D) to slide sprocket.
Push sprocket rearward and tighten nut (A).
-UN-26AUG94
It may be necessary to add or remove a link or two to
change sprockets.
The variable speed feeder house changes the speed of
H46217
the corn head or row-crop head. If it is used with a
platform, the drive must be slowed all the way down to
prevent rapid wear to cutterbar parts.
HX,9000FH,K -19-17JAN97
ADJUSTING FEEDER CONVEYOR DRIVE

CHAIN
Remove shield.
-UN-18SEP90
Loosen nut (A) and push sprocket rearward.
Install shield.
H42387
HX,9000FH,AJ -19-13DEC93
55-7 240397
PN=122
Feeder House
SLIP CLUTCH
A non-adjustable slip clutch protects the upper shaft.
If the slip clutch is removed, tighten nut (A) to 200 N·m
-UN-20FEB90
(150 lb-ft). Do not grease slip clutch jaws.
H41637
Shield Removed for Clarity
H01,9000FH,N -19-05NOV90
FEEDER HOUSE TOP SHAFT STRIPPER

ADJUSTMENT
If the top feeder house shaft should wrap, check to see

that the strippers are adjusted as follows:
-UN-01OCT91
Remove top feeder house door.
Loosen bolts (A) and set stripper (B) to 7 mm (1/4 in.)

(C) from top shaft (D).
H43893
Tighten bolts (A) and replace top door.
H01,9000FH,O -19-09OCT91
55-8 240397
PN=123
Feeder House
FEEDER HOUSE TOP SHAFT SPROCKETS
After 1000 hours, depending on the crops being

harvested, check the upper shaft sprockets for wear.
-UN-11OCT88
If these sprockets are worn past 12 mm (1/2 in.) (A), the
shaft with the sprockets can be reversed for additional
wear. To reverse sprockets:
Lower feeder house and remove top door (B).
H39620
Pull lever (C) and lower bottom feeder house door.
-UN-01OCT91
H43898
-UN-08DEC93
H46119
HX,9000FH,P -19-13DEC93
Remove right-hand side drive chain (A).
Remove nuts (B) securing cover and remove clutch (C)

and pipe spacers.
-UN-01OCT91
-UN-01OCT91
Relieve tension on feeder house chain and remove chain

(D).
H43900
H43901
H01,9000FH,AA -19-18OCT91
55-9 240397
PN=124
Feeder House
-UN-01OCT91
H43902
Loosen set screws (A) in sprockets. Pull shaft with bearing housing and sprockets away
from right-hand side bearing.
Move outer sprockets (B) inward away from the
bearing housings about one inch. Reverse or replace sprockets.
Remove bolts (C) from left-hand bearing housing. NOTE: When reversing sprockets worn on one side
only, the right-hand side and left-hand side
Pull left-hand bearing housing away from mount and sprockets change places and the inner
lower left-hand side of hex shaft. sprocket is reversed (9600 has two inner
sprockets).
H01,9000FH,AB -19-09OCT91
To install new sprockets or to reverse sprockets:
Install sprockets on hex shaft. Be certain teeth of all

sprockets are aligned with each other.
-UN-01OCT91
H43903
H01,9000FH,AC -19-09OCT91
55-10 240397
PN=125
Feeder House
-UN-01OCT91
H43904
Install left-hand side bearing housing (A) on hex end Install lock nut against flange nut and tighten to 350
of shaft. N·m (258 lb-ft).
Install round end of shaft into right-hand side bearing Assemble sprocket, jaws, spring and canister. Install
and swing left-hand side up to align bearing housing flat washer on each clutch bolt between sprocket
with bearing mount. Secure bearing housing to mount plate and canister. Tighten bolts to 110 N·m (81 lb-ft).
with cap screws. Torque cap screws to 120 N·m (88
lb-ft).
Assemble pipe spacer, clutch, outer spacer, flat

washer and flange nut to top shaft. Tighten nut to
350 N·m (258 lb-ft).
HX,9000FH,AD -19-13DEC93
55-11 240397
PN=126
Feeder House
-UN-01OCT91
H43905
9400 and 9500 Combines
-UN-10OCT91
H43906
9600 Combines
Position center of sprocket teeth 56 mm (2-1/4 in.) Tighten set screw in sprocket, tap with hammer to
from bearing housing. seat; then tighten to 50 N·m (37 lb-ft). Tighten jam
nut to 50 N·m (37 lb-ft).
(9400 and 9500 Combines) Position remaining
sprockets 603 mm (23-3/4 in.) apart. Install conveyor chain and right-hand side drive chain.
(9600 Combines) Position remaining sprockets 493 Install feeder house top door and close bottom feeder
mm (19-3/8 in.) apart. house door.
HX,9000FH,AE -19-13DEC93
HEADER HARNESS CONNECTOR STORAGE
When header is removed, plug harness connector (A)

into cap (B) to keep it clean and out of the way.
-UN-12JUL89
H40920
H01,9000FH,Q -19-09OCT91
55-12 240397
PN=127
Feeder House
ADJUSTING VARIABLE SPEED FEEDER HOUSE BELT
-UN-20FEB90
H41634
Adjust the feeder house drive belt to get the slow in.) from bottom of slot, loosen bolts (D). Recheck
front shaft speed for the cutting platform. lower sheave gap. If it is not 3 mm (1/8 in.), then:
Start engine, move switch to fast idle and engage Move upper variable sheave assembly back with jam
separator. Slow feeder house all the way down. nuts on rod (F) until 1/8 in.
Turn off separator and stop engine and remove key. (3 mm) gap exists between lower sheave halves, or
Look underneath rubber boot (A) to see if upper until upper sheave assembly reaches end of slots.
sheaves are fully open. At low speed position, outer
sheave half hub will be against bracket (B). Adjust feeder house belt idler (C) up to get a 3 mm
(1/8 in.) gap.
IMPORTANT: A gap between sheave halves is
important so sheave halves can grip NOTE: As belt stretches, use idler to keep platform
belt when in slow speed position. drive shaft speed. When idler reaches top of
Cutting platform driveshaft speed slot, above steps can be repeated until upper
must be at slow speed. sheave assembly reaches end of slots.
Check lower sheave gap for 3 mm (1/8 in.) Install feeder house shields.
clearance. If not correct, move idler (C) to 25 mm (1
HX,9000FH,R -19-13DEC93
55-13 240397
PN=128
Feeder House
REPLACING VARIABLE SPEED FEEDER

HOUSE BELT
Run feeder house to close sheaves (A).
N CAUTION: Lower variable sheave is under

spring tension; if belt is removed, it will snap
back to a closed position.
Shut off engine and remove key.
-UN-18SEP90
Remove both shields.
Loosen idler (B) and remove belt (C).
Install new belt and adjust tension.
H42393
H01,9000FH,AK -19-11SEP92
ADJUSTING FIXED SPEED FEEDER HOUSE BELT
-UN-12JUL89
H40932
Tighten nuts (A) until washer (B) aligns with end of
gauge (C).
H01,9000FH,T -19-20MAR90
55-14 240397
PN=129
Feeder House
REPLACING FIXED SPEED FEEDER HOUSE BELT
-UN-12JUL89
H40933
1. (Not Illustrated) Remove shields. 4. Install new belt.
2. Loosen nuts (A) to release tension on idlers. 5. Tighten nuts until washer (C) aligns with end of
gauge (D).
3. Remove belt (B).
6. Install shields.
H01,9000FH,U -19-20MAR90
LEFT-HAND HOSE STORAGE
-UN-12JUL89
H40934
H01,9000FH,V -19-20MAR90
RIGHT-HAND HOSE STORAGE
IMPORTANT: Reel drive hoses (A) must be

connected together in storage position.
Relief valve will operate and cause
-UN-18SEP90
overheating and damage if hoses are

not connected.
H42379
HX,9000FH,W -19-13DEC93
55-15 240397
PN=130
Feeder House
ADJUSTING REVERSER SHIFTER FORK

AND CONTROL CABLE
Sit in the seat and be sure the reverser pedal is tipped

to the right.
Raise feeder house and lower safety stop. All

adjustments are made under the feeder house.
Remove cotter pin (A), and washer and pin (B) from
cable yoke (C).
Remove link pin (D).
N CAUTION: Bellcrank is spring-loaded and could

pinch fingers if released accidentally.
Pull bellcrank (E) away and hold it firmly.
Using a deep well socket, loosen jam nuts (F) and (G)
-UN-11OCT88
on shifter fork (H).
Relax hold on bellcrank. Push shifter fork (H) in as far

as possible.
H39117
Continue to hold shifter fork in and run jam nut (G) down
until it contacts spacer (I) firmly against washer (J).
Tighten jam nut (G) one additional complete turn. A—Cotter Pin
B—Pin
Pivot bellcrank rearward and hold. C—Yoke
D—Link Pin
With the deep well socket, lock jam nut (F). Be careful E—Bellcrank
F—Jam Nut
not to turn jam nut (G). G—Jam Nut
H—Shifter Fork
Reinstall pin (D) through bellcrank (E) and shifter fork I—Spacer
(H). J—Washer
K—Yoke Jam Nut
L—Cable Jam Nuts
Use nut (K) on yoke or jam nuts (L) to adjust yoke until M—Hole in Arm
end of slot farthest from nut (K) is aligned with hole (M)
in the arm.
Reinstall pin (B), washer and cotter pin (A).
H01,9000FH,X -19-20MAR90
55-16 240397
PN=131
Feeder House
REMOVING FEEDER HOUSE FROM

COMBINE
Leave header attached to the feeder house to act as a

counterbalance.
IMPORTANT: (Combines with Contour Master) Be

certain header is level with feeder
house.
Block tilt frame in area (F) on both
-UN-14DEC94
sides of feeder house.
(Combines with Contour Master Only) Disconnect hoses

(G) from tilt hydraulic cylinder.
H46252
Remove hose clamps on both sides and push hoses (A)
and tilt hoses (if equipped) up through castings (B) on
both sides.
Disconnect wiring harness (C) and push harness up

through casting.
IMPORTANT: Do not disconnect hoses or dirt will get

into the hydraulic system.
Disconnect reverser cable (D) under feeder house.
Loosen header drive belt (E). See HEADER/REEL/BELT

PICKUP PUMP BELT REPLACEMENT. This belt will
-UN-25SEP90
come off with the feeder house.
H42371
-UN-25SEP90
H42614
OM,CTSFH,Y -19-24MAR97
55-17 240397
PN=132
Feeder House
Pull out front cylinder pin (A) on both cylinders.
N CAUTION: To prevent injury, block feeder

house securely in area (B).
-UN-08JUL92
Block feeder house securely (B).
Drop feed plate (C).
Remove bolt (D) on both sides with a 30 mm socket.
H44618
Back combine slowly away. After completing work, attach
feeder house in reverse. Tighten bolt (D) to 325 N·m
(240 lb-ft).
-UN-08JUL92
H44619
H01,9000FH,Z -19-25OCT95
55-18 240397
PN=133
Feeder House
CONTOUR MASTER (OPTIONAL)
Allows the operator to hydraulically tilt the header to +/-

4 degrees manually or automatically.
-UN-10DEC94
The contour master and the automatic header height
control on flex headers, work together to maintain the
closets position of the cutter bar to the ground. If the
automatic contour master function is shutoff, the
automatic header height control on flex headers will still
H46238
operate.
If the automatic header height control is shut off, the

contour master function will still operate on automatic.
NOTE: On flex headers, tilt will be inactive if the head

is off the ground or locked out.
HX,9000FH,AK -19-30JAN95
CONTOUR MASTER (LEVELING)
To account for initial differences in readings between the

left and right tilt sensor, it is necessary to level the
system. Do this each time a different header is installed
on the feeder house.
-UN-10DEC94
1. Turn off automatic tilt by pressing bottom half of
switch (A).
2. Engage header. H46239
3. (Rigid Platforms and Corn Heads) Raise header until

it clears the ground and manually level the header by
pressing the right or left side of switch (B) on the hydro
handle to match the ground contour, both ends of the
header should be equal distance off the ground.
4. (Flex Platforms) Raise header completely off the

ground. It is not necessary for the platform to be level,
only that both skid shoes are hanging completely down.
5. While pushing the header raise button (C) turn on the

automatic tilt switch by pressing top of switch (D).
-UN-10DEC94
6. This offset is stored in memory until the procedure is

repeated and a new value is stored.
H46240
HX,CTSFH,B -19-21DEC94
55-19 240397
PN=134
Feeder House
CONTOUR MASTER (AUTOMATIC

OPERATION)
To start operation, it is necessary to have the header

engaged, the header harness connected, the tilt switch
turned on and touch the header lower switch.
-UN-10DEC94
Push top of switch (A) to turn on the automatic leveling
function. The header will automatically follow ground
conditions using non-contacting sensors on rigid
platforms and corn heads and contacting sensors on flex
H46241
platforms.
NOTE: The automatic tilt function will not operate without

the header engaged and the operator on the
seat. It is not necessary to engage the separator
for the system to operate.
The automatic function will be deactivated if any of the

following happens:
1. Header disengages.
2. Operator is off of the seat for more than five seconds.
3. Tilt switch is turned off.
4. The header harness is disconnected.
5. The header is raised for more than 1-1/2 seconds.
HX,CTSFH,C -19-21DEC94
55-20 240397
PN=135
Feeder House
CONTOUR MASTER (MANUAL OPERATION)
To manually tilt the header on the go, turn off the

automatic leveling function by pressing the lower half of
switch (A).
-UN-10DEC94
Press right half of switch (B) to tilt header to the right.
Press left half of switch to tilt header to the left.
NOTE: The manual switch may still be used in automatic

mode but as soon as the manual switch is
H46242
released, the auto mode may re-adjust.
-UN-10DEC94
H46243
HX,CTSFH,D -19-21DEC94
CONTOUR MASTER (MANUAL TILT

INDICATOR)
For a quick visual indication of whether the header is

level with the combine chassis, the Contour Master is
equipped with a manual tilt indicator. When the notch (A)
is in the center of the rubber seal, the header is
approximately level with the combine body. The indicator
may also be useful as a reference during operation.
-UN-10DEC94
H46244
HX,CTSFH,E -19-21DEC94
55-21 240397
PN=136
Feeder House
CONTOUR MASTER SWITCH SETTINGS
-19-06JAN95
H46257
The tilt “responsiveness” of the Contour Master setting. An “active” system tends to overshoot when
automatic control system can be adjusted by tilting to one side and then corrects itself by a tilt in
changing the switch positions on the control card in the opposite direction. If the header does not react
the central electronics box to one of five different fast enough, you can try a more responsive switch
settings. The factory setting for North American setting.
combines is all switches “off” except No.3.
NOTE: Switch No.1 is always in the off position.
If the header seems to be too “active” in side-to-side Switch No.5 is off for North America.
motion you can choose a less responsive switch
HX,9000ESS,A -19-30JAN95
55-22 240397
PN=137
Feeder House
TILT LOCKOUT (OPTIONAL)
You can operate some smaller headers on the Contour

Master feeder house, but not in a tilt mode. The 4-row
corn heads and 12 and 14-ft. belt pick-up platforms are
-UN-19OCT95
quite narrow and do not have sufficient space to
incorporate telescoping drive shafts. However, drive
couplers are available from your John Deere dealer to
operate these headers in a level-land mode. These
couplers are provided with a tilt lockout device to prevent
H47129
driveline damage in case the manual tilt button is
accidentally pressed.
The lockout device consists of a bracket (A) which is

bolted to the top of the feeder house and a new,
double-ended tilt cylinder attachment pin (B). The bracket
is designed to engage the pin and prevent the tilt
cylinder from extending or retracting. When a tilting
header is used, the lockout bracket can be loosened and
slid rearward to disengage the tilt cylinder pin.
HX,CTSFH,F -19-08JAN96
55-23 240397
PN=138
Feeder House
REMOVING HEADER FROM CONTOUR

MASTER FEEDER HOUSE
N CAUTION: Do not leave drive shafts on

combine. Machine damage and possible
-UN-14DEC94
personal injury may occur if header is
accidentally engaged.
IMPORTANT: Header and drive shafts must be

correctly matched.
H46253
Drive shafts with U-joints are used on
the left- and right-hand sides of all
approved headers except the 443, 444,
912 and 914 BPU.
The adapter sprocket bundle with

lockout is used on the right-hand side
of the 443, 444, 912 and 914 BPU.
Disconnect telescoping drive shafts from feeder house at

the quick disconnect coupler (A) on left- and right sides
and retain with cable on back of header.
IMPORTANT: When running with the adapter

sprocket bundle, you must use the
lockout device to prevent damage to
driveline if header is accidentally tilted.
HX,CTSFH,G -19-21DEC94
55-24 240397
PN=139
Feeder House
FEEDER HOUSE REVERSER GEARCASE

OIL COOLER (OPTIONAL) (9500 AND 9600
COMBINES)
The reverser gearcase oil cooler is installed beneath the
-UN-19AUG96
feeder house and is equipped with its own oil pump. The
pump is located on the right-hand side of the feeder
house and is driven by the feeder house drive chain.
The cooler is recommended for use in the following
conditions:
H48056
• Harvesting with 12-row corn heads.
• Harvesting (with a 9600 or a high horsepower (235hp)
9500 with an 8-row corn head in high yielding or high
moisture corn at fast ground speeds.
• When harvesting in crop conditions where feeder house
front shaft loads can be high enough to cause excessive
heat buildup in the gearcase oil.
HX,9000FH,C -19-24MAR97
55-25 240397
PN=140
Shields
LEFT- AND RIGHT-HAND ACCESS SHIELDS
N CAUTION: Turn off engine and remove key.
Pull down on latch, then pull out on shield to raise it.
-UN-06NOV90
IMPORTANT: Do not use the cylinder as a hand hold
or hang anything on these cylinders.
This could cause the cylinder rod to
deflect and cause damage to the
H42619
cylinder.
In cold weather or in high winds, these shields may

“creep” down. Position stop (A) on rod to hold shield up.
HX,9000SEP,A -19-13DEC93
65-1 240397
PN=141
Shields
RIGHT-HAND REAR SHIELD
Pull up on latch (A). Shield (B) swings out.
-UN-18SEP90
H42381
-UN-18SEP90
H42389
HX,9000SEP,B -19-13DEC93
65-2 240397
PN=142
Shields
SEPARATOR DRIVE MUD SHIELDS

(OPTIONAL)
These shields protect the separator drives from mud

from the drive tires.
They are standard on rice combines but are optional for

other combines.
-UN-15APR94
Remove spring pins (A) to remove shields.
H46196
HX,9000SLDS,A -19-31JAN95
LEFT-HAND SIDE CLEANING FAN SCREEN

(STANDARD EQUIPMENT ON CORN
COMBINES)
Remove quick-lock pins (A) to remove screen.
-UN-07OCT96
H48113
HX,9000SEP,DJ -19-17OCT96
65-3 240397
PN=143
Shields
RIGHT-HAND SIDE CLEANING FAN SCREEN

(STANDARD EQUIPMENT ON CORN
COMBINES)
Remove quick-lock pins (A) to remove screen.
-UN-07OCT96
H48114
HX,9000SEP,DK -19-17OCT96
RIGHT-HAND CLEANING SHOE AND

CONVEYOR AUGER DRIVE SHIELD
Remove bolts (A) to remove shield.
-UN-18SEP90
H42395
HX,9000SEP,C -19-13DEC93
65-4 240397
PN=144
Separator
LEFT-HAND DRIVES AND PART NUMBERS
-UN-08JUL92
H44620
A—Header and Reel Pump, D—Cleaning Fan Regular, F—Variable Speed Feeder
H140160 H140404 Slow Speed, House, H125711
B—Unloading Augers H137264 G—Straw Spreader, Z33774
C—Straw Chopper Front, E—Fixed Speed Feeder (9400) H128234 (9500,
H125380 House with Reverser, 9600)
Long Rear, H101436 H126345
(9400)
Long Rear, H125381
(9500, 9600)
Short Rear, H27433 (9400)
Short Rear, H23950 (9500,
9600)
H01,9000SEP,E -19-11SEP92
70-1 240397
PN=145
Separator
-UN-11OCT88
H39435
A—Upper Tailings Auger B—Lower Tailings Auger C—Beater; Regular (100%), D—Unloading System,
AH139436, Optional AH127866
(75%), AH131960
H01,9000SEP,F -19-09OCT91
70-2 240397
PN=146
Separator
RIGHT-HAND DRIVES AND PART NUMBERS
-UN-11OCT88
H39436
A—Alternator H145026 (9400) B—Secondary Countershaft, C—Feeder Conveyor (Chain) D—Shoe, Walker and
H85382 (9500, 9600) H128010 Conveyor Augers,
H131169
H01,9000SEP,G -19-09OCT91
70-3 240397
PN=147
Separator
-UN-11OCT88
H39437
A—Cooling Fan H132808 D—Air Conditioning G—Cylinder Drive, 240-980 H—Lower Tailings Auger and
(9400, 9500 and 9600 Compressor H101813 rpm and 470-960 rpm Elevator, N110085
Grain Combines) (9400) H181742 (9500, (H115881),
AH14623 (9600 Corn 9600) 150-250 rpm and 300-500
Combines) E—Clean Grain Elevator rpm (H118618)
B—Rotary Screen, H145158 H141166 (9400, 9500) 150-1000 rpm and
C—Rotary Screen Drive H141167 (9600) 300-980 rpm (H137671)
H146636 F—Cylinder Intermediate
Drive, 240-980 rpm,
470-960 rpm and
150-250 rpm, 300-500 rpm,
(H115759), 150-1000 rpm
and
300-980 rpm (H137670)
H01,9000SEP,H -19-09OCT91
SINGLE-RANGE POSI-TORQ CYLINDER

DRIVE (9400 CORN COMBINE ONLY)
A single range drive of about 300-980 is furnished on

9400 corn combines.
-UN-11OCT88
H39132
H01,9000SEP,DA -19-09OCT91
70-4 240397
PN=148
Separator
DUAL-RANGE POSI-TORQ CYLINDER DRIVE

(9400 CORN COMBINE)
A Dual-Range Posi-Torq cylinder drive is available on

9400 Corn Combines equipped with a single range
-UN-23AUG91
cylinder drive (300-980 rpm) only.
This drive provides a slow speed range suitable for

edible beans or peas. The high range (direct drive) is
approximately 300-980 rpm and the low range (reduction
H43810
drive) is approximately 150-480 rpm.
H01,9000SEP,DB -19-09OCT91
DUAL-RANGE POSI-TORQ CYLINDER

DRIVES (9500 AND 9600 CORN COMBINES)
The standard Dual-Range Cylinder Drive has a high

range (direct drive) of 480-980 rpm and a low range
(reduction drive) of 240-480 rpm.
A slow speed drive is available for edible beans or peas

that operates at approximately 150-250 rpm in low range
-UN-21AUG91
(reduction drive) and approximately 300-500 rpm in high
range (direct drive).
IMPORTANT: Use slowest possible speed with large

seed crops to reduce seed damage.
H43806
A—High Range (Standard Drive)
B—Low Range (Standard Drive)
C—Slow Speed Drive (Dealer Installed)
HX,9000SEP,I -19-13DEC93
SINGLE-RANGE CYLINDER DRIVE (9400,

9500 AND 9600 GRAIN COMBINES ONLY)
A single range drive of 470-960 rpm is furnished on

grain combines.
-UN-25SEP90
H42621
HX,9000SEP,J -19-13DEC93
70-5 240397
PN=149
Separator
SLOW-SPEED DRIVE (DUAL-RANGE ONLY)

(ATTACHMENT)
A special slow-speed drive is available for a cylinder

speed of 150-250 rpm in low range (reduction drive) and
-UN-11OCT88
approximately 300-500 rpm in high range (direct drive).
IMPORTANT: Operate drive only in the low range of

the dual-range cylinder drive, or
damage to the cylinder shaft could
H39673
occur.
Use only a H120490 1/4 x 3 in. hollow shear bolt.
HX,9000SEP,K -19-17OCT96
70-6 240397
PN=150
Separator
DUAL RANGE CYLINDER DRIVE SHEAR

BOLTS
Shear bolt (A) is located in the cylinder drive sheave.

Extra bolts are located at (B) for storage.
IMPORTANT: Use only 1/4 x 3 in. Grade (D) bolts

(John Deere part number 19H2151).
-UN-25SEP90
H42622
-UN-25SEP90
H42623
H01,9000SEP,L -19-05NOV90
70-7 240397
PN=151
Separator
HIGH-RANGE DIRECT DRIVE (480-980 RPM)
N CAUTION: Shut off engine and remove key.
Align notched area of wheel (A) to one of three holes in

gear case sheave (B). Notch area may have to be
rotated 360˚ up to three times to align holes in cylinder
drive sheave and speed pickup casting (C).
Insert pin (D) in hole and into speed pickup casting.
-UN-23AUG91
Insert safety pin (E) through pin and on both sides of lip
surrounding hole. Lock safety pin.
H43812
H01,9000SEP,M -19-09OCT91
LOW RANGE (REDUCED-DRIVE) (240-480

RPM)
Pull down on arm (A) and align lug (B) on torque wheel
with arm (A).
Insert pin (C) through hole in arm and lug as far as it

will go.
-UN-25SEP90
Insert safety pin (D) through pin (C) and on both sides of
tabs on arm. Lock safety pin.
Cylinder will now operate in reduced drive at 240-480

rpm (or about 150-250 rpm with a low speed cylinder
H42644
drive conversion).
H01,9000SEP,N -19-05NOV90
70-8 240397
PN=152
Separator
UNPLUGGING CYLINDER WITH BREAKER

BAR
N CAUTION: Before applying breaker bar,

disengage separator, shut off engine and
remove key. After clearing cylinder, remove
breaker bar before restarting engine and
engaging separator.
If cylinder becomes choked, open concave and run

separator to clean cylinder.
-UN-01NOV90
N CAUTION: Raise feeder house, lower safety
stop, shut off engine and remove key.
If cylinder remains choked, shut off engine. Leave
H42645
concave fully opened to remove all straw and other
material from front of concave through cylinder (top) front
door or bottom cleanout door.
Remove cap screw (A) and slide shield out.
Insert breaker bar and rock the cylinder back and forth
until it is clear.
-UN-03AUG92
Slide shield back into position and secure with cap
screw.
Adjust concave to original position after cylinder has
H44940
been cleared.
NOTE: The breaker bar (B) is for a dual range cylinder; Dual Range Cylinder Breaker Bar
it is not provided with the combine. The breaker
bar can be made by the operator out of steel.
Dimensions for making the bar are provided. If
combine is equipped with single range cylinder
drive, use a crowbar or breaker bar to unplug the
cylinder.
H01,9000SEP,O -19-11SEP92
70-9 240397
PN=153
Separator
POWER UNPLUGGING OF CYLINDER

Shut off separator and header. Sound horn, start engine and set engine speed at low
idle.
Note original setting, then set concave indicator at
“10”. When cylinder is unplugged, set concave and cylinder
speed back to original setting.
Turn off engine and remove key.
IMPORTANT: To prevent damage to engine PTO
Remove safety pin, then remove pin from cylinder
gearcase and wet clutch, do not
drive.
engage separator clutch with
Open stone trap and clean. plugged cylinder more than three
times in a period of three minutes
Sound horn, start engine and set engine speed at low
with engine at high idle.
idle.
Turn off engine and remove key.
Engage separator to clean out material.
(If originally operating in high-range) Remove safety
Set cylinder speed to mid range.
pin and pin from cylinder drive and shift back to
Shut off separator. high-range (direct drive). Replace pin and safety pin.
Turn off engine and remove key. Resume operation.
Using cylinder drive locking pin already removed,
place cylinder drive in low range and lock with pin
and safety pin.
H01,9000SEP,P -19-08JAN96
SETTING CYLINDER ACCESS DOOR TO

CYLINDER
If the front door is not correctly adjusted, crop can feed

back down on the top of the feeder house.
Loosen bolts (A) holding seal (B) to cylinder front door.
Position seal to 12 mm (1/2 in.) (C) between seal and

rasp bar (D).
Tighten bolts.
A—Bolts
B—Seal
C—12 mm (1/2 in.)
D—Tip of Rasp Bar
-UN-11OCT88
H39131
H01,9000SEP,Q -19-20MAR90
70-10 240397
PN=154
Separator
CYLINDER VIBRATION
Should cylinder vibration occur, remove the perforated

filler plates and clean the inside of the cylinder.
H01,9000SEP,R -19-25OCT95
ADJUSTING CYLINDER DRIVE GAP
Run cylinder sheaves to close the intermediate sheaves.
Loosen bolt (A).
Adjust bolt (B) to get a 6 mm (1/4 in.) gap.
IMPORTANT: If sheave gap is more than 8 mm (5/16

in.) it limits sheave travel. Any of these
failures can occur when drive is
operated at the high end of either low
or high range:
•Belt failure
•Belt stretch
•Bearing failure
•Shaft failure
-UN-21AUG91
If sheave gap is less than 4 mm (3/16
in.), it limits torque sensing. Any of
these failures can occur when drive is
operated at the low end of either low or
high range:
•Belt failure H43807
•Belt slipping (burning)
Retighten bolt (A).
H01,9000SEP,S -19-09OCT91
70-11 240397
PN=155
Separator
ALIGNING CYLINDER DRIVE
Loosen nuts (A) to remove tension from drive belt (B).
Loosen countershaft assembly with nuts (C).
Loosen cap screw (D).
Loosen cap screws (E) and (F).
Loosen nuts (G).
-UN-01OCT91
H43909
H01,9000SEP,T -19-09OCT91
Using a straight edge (A), check the alignment of the

countershaft sheaves to the sheaves on the primary
countershaft.
The countershaft sheaves should be within +/- 2 mm

(1/16 in.) of the primary countershaft. Make adjustments
with nuts (B). After making adjustments, tighten nuts (B).
-UN-01OCT91
H43910
H01,9000SEP,DC -19-09OCT91
70-12 240397
PN=156
Separator
Using a straight edge (A), check the alignment of the

countershaft sheaves to the sheaves on the cylinder
shaft.
The countershaft sheaves should be within +/- 2 mm

(1/16 in.) of the cylinder shaft. Make adjustments with
nuts (B). After making adjustments, tighten nuts (B).
Tighten cap screws (C), (D) and (E).
Tighten nuts (F).
-UN-01OCT91
Readjust cylinder drive gap. See ADJUSTING
CYLINDER DRIVE GAP.
H43911
H01,9000SEP,DD -19-09OCT91
ADJUSTING CYLINDER BELT IDLER
Loosen lock nut (A).
-UN-25SEP90
Tighten nut (B) until washer (C) aligns with the end of
gauge (D).
Tighten lock nut.
H42648
HX,9000SEP,U -19-13DEC93
70-13 240397
PN=157
Separator
REPLACING CYLINDER INTERMEDIATE

BELT
Run cylinder drive to slowest speed.
Disconnect hose (A) with two wrenches. Loosen belt at

(B).
Remove two bolts (C), swing mounting (D) aside and

remove belt (E).
Install new belt and check alignment.
-UN-25SEP90
H42649
HX,9000SEP,V -19-13DEC93
REPLACING CYLINDER BELT
Run cylinder drive to slowest speed.
Loosen cylinder intermediate belt (A).
Loosen idler (B).
Roll cylinder belt (C) under belt (A).
Remove two bolts (D) and swing mounting (E) aside.

Remove belt.
Install new belt and check alignment.

-UN-25SEP90
H42394
HX,9000SEP,W -19-13DEC93
70-14 240397
PN=158
Separator
WHEN TO USE WHAT RASP BAR
Extensive studies have shown that the type of rasp bar

used can have a significant effect on grain quality.
A variety of rasp bars are available for use on CTS

combines.
HX,S9500,A -19-18NOV96
HARDENED AND NON-CHROMED (BLACK)

RASP BAR
This serrated rasp bar has a gentle contoured surface

design which wears to an even smoother profile after
-UN-14MAR97
only 50 - 100 hours of use. The serrations of this bar
also provide good feeding to the threshing area in most
any crop condition. This rasp bar is recommended for
use in harvesting corn, popcorn, soybeans, malting
barley, edible beans or any seed crop where high quality
H48248
grain is demanded.
Due to the wear characteristics of this rasp bar, best

grain quality results are usually obtained by first “wearing
off” the bars new surface edges in a crop other than the
one that requires the highest quality.
HX,S9500,B -19-24MAR97
HARDENED AND CHROMED RASP BAR
The chrome overlaid skin of this rasp bar enables it to

provide twice the wear life of the non-chromed rasp bar.
While the chromed bar also features a smooth,
-UN-14MAR97
contoured profile design, any new sharp surface edges

won’t “wear off” as rapidly as on the non-chromed rasp
bar.
This rasp bar is not recommended for use in high

H48249
moisture corn or soybeans or any crop where the

highest quality grain is the main consideration. However,
the high-wear resistant surface of the chrome rasp bar
makes it ideally suited for “general use” in all crops
where long lasting, efficient threshing performance is
usually the primary concern.
HX,S9500,C -19-24MAR97
70-15 240397
PN=159
Separator
SMOOTH RASP BAR
The surface of this non-hardened bar has no serrations.

The smooth surface helps to deliver a “softer”, less
aggressive threshing impact than a regular rasp bar. The
-UN-14MAR97
thickness of this rasp bar is equal to a regular serrated
rasp bar. This bar is only recommended for use in food
corn, where the kernel’s epidermal layer is usually very
soft and delicate and therefore, prone to easy scuffing
and/or cracking.
H48250
The smooth rasp bar is not recommended for use in
corn where the stalks are damp or green or in crops that
have green viney stems or are weed-infested. In these
conditions, the flush even surface of the bar, can
contribute to abrupt slug feeding and/or material buildup
on the face of the concave.
HX,S9500,D -19-24MAR97
REPLACING RASP BARS AND FILLER

PLATE
Bent rasp bars must be replaced immediately because

they can cause machine damage or let unthreshed grain
pass.
Replacement rasp bars are sold in left- or right-hand

matched sets of five.
Tighten cap screws (A) and (B) to 75 N·m (55 lb-ft).
-UN-03OCT91
IMPORTANT: If all rasp bars are replaced at one
time, flutes on bars must be pointed in
opposite directions. Dirt buildup will
cause cylinder to be out of balance and
H43929
must be cleaned out.
In corn, install filler plates (C) between rasp bars. These

plates add to efficiency of the cylinder by keeping
unshelled ears from between rasp bars. They also help
deflect stones into the stone trap.
NOTE: Remove filler plates prior to operating in small

grain crops to prevent cylinder imbalance. Clip
nuts should be left on the cylinder heads.
Removal of the clip nuts may damage the clip
nuts.
HX,9000SEP,X -19-17SEP96
70-16 240397
PN=160
Separator
ADJUSTING CONCAVE ACTUATOR STOP

FOR RASP BAR CYLINDER
The concave must be level before adjusting the concave

actuator stop (A) (see Concave Adjustment in this
manual) for adjusting the concave and the concave
-UN-06APR92
actuator stop.
H44215
HX,9000SEP,DE -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING CONCAVE ACTUATOR STOP

FOR SPIKE-TOOTH CYLINDER
NOTE: The concave must be level before adjusting the

concave actuator stop.
-UN-03OCT91
Loosen cap screws (A) securing stop (located on
right-hand side of combine next to stone trap).
Using the concave clearance switch, close the concave
H43931
until the cylinder just touches the concave when the
cylinder is spun by hand.
Hold the stop against the concave and mark the location
of the stop.
Open the concave.
Move the stop 2 mm (1/16 in.) closer to the concave

from the marked position.
Tighten cap screws to 70 N·m (52 lb-ft).
IMPORTANT: After making any adjustment to the

concave/cylinder clearance ratio or
leveling the concave, be sure to check
for interference of cylinder to concave
in the tightest closed position by
rotating the cylinder by hand.
HX,9000SEP,DF -19-13DEC93
70-17 240397
PN=161
Separator
CONCAVE INDICATOR
Indicator is located just outside of right-hand cab window

and is back lit for night use.
-UN-11OCT88
The numbers on the indicator are only relative indicators
of concave clearance.
The indicator is designed to work for both the rasp bar

and spike tooth cylinder. When adjusting the concave
H39623
clearance using a rasp bar cylinder, the complete range
of the indicator may not be used. The spike tooth
cylinder however, will use the full range of the indicator.
When adjusting the concave clearance, move the

concave indicator past, then back to, the desired setting,
this will remove the slack in the cam linkage.
H01,9000SEP,Y -19-05NOV90
ADJUSTING CONCAVE INDICATOR
Leveling the concave and setting the actuator stop must

be done before making the concave indicator adjustment.
-UN-06AUG91
CAUTION: Shut off engine and remove key.
Remove shield.
Close the concave against the actuator stop.
H43773
Loosen bolts (A) and cable (B). Locate indicator arrow at
“O” mark by sliding bracket in slots, then tighten bolts.
If more adjustment is necessary to obtain “O” reading on

indicator, pull ball joint (C) off of ball and adjust as
necessary.
Install shield.
HX,9000SEP,Z -19-13DEC93
70-18 240397
PN=162
Separator
ADJUSTING CONCAVE
Remove the inspection hole covers (A) on both sides of

the combine.
-UN-12SEP91
H43882
HX,9000SEP,CL -19-13DEC93
If equipped with dual range cylinder drive, remove

locking pin (A) to allow you to turn the cylinder easily.
Open the concave fully until the clutch on the actuator

motor makes a ratcheting sound.
-UN-12SEP91
H43883
H01,9000SEP,CM -19-09OCT91
Loosen cap screws (A) securing concave stop. -UN-03OCT91

H43931
H01,9000SEP,CN -19-09OCT91
Rotate cylinder until rasp bar with washer appears in the

front inspection hole (A).
Close the concave until the concave crossbar appears in

the inspection hole.
-UN-12SEP91
H43885
H01,9000SEP,CO -19-11SEP92
70-19 240397
PN=163
Separator
Insert gauge (3/16 in. key stock or drill bit) into front
inspection hole.
Slowly close the concave until the rasp bar touches the
gauge and a ratcheting sound is heard.
-UN-12SEP91
H43886
H01,9000SEP,CP -19-09OCT91
Go to the left-hand side of the combine and insert gauge

into the front inspection hole between the rasp bar and
the concave; it should fit firmly. If adjustment is
necessary, loosen bolt (A) on eyebolt and adjust nuts (B)
to obtain correct clearance. Tighten bolt (A) to 285 N·m
-UN-12SEP91
(200 ft-lb). Remove gauge from the left-hand side of the
concave.
H43887
-UN-12SEP91
H43888
H01,9000SEP,CQ -19-09OCT91
Open concave slightly to remove gauge from right-hand

side of the concave.
With the gauges removed, open the concave completely.

-UN-12SEP91
H43886
H01,9000SEP,CR -19-09OCT91
70-20 240397
PN=164
Separator
Rotate cylinder clockwise until rasp bar with washer is

visible in the rear inspection hole.
Insert gauge into the rear right-hand inspection hole.
-UN-11OCT93
Slowly close concave until the rasp bar is resting against
the gauge and a ratcheting sound is heard. If a
ratcheting sound is heard before the concave touches
the cylinder, adjustment is necessary.
H46107
Loosen bolt (A) on eyebolt and adjust nuts (B). Tighten
bolt (A) to 285 N·m (200 lb-ft).
HX,9000SEP,CS -19-13DEC93
Go to the left-hand side of the combine and insert gauge

into left-hand side rear inspection hole between the rasp
bar and the concave; it should fit firmly. If adjustment is
needed, loosen retaining bolt (A) and adjust nuts (B) to
obtain correct clearance. Tighten retaining bolt to 285
-UN-12SEP91
N·m (200 ft-lb).
H43890
-UN-17SEP91
H43891
H01,9000SEP,CT -19-09OCT91
70-21 240397
PN=165
Separator
Go to right-hand side and open the concave slightly to

remove gauge.
Open the concave completely.
-UN-12SEP91
H43889
H01,9000SEP,CU -19-09OCT91
Rotate the cylinder counterclockwise until the rasp bar

with the washer is visible in the front inspection hole (A).
Slowly close the concave until the concave crossbar

appears in the inspection hole.
-UN-12SEP91
Insert the gauge between the rasp bar and the concave.
Close the concave until the rasp bar is against the

gauge and a ratcheting sound is heard.
H43885
H01,9000SEP,CV -19-10OCT91
Position concave stop and tighten cap screws (A).
-UN-03OCT91
H43931
HX,9000SEP,CW -19-13DEC93
Be certain concave indicator shows “0” with the concave

fully retracted.
If concave indicator does not show “0” (see Concave

Indicator Adjustment in this manual).
-UN-11OCT88
The concave is now adjusted side-to-side and

front-to-back.
H39623
HX,9000SEP,CX -19-13DEC93
70-22 240397
PN=166
Separator
REPLACING SPIKE-TEETH AND CHECKING

CLEARANCE
With concave in high position and teeth straightened,

there must be equal clearance (A) on either side as they
-UN-11OCT88
pass through the concave teeth.
Replace worn and broken cylinder and concave teeth

immediately. Carefully drive new teeth in with hammer
and wooden block. Tighten nuts (B) to 61 N·m (45 lb-ft).
H39446
HX,9000SEP,AG -19-13DEC93
70-23 240397
PN=167
Separator
REAR CONCAVE INSERTS (CORN

COMBINES)
Converts a short wire concave for harvesting corn.
The inserts (A) (which can also be used with the spike
tooth concave) prevent corn cobs from passing through
the open area at the rear of the short wire and spike
tooth concave to insure complete threshing.
Guidelines for when and when not to use inserts:
-UN-01JUL91
• Corn - Concave inserts should always be used when
harvesting high moisture corn (above 20%). Because
tighter concave settings are used to help get the kernel
off the cob, the inserts will hold any broken cob pieces
H43648
with unthreshed kernels in the concave area for more
complete threshing. Without the inserts, these cob pieces
with unthreshed kernels can fall through the concave on
to the cleaning area (chaffer) and can be found as
unthreshed field loss. In high moisture corn, the inserts
will also prevent the large open rear area of the concave
from plugging with green, damp husk and cob pieces.
The inserts can be removed in lower moisture (below
20%) where the husks are dryer and corn shells easier
(lower threshing speeds). In dry corn at faster ground
speeds (than typically used in wet corn) removal of the
inserts will allow additional separation needed at the
higher harvesting speeds.
• Soybeans - The use of concave inserts is primarily for

corn. Inserts (in or out) generally do not affect
performance in soybeans. Therefore, if the inserts have
been installed for high moisture corn and there is a need
to harvest soybeans the same day, do not remove the
inserts.
If the inserts have been removed and there is a need to

harvest soybeans the same day, do not install the
inserts.
NOTE: If hard-to-thresh soybeans or high cleaning shoe

load conditions exist, installing the inserts may be
beneficial.
HX,9000SEP,AH -19-23FEB96
70-24 240397
PN=168
Separator
FRONT CONCAVE CLOSURE PLATES

(ATTACHMENT)
The covers (A) are installed on the bottom side of the

concave and covers the front open portion of the corn
and short wire concaves. These covers assists in
threshing hard-to-thresh wheat, barley, clover, flax and
some grass seeds.
The covers are not recommended for the spike tooth

concave.
-UN-12JUL89
H40938
H01,9000SEP,AI -19-09OCT91
REAR CONCAVE CLOSURE PLATES

(ATTACHMENT)
The covers (A) are installed on the bottom side of the

concave and covers the rear open portion of the short
wire and spike tooth concave.
The covers help avoid overloading the cleaning shoe

when harvesting safflower or similar brittle stemmed
crops.
-UN-12JUL89
H40939
H01,9000SEP,AJ -19-09OCT91
70-25 240397
PN=169
Separator
BEATER GRATE CURTAIN (ATTACHMENT)
Helps reduce walker loss. The rubber curtain (A)

attaches to the rear of the concave’s beater grate and in
some conditions can help prevent separated grain from
falling through the rear of the concave or from getting
onto the front section of the straw walkers.
-UN-27AUG94
H46218
HX,9000SEP,DH -19-12SEP94
ADJUSTING BEATER GRATE (RASP BAR

CYLINDER)
The beater grate is assembled in the up position (hole

[A]) for all crops. If backfeeding is a problem, move
beater grate to hole (B).
A—Narrow Clearance Slot

B—Wide Clearance Slot
C—Cylinder
D—Beater
-UN-03OCT91
H43930
HX,9000SEP,AK -19-13DEC93
70-26 240397
PN=170
Separator
ADJUSTING FINGER BAR (SPIKE-TOOTH

CYLINDER)
Adjusting the finger bar is done from on top of the straw

walkers.
N CAUTION: Straw walkers are sharp. Put

plywood, cardboard, etc. on them for
protection especially your wrists and arms if
using a pry bar to move the finger bar.
Under normal conditions the rear of the finger bar is kept

in the bottom hole (A). If backfeeding is a problem, move
rear of finger bar to the top hole (B).
To adjust finger bar, remove bolt and nut holding

bushing in slot; then relocate.
A—Narrow Clearance Slot

B—Wide Clearance Slot
-UN-01OCT90
C—Beater
D—Cylinder
H42651
H01,9000SEP,AL -19-09OCT91
STRAW WALKERS ACCESS DOOR
Lift door (A) and hold it up with hook (B).
-UN-11OCT88
H39445
H01,9000SEP,AM -19-11SEP92
70-27 240397
PN=171
Separator
BEATER WING REPLACEMENT

removed.
NOTE: If beater is removed from combine, or has
loosened clamp cap screws, tighten clamp
cap screws through access hole before
Beater wings can be replaced without removing tightening wing cap screws.
beater from combine. Replace beater wings in a set
of two and opposite of each other on the beater. This Remove hardware holding wing and remove wing.
keeps correct balance.
N
Replace wing and tighten cap screws to 45 N·m (35
CAUTION: When working on beater, place lb-ft).
plywood or cardboard on walkers for
protection. IMPORTANT: Wings must clear seals. Adjust if
needed.
HX,9000SEP,AN -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING BEATER BELT IDLER
The beater belt idler is located on the left-hand side of

the combine behind the tailings elevator.
Tighten nut (A) until washer (B) aligns with the end of
gauge (C). Tighten locking nut (D).
-UN-01OCT90
H42652
HX,9000SEP,AO -19-13DEC93
70-28 240397
PN=172
Separator
REPLACING BEATER BELT
IMPORTANT: Always replace both belts as a matched

set to insure equal wear.
-UN-01OCT90
Loosen idler (A) (located behind the tailings elevator)
and remove belts (B).
Install new belt and adjust idler.
H42653
-UN-01OCT90
H42654
HX,9000SEP,AP -19-13DEC93
75 PER CENT BEATER SPEED (OPTIONAL)
The beater normally runs at 100 per cent of the cylinder

speed, but parts are available from your John Deere
dealer to allow the beater to run slower (75 per cent) in
some crops.
This slower speed beater drive can be used in crops

when kernel damage must be kept to a minimum, such
as food corn and edible beans.
H01,9000SEP,AQ -19-12JUL91
70-29 240397
PN=173
Separator
ADJUSTING SECONDARY COUNTERSHAFT

BELT
Turn nut (A) until block (B) covers hole (C).
-UN-11OCT88
H39138
HX,9000SEP,AR -19-13DEC93
REPLACING SECONDARY COUNTERSHAFT

BELT
Sound horn, start combine engine idle at 1200 rpm,

engage separator and increase cylinder speed to
maximum, disengage separator, shut off engine and
remove key.
N CAUTION: Lower variable sheave is under

spring tension; if belt is removed, it will snap
back to a closed position.
Place a block of wood in sheave (A) opening to hold

sheave apart.
Adjust nut so intermediate sheave goes up as far as

possible. Belt (B) will have slack.
Disconnect hose (C).
-UN-11OCT88
Loosen secondary countershaft belt (D) at (E).
Roll belt under clean grain elevator belt and tailings

elevator belt.
H39448
HX,9000SEP,AS -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING REEL/BELT PICKUP PUMP

BELT
This belt also drives the header.

-UN-01OCT90
gauge (C).
Tighten locking nut (D).

H42398
HX,9000SEP,AT -19-13DEC93
70-30 240397
PN=174
Separator
REPLACING HEADER/REEL/BELT PICKUP

PUMP BELT
IMPORTANT: It is not necessary to disconnect any

hydraulic hoses to replace this belt.
Remove shields.
Loosen idler (A).
Remove bolt (B).
Disconnect electric clutch (C).
Remove belt (D). Install new belt in reverse and check

feeder house sheave gap.
-UN-01JUL91
H43650
HX,9000SEP,AU -19-13DEC93
SEPARATOR CURTAINS
Curtains control the flow of material from the beater over

the straw walkers.
A curtain is removed from inside the combine. To

remove curtain, remove spring locking pins (A). Push
one end of pipe (B) inside of side sheet. Remove curtain
by sliding pipe through curtain.
-UN-03OCT91
H43932
H01,9000SEP,AV -19-11SEP92
70-31 240397
PN=175
Separator
ADJUSTING STRAW WALKER GEARCASE

BELT
gauge (C).
-UN-01OCT90
IMPORTANT: This belt drives the shoe augers, straw

walkers and chaffer/sieve. It is
H42658
designed to slip when the walkers plug.
It must be kept correctly adjusted.
HX,9000SEP,AW -19-13DEC93
STRAW WALKER EXTENSION PANS
These pans, at the rear of straw walkers, can be

extended to increase separation area.
-UN-11OCT88
These pans cannot be used in the extended position
when using the straw chopper corn kit.

removed.
H39762
Remove two bolts and move all pans in or out.
If the combine is equipped with HARVESTRAK, these

pans are not used on the outside straw walkers.
H01,9000SEP,AX -19-20MAR90
STRAW WALKER SUNFLOWER FLAPS
These rubber flaps are attached to the ends of the

walkers to prevent “hair pinning” of sunflower stalks.
-UN-11OCT88
H39763
H01,9000SEP,AY -19-20MAR90
70-32 240397
PN=176
Separator
ADJUSTING STRAW WALKER PLUGGING

SWITCH
N CAUTION: Straw walkers are sharp. Lay a

piece of cardboard or old carpet on walkers
-UN-06AUG91
before beginning work.
If this switch does not turn on light (A) and the buzzer
when plugging occurs, clean off the walkers, check
switch arm (B) for free movement and clean off if
H43774
necessary. If the switch still does not work, adjust as
follows:
Push switch arm (B) up.
Loosen two screws (C), set a 2 mm (5/64 in.) (0.080 in.)

gap (D) and then tighten screws. A nickel could be used
to check this gap.
-UN-15MAY89
If the switch still does not work, see your John Deere
dealer.
H39452
HX,9000SEP,AZ -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING CLEANING SHOE AUGER

GEARS
N CAUTION: Raise feeder house and lower safety

stop.
-UN-11OCT88
Loosen nut (A) on clamp (B).
H39141
Adjust gears (C) until they touch.
Back clamp (B) off 0.8 mm (1/32 in.) and tighten nut. Do
not run gears too tight.
HX,9000SEP,BA -19-13DEC93
70-33 240397
PN=177
Separator
CLEANING SHOE AUGERS SLIP CLUTCH
The slip clutch (A) is correctly set at the factory and

requires no adjustment.
-UN-11OCT88
H39143
Shield Removed for Clarity
H01,9000SEP,BB -19-11SEP92
70-34 240397
PN=178
Separator
REPLACING BUSHINGS FOR THE CHAFFER, SIEVE AND PRECLEANER
-UN-12AUG96
H47199
A—130 N·m (95 lb-ft) B—100 N·m (75 lb-ft) C—320 N·m (235 lb-ft) D—Nodular Iron Swinger Arm
Replace bushings when tar or grease start to work Replace rubber bushings on one swinger arm at a
out of the bushing material. time. This keeps the chaffer or sieve from moving out
of position.
NOTE: Only the bushings in the nodular iron swinger
arm (D) can be replaced. The bushings in the Lightly coat each bushing with a light weight engine
aluminum die cast swinger arms are not oil or mineral oil, before installation.
replaceable. The aluminum swinger arms and
bushings are replaced together when needed. After installing bushings, tighten hardware as
N
specified.
CAUTION: Engine must be off and key
removed.
Find the mid-stroke of hangers by moving the shoe

crank (on left-hand side to its highest or lowest
position).
H01,9000SEP,BC -19-17FEB97
70-35 240397
PN=179
Separator
REPLACING CLEANING SHOE BELT

removed.
This belt drives the conveyor augers, straw walkers and

chaffer/sieve.
Loosen idlers.
Remove all three shields (A). Roll belt (B) under

secondary countershaft belt, tailings belts and clean grain
elevator belt.
Install new belt. See (C).
-UN-11OCT88
H39453
HX,9000SEP,BD -19-13DEC93
REPLACING CLEANING FAN BELT
Start engine, engage separator and operate fan to it’s

fastest speed.
-UN-27AUG94
CAUTION: Engine must be off and key
removed.
Disengage separator and shut off engine.
H46215
Remove quick lock pins (A) and remove shields.
Disengage locking strap (B) and lower shield (C).

-UN-15APR94
H46197
HX,9000SEP,BE -19-12SEP94
70-36 240397
PN=180
Separator
Wedge bottom sheave (A) open.
Disconnect front arms (B) and swing them out of the

way.
-UN-30JAN97
Remove upper sheave and pull belt (C) over lower
sheave.
Install new belt.
H48231
Reinstall shields.
-UN-26AUG91
H43881
H01,9000SEP,DG -19-24MAR97
FAN BOTTOM AND CLEAN GRAIN AUGER

PROTECTION SHIELDS
These shields protect the bottom areas of the combine

from damage. They are standard on rice combines and
-UN-11OCT88
are optional on all other combines.
A—Fan
B—Auger
H39784
H01,9000SEP,BF -19-20MAR90
SLOW SPEED CLEANING FAN DRIVE

(ATTACHMENT)
A slow speed drive is available from your John Deere

dealer.
-UN-03OCT96
This drive has a range of 500 to 1100 rpm and is

recommended for use in light weight crops such as
grass seeds only.
H48095
H01,9000SEP,BG -19-17OCT96
70-37 240397
PN=181
Separator
CLEANING FAN INTAKE SHIELDS

(OPTIONAL)
These shields keep crop trash out of the fan air intakes.
-UN-01OCT90
H42663
H01,9000SEP,BH -19-05NOV90
CHAFFER FINGERS STORAGE
Store chaffer fingers (A) on the tailings elevator.
-UN-01OCT90
H42664
H01,9000SEP,BI -19-05NOV90
USING CHAFFER FINGERS
These fingers are installed during normal conditions, but

are removed when operating on hillsides. When
operating on a slope, this prevents crop that is moved to
-UN-29JAN93
the downhill side, from falling over the end of the shoe.
This crop is then put through tailings return.
IMPORTANT: The extra tailings puts a load on the

tailings auger and, if tailings auger slip
H44985
clutch has been over greased, it will
slip. Remove and clean. Grease must
be only on shaft, not on jaws.
H01,9000SEP,BJ -19-14JAN97
70-38 240397
PN=182
Separator
CHAFFER AND SIEVE TOOL STORAGE
Be certain tool (A) is locked in place.
Studs on elevator must be in slots on tool.
-UN-11OCT93
H46106
HX,9000SEP,BK -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING CHAFFER, SIEVE OR

PRECLEANER
To adjust, use tool provided.
-UN-11OCT88
Adjust the sieve by sliding the tool under the chaffer.
Sometimes the extension louvers must be closed to let
the tool fit the sieve adjusting knobs.
H39150
H01,9000SEP,BL -19-20MAR90
REMOVING CHAFFER, SIEVE OR

PRECLEANER
The sieve frame should be at rear of stroke and

precleaner frame should be at front of stroke.
-UN-11OCT88
Remove three bolts (A) at rear to pull out a chaffer,

sieve, or precleaner.
H39151
HX,9000SEP,BM -19-13DEC93
70-39 240397
PN=183
Separator
GENERAL PURPOSE CHAFFER, 29 MM

(1-1/8 IN.)
This chaffer is suitable for corn, soybeans, sorghum,

small grains, oil seed crops, grass seed and many
-UN-11OCT88
specialty crops. It is recommended for dry conditions and
is resistant to “stabbing” of corn tassels and soybean,
safflower and sorghum stems.
When sappy weeds are a problem, this chaffer will
H39152
require occasional cleaning.
H01,9000SEP,BN -19-20MAR90
NON-ADJUSTABLE CHAFFER
This chaffer has fixed openings and stationary parallel

louvers across the underside. This fixed louver design
helps direct air flow straight up to deliver maximum air
-UN-11OCT88
lift to the chaff load while the fixed openings allow
recovery of grain.
While this chaffer offers good cleaning shoe capacity in

small grain conditions, the following limitations should be
H38921
noted:
1. Due to this chaffer’s high velocity air flow (generated

by the fixed openings and louvers), use is not
recommended in low yielding crop conditions.
2. This chaffer is not recommended for use in sidehill

crops.
3. Due to the size limitation of the fixed openings, this

chaffer is not recommended for use in extremely dry
small grain, corn, soybeans, sunflowers, rice, sorghum or
grass seeds.
4. It usually requires higher fan speeds than other

chaffers.
H01,9000SEP,BO -19-20MAR90
70-40 240397
PN=184
Separator
SEMI-DEEP TOOTH CHAFFER
This chaffer is suitable for high moisture/high yield corn.

It can also be used for sorghum, soybeans and small
grains. It is not recommended for extremely dry/brittle
-UN-11OCT88
conditions.
There are conditions when this chaffer is subject to

“stabbing” and may require daily attention.
H39152
It is less subject to sap and dirt buildup. It is also more
tolerant of snow and rain in corn harvest.
This chaffer is not recommended for use with the grain

or spike-tooth concaves.
H01,9000SEP,BP -19-20MAR90
SIEVE
This sieve is satisfactory for all major crops and many

specialty crops. Fixed 3 mm (1/8 in.) and 10 mm (13/32
in.) diameter hole sieves are available for seed and
-UN-11OCT88
specialty crops that require exact sizing.
H39285
H01,9000SEP,BQ -19-20MAR90
GENERAL PURPOSE PRECLEANER
This precleaner is satisfactory for all major crops and

many specialty crops. A fixed 3 mm (1/8 in.) diameter
hole precleaner is available for seed and specialty crops
-UN-11OCT88
that require exact sizing.
Solid precleaner inserts are available for grass seeds.

These inserts can be left in when harvesting small grain
if combine capacity is not a problem.
H39286
H01,9000SEP,BR -19-20MAR90
70-41 240397
PN=185
Separator
DEEP-TOOTH PRECLEANER
This precleaner is very good when harvesting corn in the

snow or rain. It is somewhat subject to “stabbing”.
-UN-11OCT88
H39152
H01,9000SEP,BS -19-20MAR90
CHAFFER, SIEVE OR PRECLEANER REPAIR
Remove chaffer, sieve or precleaner from combine.
The louvers and adjusting strap can be replaced.
-UN-11OCT88
H39789
H01,9000SEP,BT -19-20MAR90
CHAFFER FINGER BAR COVER

(ATTACHMENT)
A cover (A) over these fingers may be used when

harvesting sorghum. It keeps the sorghum stalks from
-UN-05JUN89
dropping through the finger openings and sticking into
the chaffer.
H41015
H01,9000SEP,BU -19-05NOV90
70-42 240397
PN=186
Separator
CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR TOP ACCESS

DOORS FOR DRIVES
Remove top door first.
Remove nuts (A) for top door and nuts (B) for bottom
door.
Remove a nut and door (C) for additional access.
-UN-11OCT88
H39283
H01,9000SEP,BV -19-20MAR90
70-43 240397
PN=187
Separator
REPLACING CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR

BELT
Remove shield.
Pull down handle (A) by placing a rod through bracket

(B) on end of handle.
Remove pin (C) from handle and insert it in hole closest

to spring.
Install new belt. See (D).
Pull handle (A) down slightly and remove pin (C).
Reinstall shield.
-UN-11OCT88
H39639
HX,9000SEP,BX -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR

CHAIN
Loosen nuts (A).
-UN-11OCT96
Loosen nuts (B) and (C).
Adjust nut (B) to adjust chain.
Elevator chain is adjusted properly when lower end of
H48117
chain can be slid across the sprocket or can be pulled 6
mm (1/4-in.) away from the sprocket.
Tighten nuts (C) and (A).
NOTE: When the clean grain elevator adjustment has

reached the end of the slot, remove one full link
and add one half link. Removing a full link can
result in difficulty in reattaching the chain ends.
HX,9000SEP,BY -19-24MAR97
70-44 240397
PN=188
Separator
PERFORATED SCREENS (ATTACHMENT)
Perforated screens are available for the lower door and

the clean grain auger trough. They help sift out dirt,
weed seed and fines.
-UN-24OCT96
These parts also include screens for the tailings elevator.
H48118
H01,9000SEP,CA -19-14JAN97
TAILINGS SAMPLE
N CAUTION: Do not have a passenger check

tailings.
-UN-11OCT88
With combine full of crop, bring hydro lever to neutral
and stop.
Shut off header but leave separator engaged.
H39282
Turn latch (A) and pull door (B) out to get a tailings
sample.
HX,9000SEP,CB -19-13DEC93
70-45 240397
PN=189
Separator
REPLACING TAILINGS AUGER AND

ELEVATOR BELT
Loosen belt (A).
Loosen idler (B).
Roll belt (C) under elevator belt (A).
Install new belt.
-UN-06AUG91
H43776
HX,9000SEP,CC -19-13DEC93
TAILINGS ELEVATOR PADDLES
Check elevator chain occasionally for worn or missing

paddles. Also check the upper beater paddle.
-UN-11OCT88
In muddy conditions, one steel paddle may be installed
in the elevator chain to act as a wiper. See your John
Deere dealer for parts.
H39155
H01,9000SEP,CD -19-20MAR90
SEPARATOR COUNTERSHAFT STRIPS
These strips (A) move stiff, brittle stalks from the rear of
the precleaner. They are standard equipment on all rice
combines with spike-tooth and rasp bar cylinders.
-UN-05JUN89
They are also helpful when harvesting safflower with the

grain concave.
These strips can be easily removed if long, viney

H41016
material wraps the shaft.
H01,9000SEP,CF -19-20MAR90
70-46 240397
PN=190
Separator
ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR BELT
gauge (C).
-UN-11OCT88
H39157
HX,9000SEP,CG -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR DRIVE

CHAIN
Loosen bolt (A) and lower shield.
-UN-01OCT90
Loosen nut (B) to adjust tightener against chain.
H42403
HX,9000SEP,CH -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR PADDLE

CHAIN
Loosen cap screw (A) and lower shield.
-UN-01OCT90
Adjust bolt (B) (both sides of elevator) to tighten chain.
Elevator chain is adjusted properly when lower end of

chain can be slid across the sprocket or can be pulled 6
mm (1/4 in.) away from the sprocket.
H42667
HX,9000SEP,CI -19-13DEC93
70-47 240397
PN=191
Separator
ADJUSTING UPPER TAILINGS AUGER

DRIVE CHAIN
Loosen bolt (A).
Adjust bolt (B) to tighten chain (C).
-UN-01OCT90
H42404
HX,9000SEP,CJ -19-13DEC93
TAILINGS ELEVATOR SLIP CLUTCH
This slip clutch is correctly set at the factory.
If it is ever repaired, tighten nut (A) against the shoulder
-UN-06AUG91
of the shaft. This will correctly compress spring (B).
H43777
H01,9000SEP,CK -19-09OCT91
70-48 240397
PN=192
Straw Chopper and Spreaders
STRAW CHOPPER (GENERAL
INFORMATION)
N CAUTION: Do not let anyone stand behind the

straw chopper while it is running. Combine
-UN-01OCT90
engine must be off and key removed before
adjusting straw chopper.
Normal use wears the bottom of the straw

chopper fins to a sharp edge.
H42668
Two straw choppers are available:
• One with deflector for use with all crops.
• One without deflector for use with small grain crops

only.
HX,9000SCS,A -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING BAFFLE
Adjust baffle up or down to control distance chopped
-UN-08JUL92
material is spread.
In its highest position, crop is thrown farthest; in its

lowest position, crop is thrown minimum distance.
H44622
To adjust, loosen nuts (A) and (B) on both sides.
Remove bolts (C) from both struts and move baffle up or
down. Replace bolts and tighten nuts.
HX,9000SCS,B -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING STRAW CHOPPER FINS
Adjust fins (A) so material is spread over a wide area

-UN-08JUL92
but does not cover uncut crop.
Loosen bolts (B), adjust fins and tighten bolts.

H44623
HX,9000SCS,C -19-13DEC93
70-1 240397
PN=193
ADJUSTING KNIVES

removed.
-UN-08JUL92
Knives can be adjusted to any position. Position of
knives determines the cut length of straw.
IMPORTANT: Knives must be in the “out” (not

cutting) position for corn.
H44624
For long straw, loosen bolt (A) (both sides) and slide
knives out. Tighten bolt (A).
For short straw, loosen bolt (A) (both sides) and slide
knives in. Tighten bolt (A).
-UN-08JUL92
H44902
HX,9000SCS,D -19-13DEC93
REPLACING KNIFE SECTIONS

removed.
-UN-08JUL92
Remove bolt (A) (both sides).
N CAUTION: These blades are sharp.
Pull pin (B) retaining knives.
H44903
Turn knives over for additional usage.
HX,9000SCS,E -19-13DEC93
70-2 240397
PN=194
LOWERING STRAW CHOPPER
The straw chopper can be lowered to service the knife

assembly.
-UN-08JUL92
IMPORTANT: If combine is equipped with chaff
spreader, remove chaff spreader before
lowering straw chopper.
Remove bolts (A) securing braces to fin assembly.
H44904
Lower fin assembly and reinstall braces on fin assembly
in front holes (B).
-UN-08JUL92
H44905
HX,9000SCS,W -19-13DEC93
Disconnect sensor (A) and install in storage socket (B). -UN-01OCT91
-UN-01OCT91
H43920
H43921
H01,9000SCS,X -19-09OCT91
70-3 240397
PN=195
Loosen idler (A) and disconnect straw chopper drive belt

(B).
-UN-09JUL92
H44906
-UN-09JUL92
H44907
H01,9000SCS,Y -19-11SEP92
70-4 240397
PN=196
N CAUTION: Be certain locking pins (A) are

engaged.
Remove rear cap screws (B) on both sides.
-UN-09JUL92
Remove caps screws securing side panels to side sheet
except for cap screws (C) and front cap screws (D).
N CAUTION: Use a hoist or other safe lifting

device to support straw chopper.
H44908
Remove cap screws (C) on both sides. Lower rear of
straw chopper by pivoting chopper on front cap screws
(D).
-UN-09JUL92
H44909
H01,9000SCS,Z -19-11SEP92
70-5 240397
PN=197
ADJUSTING CHOPPER BLADES

removed.
-UN-01OCT91
The straw chopper blades must be free to rotate by their
own weight.
Maintain equal space between housing and hub at each

end of shaft.
H43925
Loosen locking collars (both ends). Knives on shaft
should be centered between knives in knife section. Regular Chopper Rotor
Tighten locking collars.
-UN-03OCT96
H48096
Fine Cut Chopper Rotor
-UN-03OCT96
H48097
Wide Spread Fine Cut Chopper Rotor
HX,9000SCS,F -19-17OCT96
70-6 240397
PN=198
REPLACING CHOPPER BLADES (REGULAR)

removed.
Replace any broken or damaged chopper blades

immediately. A broken blade will unbalance the chopper
and cause serious damage.
-UN-01OCT91
To install new blade, remove cap screws (A) from rod
retainer and remove retainer.
Rotate chopper until rod lines up with hole (B) in

chopper side sheet.
H43926
Remove rod and replace blade.
IMPORTANT: Chopper balance must be maintained.

Replace blades in three’s (one row
around). Also replace the three blades
at the same point at the other end of
the chopper. Six blades must be
-UN-01OCT91
installed to replace one broken blade,
or all the blades can be replaced at
one time. This must be done to keep
vibration to a minimum.
H43927
For example:
If blade (C) is broken, you must replace blades (C), (D)

and (E) and blades (F), (G) and (H) on the opposite
side.
-UN-01OCT91
H43928
HX,9000SCS,G -19-17OCT96
70-7 240397
PN=199
REPLACING FINE CUT CHOPPER BLADES

(OPTIONAL)
To install new blades remove nut (A), screw (B) and

washer (C).
-UN-03OCT96
IMPORTANT: Chopper balance must be maintained.
Replace both blades on single support
and blades in two rows (opposed
rows). Also replace the four blades at
H48098
the other end of the chopper. Eight
blades must be installed to replace one
broken blade, or all blades can be
replaced at one time. This must be
done to keep vibration to a minimum.
For example: If blade (D) is broken, you must replace

blades (E), (F) and (G) and blades (H), (I), (J) and (K)
-UN-03OCT96
on the opposite side.
H48099
HX,9000SCS,AE -19-17OCT96
MOVING STRAW CHOPPER TO WINDROW

POSITION
IMPORTANT: If you do not want to chop corn stalks

when harvesting corn, move the
-UN-01OCT91
-UN-01OCT91
chopper to the windrow position but do
not power rotor. Clean out the chopper
as required.

H43920
H43921
removed.
NOTE: To change belts (see Changing Straw Chopper

Speed) in this manual.
Disconnect sensor (A) and install in storage socket (B).
HX,9000SCS,AA -19-13DEC93
70-8 240397
PN=200
Remove support bolts (A) and store them in the ends of

the supports.
Loosen pivot bolt (B) (both sides) and swing deflector

down.
-UN-05AUG92
Pull down locking pins (C) (both sides).
IMPORTANT: Check to be sure the belt is not caught

on the end of the straw walker
H44942
countershaft.
Crank straw chopper (D) all the way forward.
Reverse these steps to position the chopper for cutting.
IMPORTANT: Check to be sure the belt is not caught

on the end of the straw walker
countershaft.
The straw chopper will now be turning

in the windrow position to prevent it
from filling up and damaging the straw
walkers, except for operation in corn
where chopper can be stationary to
avoid cob damage.
(9400 Combine Only) If combine is

equipped with a chaff spreader, the
chaff spreader must be removed before
moving the straw chopper to the
windrow position. The chaff spreader
cannot be operated with the straw
chopper in the windrow position.
HX,9000SCS,AB -19-13DEC93
70-9 240397
PN=201
INSTALLING SHORT WINDROW DRIVE BELT

(OPTIONAL)(REGULAR STRAW CHOPPER)
Remove long belt (A).
Take short belt (B) (optional) from storage hook and

install it in place of the long belt.
Coil up long belt into four coils and store it on storage

hook.
-UN-01OCT90
Snap the two lock pins on chopper into place.
NOTE: The straw chopper will now be turning in the

windrow position to prevent it from filling up and
damaging the straw walkers.
H42674
Reverse these steps to position the chopper for cutting.
H01,9000SCS,K -19-17OCT96
INSTALLING SHORT WINDROW DRIVE BELT

(OPTIONAL)(FINE CUT STRAW CHOPPERS)
Loosen idler spring (A).

-UN-03OCT96
-UN-03OCT96
Remove long drive belt (B).
H48100
H48101
HX,9000SCS,AF -19-17OCT96
70-10 240397
PN=202
Tighten nut (A) on idler until washer aligns with the end
of the gauge (B). Tighten locking nut.
Install long drive belt (C) on storage hook.
-UN-03OCT96
H48104
HX,9000SCS,AG -19-17OCT96
ADJUSTING STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE BELT

IDLER
gauge (C).
-UN-01OCT90
H42405
HX,9000SCS,L -19-13DEC93
70-11 240397
PN=203
CHANGING STRAW CHOPPER SPEEDS

(REGULAR STRAW CHOPPER)
Loosen idler spring (A).
Place a bar (B) in drive and pull it back to release

tension. Slip rear belt (C) out of it’s sheave.
Move front belt (D) to outside sheave grooves for 1595

rpm in:
-UN-01OCT90
• Corn
• Grain with dry straw
• Grain with a narrow straw spread
• (smaller platforms)
H42406
Move belt to inside sheave grooves for 2130 rpm:
• Grain with tough or green straw

• Grain with a wide straw spread
• (larger platforms)
Loosen two lock nuts and position belt trap (E).
-UN-11OCT88
Tighten lock nuts with pliers.
Replace rear belt (C).
Tighten nut on idler (A) until washer aligns with the end
H39466
of the gauge (F). Tighten locking nut.
HX,9000SCS,M -19-17OCT96
CHANGING STRAW CHOPPER SPEEDS

(FINE CUT STRAW CHOPPERS)
Loosen idler (A).

-UN-03OCT96
H48100
HX,9000SCS,AI -19-17OCT96
70-12 240397
PN=204
Place a bar (A) in drive and pull back to release tension.

Install drive belt in desired groove in jackshaft sheave
and chopper sheave.
-UN-03OCT96
H48105
HX,9000SCS,AJ -19-17OCT96
For low speed (1600 rpm):
Install drive belt on small diameter groove (A) on

jackshaft sheave and on large diameter groove (B) on
chopper sheave.
-UN-03OCT96
H48102
-UN-03OCT96
H48103
HX,9000SCS,AK -19-17OCT96
70-13 240397
PN=205
For high speed (2500 rpm):
Install drive belt on large diameter groove (A) on

jackshaft sheave and on small diameter groove (B) on
chopper sheave.
-UN-03OCT96
H48106
-UN-03OCT96
H48107
HX,9000SCS,AL -19-17OCT96
Tighten nut (A) until washer aligns with the end of the
gauge. Tighten lock nut.
-UN-03OCT96
H48100
HX,9000SCS,AM -19-17OCT96
70-14 240397
PN=206
ALIGNING STRAW CHOPPER DRIVE
Loosen bolt (A).
Adjust nuts on rods (B), (C), (D) and (E) to align drive to
sidesheet.
Tighten all nuts after aligning.
-UN-01OCT90
H42407
HX,9000SCS,N -19-13DEC93
REPLACING STRAW CHOPPER BELTS
Replace front or rear belt in the same way you would

change straw chopper speeds (see Changing Straw
Chopper Speeds in this manual).
-UN-01OCT90
H42675
HX,9000SCS,O -19-13DEC93
WIDESPREAD STRAW CHOPPER

(OPTIONAL)
Recommended for use on small grain combines

equipped with large cutting platforms 7.6 m - 9.1 m (25
-UN-27AUG94
ft. - 30 ft.) and/or grain combines operating in heavy,

double swathed windrow crops where wider straw
residue distribution is desired.
The widespread chopper deflector vanes are twice as

H46221
large as the standard chopper fins and capable of

distributing straw residue over 9.1 m (30 ft.)
It is not recommended for use in corn or soybeans.
HX,9000SCS,AC -19-12SEP94
70-15 240397
PN=207
FINE CUT STRAW CHOPPERS (OPTIONAL)

(GRAIN AND RICE COMBINES ONLY)
The optional fine cut straw choppers have twice as many

hammers as the standard chopper.
-UN-18SEP96
The fine cut straw chopper has straight hammers (A)
with double edged sharpened blades, good where yields
and tough straw crops are harvested with narrow 3.0 m
(25 ft) or less headers.
H48084
The wide spread, fine cut straw chopper has a
combination of flail type paddles (B) and straight
hammers (A) with double edged sharpened blades. The
wide spread straw chopper provides a spread width of
9.1 m to 9.7 m (30 ft to 32 ft), depending upon
conditions, and is suited for those areas where wider
-UN-18SEP96
header equipment or windrows are utilized.
H48085
Fine Cut Straw Chopper
-UN-18SEP96
H48086
Wide Spread Fine Cut Straw Chopper
HX,9000SCS,AD -19-17OCT96
70-16 240397
PN=208
STRAW SPREADER (GENERAL

INFORMATION)
N CAUTION: Do not let anyone stand behind the

straw spreader while it is running. Combine
engine must be off and key removed before
adjusting straw spreader.
-UN-29JAN93
H44986
HX,9000SCS,P -19-13DEC93
REPLACING AND ADJUSTING STRAW

SPREADER BELT
Route a new belt as shown.
-UN-22FEB90
Tighten belt with nut on eyebolt until belt is tight enough
not to slip down when in operation.
H41647
HX,9000SCS,Q -19-13DEC93
CHAFF SPREADER (ATTACHMENT)
The chaff spreader is recommended for crops that

generate large volumes of residue.
IMPORTANT: If combine is equipped with a straw

chopper, the chaff spreader must be
removed before moving the straw
chopper to the windrow position. The
chaff spreader cannot be operated with
the straw chopper in the windrow
position.
-UN-09JUL92
H44910
HX,9000SCS,R -19-12SEP94
70-17 240397
PN=209
The rubber deflector (A) should be in the “up” position

for small grain or the “down” position for corn. Remove
round head bolts (B) to position deflector.
-UN-11FEB93
H44997
OM,CTSSCS,D -19-12MAR93
OPERATING THE CHAFF SPREADER
To operate the chaff spreader, turn the knob (A) to the

right. Adjust speed to spread chaff to header width.
-UN-01OCT90
Check daily for trash build-up beneath the twin disks and
clean out as required.
H42677
H01,9000SCS,S -19-11SEP92
70-18 240397
PN=210
Should plugging occur between the disks (I) during

operation, the vanes may have to be repositioned.
For corn or soybeans, the vanes should be positioned

with 45 degree angle (J) installed to the outside of the
disks.
For small grain, the vanes should be positioned with the

square end (K) of the vanes installed to the outside.
When repositioning the vanes, the vanes (A), (B), (C),
-UN-15FEB93
and (D) on the left-hand side disk must be reinstalled on
the right-hand side disk.
The vanes (E), (F), (G) and (H) on the right-hand side
disk must be reinstalled on the left-hand side disk.
H44998
Vanes Positioned for Corn or Soybeans
-UN-15FEB93
H44999
Vanes Positioned for Small Grain
OM,CTSSCS,E -19-12MAR93
70-19 240397
PN=211
REMOVING THE CHAFF SPREADER
To remove the chaff spreader, disconnect the hydraulic

hoses (A) from the chaff spreader.
-UN-09JUL92
Remove quick lock pin and drilled pin (B) securing chaff
spreader to support. Use two persons or a safe lifting
device and pull the chaff spreader out of the support.
H44911
-UN-09JUL92
H44912
H01,9000SCS,T -19-11SEP92
Connect hydraulic hoses (A) together. Secure hoses to

support or rear axle where hoses will not get pinched
when operating combine.
-UN-01OCT90
H42679
H01,9000SCS,U -19-05NOV90
70-20 240397
PN=212
Grain Tank and Unloading System
GRAIN TANK/ENGINE LADDER
Use ladder (A) to get into grain tank.
Remove wing nut (B) and clamp (C) to swing ladder up

for engine service.
Always position clamp behind the ladder so the ladder is

tilted.
-UN-11OCT96
IMPORTANT: Do not step on top of fan cover (D)
without wing nuts (E) installed, the fan
cover will bend without the fan cover
door for support.
H48123
H01,9000GTU,A -19-17OCT96
GRAIN TANK DRAIN HOLES
Grain tank drain hole doors (A) are located on the

right-hand end of both cross augers and must be opened
during storage or for cleaning grain tank.
To open, loosen cap screws and slide doors away from

drain holes.
-UN-27AUG94
H46222
HX,9000GTU,B -19-12SEP94
75-1 240397
PN=213
GRAIN TANK SAMPLE TROUGH
A sample trough (A) allows the operator to get a sample

from the loading auger without entering the grain tank.
-UN-11OCT88
To get a sample:
With combine full of crop, bring hydro-lever to neutral

and stop. Apply the parking brake.
H39913
Shut off header but leave separator engaged.
N CAUTION: Do not have a passenger check for

a grain tank sample.
Open door (B). The lower end (C) of the trough will spill
off a sample.
-UN-11OCT96
H48119
H01,9000GTU,C -19-17OCT96
GRAIN TANK FULL INDICATOR
Sensor (A) is located inside front left of grain tank. It

turns on a blue light on warning display panel and a
buzzer until the sensor is de-activated.
-UN-11OCT88
The blue light turns on immediately but there is a two
second delay between the tripping of the sensor (A) and
the buzzer sounding.
H39290
Header drive must be on for the buzzer to sound.
Adjust sensor (A) by moving it up or down in slot (B) on

mounting bracket. This adjusts the switch “trip” point.
The higher the sensor, the fuller the grain tank will be at
the time the buzzer sounds.
If greater grain tank fill is desired, the mounting bracket

can be turned over, however, the bracket will be above
the extension.
H01,9000GTU,D -19-09OCT91
75-2 240397
PN=214
GRAIN TANK FULL INDICATOR (OPTIONAL

FOR HILLY CONDITIONS)
A second sensor is available for installation on right-hand

side of the grain tank for use in hilly conditions. See
-UN-11OCT88
your John Deere dealer for parts.
It operates the same as the one on the left-hand side.
H39744
H01,9000GTU,E -19-20MAR90
GRAIN TANK UNLOADING AUGER COVERS

(OPTIONAL) (STANDARD ON RICE
COMBINES)
-UN-11OCT88
IMPORTANT: If these covers are open too far in rice
or edible beans, the auger drive shear
bolt may break repeatedly, or damage
could occur to the augers or grain
H39291
tank.
Adjust these covers down to slow unloading rate. Also

adjust them down in rice or edible beans.
Loosen bolts (A) to adjust each cover (B).
H01,9000GTU,F -19-09OCT91
75-3 240397
PN=215
CROSS AUGER DRIVE SHEAR BOLT
Use only a M8 x 60 class 8.8 cap screw as a shear bolt

(A) (John Deere part 19M7185).
Three extra bolts (B) are provided to the left of the drive.
Coat machined face and pilot shoulder of hub with

grease whenever shear bolt is replaced.
-UN-03OCT90
IMPORTANT: Do not install a tire inner tube or a
sack to end of unloading auger. Any
restriction at end of auger can cause
damage to the unloading auger system
H42682
and could cause shear bolt failure.
-UN-03OCT90
H42683
HX,9000GTU,G -19-13DEC93
75-4 240397
PN=216
GRAIN TANK LOADING AUGER DEFLECTOR
Position deflector (A) as needed.
-UN-09JUL92
Out or up position:
• Windy conditions when harvesting crops like grass

seed or rape.
H44915
• Corn - The grain tank will fill to the left and to the rear.
In or down position:
• Grain - The grain tank will fill to the right and to the
front.
HX,9000GTU,H -19-13DEC93
REMOVING GRAIN TANK LOADING AUGER

(STANDARD)
-UN-09JUL92
This auger can be removed for additional overhead
clearance. It should be removed for truck transport.
Remove four bolts (A) in housings. Remove grain

sample trough (B).
H44916
Pull out auger with upper housing attached (C).
HX,9000GTU,I -19-12SEP94
75-5 240397
PN=217
FOLDING GRAIN TANK LOADING AUGER

(OPTIONAL)
Allows the operator to reduce the height of the combine

by .5 m (1-1/2 ft.) when grain tank extensions are also
lowered.
To lower the auger, hold the top of the auger and

release clamps (A) securing auger.
-UN-19OCT95
H47130
-UN-15FEB95
H46916
HX,9000GTU,U -19-08JAN96
ADJUSTING GRAIN TANK CROSS AUGER

DRIVE
-UN-03OCT90
H42684
HX,9000GTU,J -19-13DEC93
75-6 240397
PN=218
REDUCED SPEED UNLOADING SYSTEM

(OPTIONAL)
Changes the speed of the unloading system by reducing

the grain tank cross auger base speed from 411 to 300
-UN-30JAN95
rpm.
Recommended for use in high volume crops/high

moisture crops where bridging or compaction can occur.
It is also recommended for use with the double flighted
H47103
vertical unloading auger option.
HX,9000GTU,C -19-31JAN95
75-7 240397
PN=219
REPLACING UNLOADING AUGER DRIVE

BELT
Be certain drive is disengaged.
Remove four bolts (A) and trap (B).
Loosen belt trap (C). Remove both belts (D).
IMPORTANT: Always replace both belts as a matched

set to insure equal wear.
Adjust belt trap (C).
Install belt trap (B).
If the unloading auger drive will not shut off (disengage)

as the new belts stretch (see Unloading Auger Drive
-UN-03OCT90
Cylinder Adjustment in this manual).
H42685
-UN-03OCT90
H42686
HX,9000GTU,K -19-13DEC93
75-8 240397
PN=220
ALIGNING UNLOADING AUGER DRIVE
-UN-11OCT93
H46108
Top View
-UN-11OCT93
H46109
Side View
Loosen nuts (A) shown in top view.

If space is not the same at both (D) and (E), adjust
at (F).
Adjust bolts out (toward sheave) or in (away from

Adjust two bolts (B) until arm is 657 mm (25-7/8 in.) sheave) to move arm to equal spacing; this
from side sheet. Tighten nuts (C). adjustment is a twisting action. Tighten nuts (A).
Check dimension to side at (D) and (E) for the same

657 mm (25-7/8 in.) space shown in bottom view.
HX,9000GTU,L -19-13DEC93
75-9 240397
PN=221
ADJUSTING UNLOADING AUGER DRIVE

CYLINDER
If the unloading auger drive will not shut off (disengage),

or if the belts jump off as they stretch from use, the
-UN-11OCT88
cylinder rod stop may need adjustment. A belt that has
stretched can cause the drive not to shut off. The belt
rotating around the belt trap can fold over and make
contact with the upper sheave.
H39472
To adjust the stop:
Mark present stop position on rod with tape (A).
Loosen nut (B) to relieve spring tension.
Loosen bolts (C) and slide stop (D) toward cylinder 13

mm (1/2 in.).
Tighten bolts (C).
Tighten nut (B) to its original position.
NOTE: When installing new belts, adjust stop to its

original position (stop positioned against barrel of
cylinder with rod fully retracted).
HX,9000GTU,M -19-13DEC93
REPLACING UNLOADING AUGER DRIVE

CYLINDER
This cylinder is not repairable. However a little oil

“weeping” from breather (A) is normal and cylinder
-UN-11OCT88
replacement may not be required. H39473
HX,9000GTU,N -19-13DEC93
75-10 240397
PN=222
REMOVING UNLOADING AUGER
Remove rubber spout (A).
-UN-03OCT90
Remove bolts (B).
Remove access door near elbow. Reach in housing and

push auger out of housing as far as possible.
H42396
IMPORTANT: Save spacer positioned on end of
auger at gearcase.
Replace auger grain saver.
-UN-03OCT90
H42374
HX,9000GTU,O -19-13DEC93
INSTALLING AND TIMING UNLOADING

AUGER (ALL AUGERS)
Follow REMOVAL steps in REVERSE order to install

auger.
Spacer (A) must be on drive shaft at gearcase before

sliding auger on shaft.
-UN-05APR89
Time vertical auger (B) with horizontal auger (C), the
ends of the flights should be approximately 90 degrees
apart. illustrated. Augers will be damaged if not timed
correctly.
H33176
A—Spacer
B—Vertical Auger
C—Horizontal Auger
D—End of Auger Fitting
H01,9000GTU,P -19-09OCT91
75-11 240397
PN=223
ADJUSTING AUGER SWING
NOTE: The retracted swing cylinder is intended to be the

stop for the auger. DO NOT use the pin or
switch as a stop. The pin is intended ONLY to
-UN-22FEB90
aid in absorbing vertical load of the auger in
transport position. The switch is intended ONLY
to shut off electrical power to the hydraulic
solenoids.
H41650
Make the following adjustments ONLY when the
auger does not swing completely back or fails to
shut off the hydraulic system.
Swing auger all of the way in.
Be certain there is a 12 to 16 mm (1/2 to 5/8 in.) gap

between plate (A) and stop (B) when stud (C) is in hole
(D). If there is no gap, the hydraulic system may not
shut off.
H01,9000GTU,Q -19-05NOV90
If the gap is incorrect, loosen nut (A) and remove cotter

pin (B) and pivot pin (C). Screw cylinder rod fitting (D) in
or out to obtain correct gap (cylinder rod must be
completely retracted). Replace pivot pin and cotter pin.
Tighten nut.
-UN-23AUG91
NOTE: Applying grease on pivot pin and swinging auger
in and out may aid in determining gap.
After making the above adjustments if the auger
H43813
still does not shut off the hydraulic system, it may
be necessary to adjust the auger swing limit
switch (see Adjusting Auger Swing Limit Switch).
HX,9000GTU,R -19-17OCT96
75-12 240397
PN=224
ADJUSTING AUGER SWING LIMIT SWITCH
Swing the auger out and back in. If the hydraulics do not
shut off, the switch is out of adjustment and needs to be
reset.
-UN-01NOV90
Loosen cap screws (B). Disconnect the limit switch from
wiring harness at (A).
H42746
H01,9000GTU,S -19-29APR92
Using a continuity tester, connect leads to pin “E” and

“F” of the limit switch connector.
Rotate switch until continuity through the switch is

broken.
Tighten cap screws while watching continuity tester. Be

certain continuity remains broken.
Disconnect tester and reconnect the switch to the wiring

harness.
Swing the auger out and back in to be certain the

hydraulic system shuts OFF.
If the system does NOT shut off, loosen switch cap

screws and rotate switch slightly counterclockwise.
Retighten cap screws and repeat steps 5 and 6.
-UN-29OCT90
H42747
H01,9000GTU,T -19-27MAR92
75-13 240397
PN=225
Fuels and Lubricants
DIESEL FUEL
Use either Grade No. 1-D or Grade No. 2-D fuel as

defined by ASTM Designation D975 for diesel fuels. Find
expected air temperature at time of start on thermometer
scale in chart. Correct diesel fuel grade is shown to the
right of scale.
NOTE: At altitudes above 1500 m (5000 ft.) use Grade

1-D for all temperatures.
To prevent higher wear from corrosive combustion

products, fuel sulphur content of less than 0.5 percent is
preferred.
IMPORTANT: If fuel sulphur content exceeds 0.7

percent, the engine oil drain interval
must be reduced by 50 percent (to 100
-19-14FEB89
hours).
Cetane number should be no less than 40 to assure

satisfactory starting and overall performance. At low
RW2517
temperatures and/or high altitude, a cetane number of
more than 45 is recommended.
NOTE: Excessive white smoke at start-up could be the

result of low cetane fuel.
Cloud point should be at least 6˚C (10˚F) below lowest

expected air temperature at time of starting. Wax can
separate from fuel when temperature decreases to cloud
point and may plug filter.
H01,9000FL,A -19-20MAR90
80-1 240397
PN=226
FUEL STORAGE
IMPORTANT: Buy good quality, clean fuel from a

reputable supplier.
-UN-15DEC88
Proper fuel storage is critically
important. Use clean storage and
transfer tanks. Periodically drain water
and sediment from bottom of tank.
Store fuel in a convenient place away
RG5309
from buildings.
Avoid storing fuel over long periods of time. If there is a

very slow turnover of fuel in the fuel tank or supply tank,
it may be necessary to add John Deere Diesel Fuel
Conditioner (A), or equivalent. This conditioner may be
poured directly into fuel tank or bulk storage tank.
John Deere Diesel Fuel Conditioner:
—Improves engine performance. —Keeps injectors and

nozzles clean. —Reduces maintenance cost. —Gives
better combustion. —Helps eliminate sludge and gum.
—Retards rust and corrosion. —Keeps fuel system clean.
—Provides more power and faster starts. —Prolongs
filter life. —Improves storage stability.
NOTE: To reduce fuel gelling and control wax separation

during cold weather, John Deere Fuel Flow
Improver (B), or equivalent, may be added to fuel
or bulk storage tank.
Consult your John Deere dealer for availability. Follow

directions on label.
H01,9000FL,B -19-10OCT91
80-2 240397
PN=227
FILL FUEL TANK
N CAUTION: Handle fuel with care: It is highly

flammable. Do not refuel the machine while
smoking or when near open flame or sparks.
-UN-23AUG88
Always stop engine before refueling machine.
Fill fuel tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of

accumulated trash, grease, and debris. Always
TS202
clean up spilled fuel.
IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the

filler cap. If a new filler cap is required,
always replace it with vented cap.
H01,9000FL,K -19-10OCT91
ENGINE COOLANT
John Deere Low Silicate Antifreeze is recommended. Check container label or consult with antifreeze
supplier before using.
Also recommended is low silicate antifreeze
formulated to GM6038M or equivalent. Mix 50-67 percent low silicate antifreeze with 33-50
percent distilled or deionized water.
Other antifreezes that may be used:
• Ethylene-glycol type. Low silicate antifreeze provides:
• Those containing not more than 0.1 percent • Adequate heat transfer.
anhydrous metasilicate. • Corrosion-resistant environment within the cooling
• Those meeting General Motors Performance system.
Specification GM1899M • Compatibility with cooling system hose and seal
material.
IMPORTANT: Some types of ethylene-glycol • Protection during cold and hot weather operations.
antifreeze are intended for
automotive use. These products are Certain geographical areas may require special
often labeled for use in aluminum antifreeze or coolant practices. If you have any
engines and usually contain more questions, consult your authorized servicing dealer to
than 0.1 percent of anhydrous obtain the latest information and recommendations.
metasilicate.
DX,COOL -19-04JUN90
80-3 240397
PN=228
LIQUID COOLANT CONDITIONER
John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner is recommended

for wet-sleeve diesel engines not having a coolant filter
option. Other conditioners may be used if it contains
-UN-14DEC88
non-chromate inhibitors.
IMPORTANT: If engine is equipped with a John Deere

Coolant Filter Conditioner, the correct
inhibitors are contained in the filter. If
RG4690
both are used, a gel-type deposit is
created which could inhibit heat
transfer and block coolant flow. John
Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner does
not protect against freezing.
Various sizes of coolant conditioners are available from

DX,COOL1 -19-04JUN90
80-4 240397
PN=229
DIESEL ENGINE OIL
Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature

range during the period between oil changes.
IMPORTANT: JOHN DEERE TORQ-GARD SUPREME

PLUS-50™ engine oil is not
recommended during engine break-in
(first 100 hours on a new or overhauled
engine). The superior lubricating
properties of this oil will not allow the
engine to properly wear during break-in
period.
John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME PLUS-50 engine

oil is recommended at all other times. This oil is
specially formulated to provide superior protection against
high temperature thickening and wear as well as
exceptional cold weather starting performance; these
properties may result in longer engine life.
-19-17MAY91
NOTE: When John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME®
PLUS-50 engine oil and a John Deere oil filter
are used, the change interval may be extended
by 50 hours. Always follow the recommendations
TS238
in the operator’s manual.
John Deere TORQ-GARD SUPREME® engine oil is also

recommended but standard operating manual oil change
intervals must be maintained. Other oils may be used if
they meet one or more of the following specifications:
• API Service Classification CE or CD • Military

Specifications MIL-L-2104E or MIL-L-2104D
In European countries, oils meeting CCMC Specification

D4 or D5 may be used.
SAE 5W20, SAE 5W30, and arctic oil viscosity grades

meeting API Service Classification CC may be used, but
oil and filter must be changed at one-half the normal
interval.
Oils meeting Military Specification MIL-L-46167B may be

used as arctic oils.
NOTE: Some increase in oil consumption may be

expected when low viscosity oils are used. Check
oil levels more frequently.
HX,S9500FL,A -19-18MAR93
80-5 240397
PN=230
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE SYSTEM, MAIN

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND MAIN ENGINE
GEAR CASE OILS
NOTE: The combine comes from the factory with SAE

10W oil. If you change oil, you can use any of
the oils listed below.
1. SAE 10W engine oils, if they meet API Service

Classification CD or CE.
2. John Deere Low Viscosity HY-GARD®

Transmission/Hydraulic Oil J20 B.
H01,9000FL,E -19-24MAR97
80-6 240397
PN=231
TRANSMISSION, FINAL DRIVES, FEEDER

HOUSE REVERSER, DUAL-RANGE
CYLINDER DRIVE, PRIMARY
COUNTERSHAFT, LOADING AUGER
ELEVATOR AND STRAW WALKER DRIVE
GEAR CASES
John Deere API GL-5 80W 90 Gear Lubricant is

recommended. If other oils are used, they must meet
requirements of:
-API Service Classification GL-5

-Military Specification MIL-L-2105B
-Military Specification MIL-L-2105C
Depending on the expected prevailing temperature for

the fill period, use oil of viscosity as shown in the chart.
Product Pkg.
Number Description Size Qty.
-19-28NOV90
TY6252 80W/90 GL5 Gear Lube 16 kg pail 1
(35 lb. pail)
TY6296 80W/90 GL5 Gear Lube 0.9L (1 qt.) can 12
TY6256 85W/140 GL5 Gear Lube 16 kg pail 1
(35 lb. pail)
TS245
TY6345 85W/140 GL5 Gear Lube 0.9L (1 qt.) can 12
In Canada use:
Product Pkg.
Number Description Size Qty.
TY6275 80W/90 GL5 Gear Lube 20L pail 1

TY6276 85W/140 GL5 Gear Lube 20L pail 1
H01,9000FL,F -19-09OCT91
80-7 240397
PN=232
GREASES
The following greases are recommended for John Deere

Combines:
John Deere Moly High Temperature/Extreme Pressure

Grease
SAE Multipurpose High Temperature Grease with

Extreme Pressure (EP) Performance and 3 to 5%
molybdenum disulfide.
IMPORTANT: If grease fitting is missing, replace

immediately. Clean fittings thoroughly
-19-23MAR89
before using grease gun.
Product
Number Description
TY6341 Multi-Purpose, High -Temperature
TS0153
Extreme Pressure Grease, especially
effective in rolling contact applica-
tions. ie. straw walker bearings,
feeder house reverser, electric clutch
etc.
TY6333 Moly High-Temperature/

Extreme Pressure Grease
TY6347 Moly High-Temperature/

Extreme Pressure Grease
(not available in Canada)
900CP,LU,B -19-10OCT95
BRAKES
The reservoir is translucent to allow checking of fluid

level without removing cap. -UN-11OCT88
IMPORTANT: When removing reservoir cap, keep

contaminants from entering the
reservoir.
Fill reservoir (A) with SAE J1703d, DOT-3 or DOT-4

H39414
hydraulic brake fluid.
HX,9000FL,H -19-13DEC93
80-8 240397
PN=233
LUBRICANT STORAGE
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only Make certain that all containers are properly marked
when clean lubricants are used. to identify their contents.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants. Properly dispose of all old containers and any
residual lubricant they may contain.
Whenever possible, store lubricants and containers in
an area protected from dust, moisture, and other
contamination. Store containers on their side to avoid
water and dirt accumulation.
DX,LUBST -19-18MAR96
ALTERNATIVE AND SYNTHETIC

LUBRICANTS
Conditions in certain geographical areas may require

lubricant recommendations different from those printed in
this manual.
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not

be available in your location.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information

and recommendations.
Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the

performance requirements as shown in this manual.
The temperature limits and service intervals shown in

this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic oils.
Re-refined base stock products may be used if the

finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER -19-18MAR96
80-9 240397
PN=234
CAPACITIES
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530L (140 gal.)
Cooling System w/Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5L (37-1/2 qts.)
Engine Crankcase w/Filter:

9500 and 9600 Combines . . . . . . . . . . . . 25L (26-1/2 U.S. qts.)
9400 Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19L (20 U.S. qts.)
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6L (10 U.S. qts.)
Final Drives (Each)

Ring and Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5L (9 U.S. qts.)
Planetary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2L (6-1/2 U.S. qts.)
Feeder House Reverser Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . 0.9L (2 U.S. pts.)
Countershaft Drive Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4L (2-1/2 U.S. pts.)
Straw Walker Drive Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . 0.7L (1-1/2 U.S. pts.)
Loading Auger Gear Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7L (5 U.S. qts.)
Dual-Range Cylinder Drive

Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9L (2 U.S. qts.)
Engine Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16L (17 U.S. qts.)
Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . 34L (36 U.S. qts.)
HX,9000FL,J -19-30JAN95
80-10 240397
PN=235
Lubrication and Maintenance
SERVICE INTERVALS
N CAUTION: To prevent injury, never lubricate or

service combine, header, or engine while it is
running. Engine must be off and key removed.
-UN-06AUG91
Use hour meter as a guide when servicing the combine.
Every 50 hours of engine operation, the characters SEV

1 will appear on the tachometer display indicating service
H43781
is needed. After completing the service, reset the
tachometer by pressing the ENG RPM and CYL RPM
switches simultaneously and turning the key to “ON”
(third position).
The service interval timer can also be reset if service is

performed between 45 and 50 hours but not prior to 45
hours. If service SEV 1 appears, pressing any of the four
-UN-22AUG91
switches will suppress the message until the next time
the ignition switch is turned on.
IMPORTANT: The service times are for average

conditions. Service more often if
H43802
combine is used in extreme conditions.
HX,9000LM,A -19-13DEC93
85-1 240397
PN=236
10 HOURS OR DAILY
-UN-07AUG91
H43782
1. Feeder House Gear Case Sheaves 4. Electromagnetic Clutch-Two shots of grease.
IMPORTANT: Pump two shots of grease into each 5. Rear Wheel Hubs (Both Sides) When working in
fitting. Do not over grease. water and mud, grease at 10 hours. In normal
conditions, grease at 400 hours.
2. Final Drive Outer Bearings (Both Sides)-When
operating in mud and water, grease at 10 hours. In 6. At the end of each day, dump stone trap and run
normal conditions, grease at 400 hours. concave up and down to prevent crop buildup in
concave area.
3. Clean out end of air conditioner drain hose (A). Be
certain valve (B) is installed on end of hose.
H01,9000LM,C -19-09OCT91
85-2 240397
PN=237
10 HOURS OR DAILY
-UN-16SEP94
H46233
1. Engine oil - Check oil level at dipstick (A). Do not Oil level must be above lower sight glass and below
operate engine with oil level below bottom mark. Add top of upper sight glass. Add oil as needed.
oil as needed.
3. Recovery Tank - Check coolant level with engine
2. Hydrostatic/Hydraulic Oil - Check with header on cold, level must be up to the cold mark.
ground.
HX,9000LM,D -19-19SEP94
85-3 240397
PN=238
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY
-UN-19OCT95
H47131
1. Cleaning Fan Variable Sheaves. 3. Rear Axle Spindles - Standard Axle (Both Sides).
2. Feeder House Upper Sheaves. 4. Motor Pivots and Bearing - 4-Wheel Drive (Both
Sides).
H01,9000LM,E -19-25OCT95
85-4 240397
PN=239
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY
-UN-11OCT96
H48116
1. Fuel System Water Separator - Check for water. 4. Cylinder Variable Drive Upper Sheave - Grease
Loosen plug and drain. with sheaves closed. Cycle cylinder speed to
distribute grease if drive is operated at high speed all
2. Check cleaning shoe/straw walker drive belt the time.
tension.
3. (9600 Combines with Planetary Final Drives)

SWECO crawler track pivots.
H01,9000LM,F -19-17OCT96
85-5 240397
PN=240
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY
-UN-11OCT96
H48115
Lubricate Intermediate Drive Remove the vent plug (A) from intermediate cylinder
drive.
IMPORTANT: Do this with the cylinder speed
adjusted to the fastest setting. Pump grease into grease fitting (B) until grease
comes out of the vent plug hole. Install the vent plug.
Start the combine and engage the separator. Increase
threshing cylinder to the highest speed. This will Start the combine and cycle the cylinder from high
compress the spring and reduce the inner cavity to speed to low speed and back to high speed. Shut off
it’s smallest area. combine.
If you have the cylinder spring at the slowest speed, Remove vent plug.
the tension spring is expanded allowing the inner
area to take more grease. If this cavity is completely Pump grease into grease fitting (C), until grease
full, the sheaves cannot come together (creating a comes out of vent plug hole. Install vent plug.
hydraulic lock) and increased cylinder speed cannot
be attained.
HX,9000LM,W -19-17OCT96
85-6 240397
PN=241
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY
-UN-19OCT95
H47133
1. Fresh Air Filter-To remove filter, loosen knob (A), 3. Radiator, Charge Air Cooler, Oil Cooler and
remove door and empty tray. Remove wing nut (B) Condenser Core-Blow compressed air from inside out.
and slide filter out. Clean or replace filter. This filter Check areas for chaff buildup and clean if necessary.
may require cleaning sooner in very dusty conditions.
4. Folding Grain Tank Loading Auger.
Clean filter in the same manner as engine primary
filter (see Engine Service in this manual). 5. Unloading Auger Lubrication Lines.
2. Engine Gear Case-Check with engine off. Oil must

not be below mark on dipstick.
HX,9000LM,G -19-17SEP96
85-7 240397
PN=242
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY (TRACKS) (OPTIONAL)
-UN-25JAN95
H46259
1. Check hydraulic pressure in the accumulator to 3. Check pneumatic pressure in the air bag to
maintain tension on the belt. Use reel lift hydraulics to maintain float on the rear idler arm/wheel. Maintain
pressurize the accumulator. Maintain pressure of 103 air pressure of 6.2 to 6.9 bar (90 to 100 psi). See
bar (1500 psi). See your John Deere dealer. your John Deere dealer.
2. Final Drive Input Shaft and Coupling.

HX,9000LM,B -19-25OCT95
85-8 240397
PN=243
50 HOURS OR WEEKLY
-UN-03OCT96
H48108
1. (Contour Master) Check areas (A) for packed 2. (Contour Master) Header Drive Shaft Fittings (Both
material which could prevent header from tilting Sides).
completely to either side. Clean out if required.
HX,CTSLM,A -19-17OCT96
85-9 240397
PN=244
100 HOURS
-UN-06FEB97
H48238
Drain crankcase oil at (A) and change filter (B).
HX,9000LM,T -19-24MAR97
85-10 240397
PN=245
200 HOURS
-UN-08APR92
H44217
1. Conveyor Auger Drive Slip Clutch-Do not 4. Rear Axle.

overgrease.
5. Recirculating Filter-Remove tray, reach in and lift
2. Reverser Gear Case-Raise feeder house and lower out filter. Clean or replace filter. Check to be certain
safety stop. Oil level must show on knurled part of airflow arrow points toward front of combine. In
dipstick. severe dusty conditions, check daily.
Add oil as needed.
3. Air Conditioning Sight Glass-If there are bubbles in

the sight glass after the compressor has run for 30
seconds or more, see your John Deere dealer. H01,9000LM,H -19-24MAR97
85-11 240397
PN=246
200 HOURS
-UN-12MAR97
H48246
1. Engine Crankcase Filter-Remove old filter and seal. 3. Front and Rear Straw Walker Bearings.
Coat new seal with oil and install new filter.
4. Engine Filler Cap-Pull cap to fill. Check oil at
2. Engine Crankcase-Turn handle (A) to drain into dipstick after filling.
bucket (B).
IMPORTANT: Do not operate engine with oil level
IMPORTANT: Change oil every 100 hours if fuel is below low mark on dipstick.
more than 0.7 per cent sulfur.
5. Engine Fan Hub
Change oil every 250 hours when
using Torque Guard Supreme
Plus-50™. HX,9000LM,I -19-24MAR97
85-12 240397
PN=247
200 HOURS (TRACKS) (OPTIONAL)
-UN-25JAN95
H47101
Pivot Bearings.
HX,9000LM,V -19-31JAN95
85-13 240397
PN=248
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-03OCT91
H43933
1. Dual Range Cylinder Drive Bearing. A-Cylinder shaft bearing.

B-Variable cylinder bearing.
2. Primary Countershaft Bearing.
5. Beater Bearing.
3. Dual Range Cylinder Drive Gear Case-Check oil
level. Arrow (A) must point up to check oil at plug 6. Fan Bearing (Both Sides).
(B). Oil must come to bottom edge of plug hole.
7. Rear Wheel Hubs (Both Sides) (Standard
4. Right-Hand Lube Bank (Two Fittings)-: Axle)-When operating in mud and water, grease at
ten hours.
HX,9000LM,J -19-13DEC93
85-14 240397
PN=249
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-09OCT90
H42693
1. Straw Walker Drive Gear Case- Check oil level. Oil 3. Secondary Countershaft.
must be to level on decal. Add as needed.
4. Cylinder Drive.
2. Tailing Auger Slip Clutch.
H01,9000LM,K -19-09OCT91
85-15 240397
PN=250
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-07AUG91
H43785
1. Rear Axle (Both Sides)-Power steering outer fitting. 3. Transmission-Remove plug and check. Add as
needed to within 12 mm (1/2 in.) of bottom of hole.
Rear Axle (Both Sides)-Power steering inner fitting.
4. (9600 Combines with Planetary Final Drives)
Rear Axle (Both Sides)-Tie rod fitting. Check oil level in SWECO crawler track rollers and
idlers.
2. Final Drive Oil-Fill at hole (A).
Check oil level up to within 12 mm (1/2 in.) of bottom

of hole at plug (B). (If you can touch oil with your
little finger, you do not need to add oil).
H01,9000LM,L -19-11SEP92
85-16 240397
PN=251
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-03OCT91
H43934
1. Left-Hand Lube Bank - 2. Reel Speed Valve Spool.

Grease two fittings:
A-Cylinder Shaft Bearing 3. Secondary Countershaft.
B-Beater Shaft Bearing
4. Reel Drive Sheave Bearing.
H01,9000LM,M -19-24MAR97
85-17 240397
PN=252
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-14JUL92
H44917
1. Unloading Auger Upper Gear Case 3. Unloading Auger Drive Countershaft.
2. Straw Chopper Rotor Bearings (Both Sides). 4. Unloading Auger Lower Gearcase.
H01,9000LM,W -19-11SEP92
85-18 240397
PN=253
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-17OCT90
H42698
1. Conveyor Auger Drive Bearings-Two fittings on Coat seal on new filter with oil . Hand tighten then
9600 combines. tighten 1/2 turn more.
2. Final Drive Outer Bearings (Both Sides)-When 5. Straw Chopper Drive Countershaft Bearings.
operating in mud and water, grease at 10 hours.
6. Straw Chopper Drive Sheave.
3. Look through cap. Add brake fluid to 6 mm (1/4
in.) from top. Do not let dirt get into brake fluid. 7. Hydrostatic Charge Filter-Coat seal on new filter
with oil. Hand tighten then tighten 1/2 turn more.
4. Main Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Filter. It is not
necessary to drain the reservoir to change this filter.
H01,9000LM,N -19-05NOV90
85-19 240397
PN=254
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-13MAR97
H48247
1. Engine Gearcase Filter-Coat seal on new filter with IMPORTANT: Do not add water in freezing
oil. Hand tighten then tighten 1/2 turn more. weather unless engine is run or
batteries charged for 30 minutes so
2. Primary Countershaft Gear Case - Check with water and electrolyte are well mixed.
engine off.
Clean and tighten connections, if needed.
3. Batteries-Clean off top of batteries and check level
in each cell. Fill to bottom of filler neck with distilled Wipe batteries with damp cloth. When finished,
water if needed. destroy cloth.
HX,9000LM,O -19-24MAR97
85-20 240397
PN=255
400 HOURS OR YEARLY
-UN-17JUL92
H44919
1. Separator Driveshaft U-Joint (Both Ends) (rear NOTE: Loading Auger Gear Case does not need to
grease zerk can be reached from underneath). be drained.
2. Loading Auger Gear Case-Check dipstick and add

oil as needed.
HX,9000LM,P -19-13DEC93
85-21 240397
PN=256
400 HOURS (TRACKS) (OPTIONAL)
-UN-25JAN95
H47102
Check oil level in the small and large track wheels.
HX,9000LM,E -19-30JAN95
85-22 240397
PN=257
800 HOURS OR EVERY TWO YEARS
-UN-14JUL92
H44920
Drain radiator at (A), flush and refill with the correct recommendations given in FUELS AND
coolant and conditioner. See Flushing Cooling System LUBRICANTS.
in ENGINE SERVICE and Engine Coolant
H01,9000LM,Q -19-11SEP92
85-23 240397
PN=258
2000 HOURS
-UN-22APR92
H44248
After every 2000 hours of operation have engine
valve lash checked, and adjusted if necessary, by
HX,9000LM,U -19-13DEC93
85-24 240397
PN=259
2000 HOURS
-UN-30AUG94
H46225
1. Primary Countershaft Gear Case-Drain at plug (A) 3. Transmission-Slide tube (A) out of block (B).
and refill at dipstick (B). Oil level must show on Remove block (B) to drain. Fill at hole (C) to within
knurled part of dipstick. 12 mm (1/2 in.) of bottom of hole.
2. Reverser Gear Case-Raise feeder house and lower 4. Final Drives-Drain at (A) and refill at (B) to within
safety stop. Drain at (A) and refill at (B). Check with 12 mm (1/2 in.) of bottom of check hole (C). (If you
feeder house all the way up. Oil level must show on can touch oil with your little finger, you do not need
knurled part of dipstick. to add oil).
HX,9000LM,R -19-12SEP94
85-25 240397
PN=260
2000 HOURS
-UN-12FEB97
H48239
1. Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Reservoir-Drain at (A). Clean 3. Dual Range Gear Case-Drain at (A). Check new
screen and cap (B) and refill. Oil must show above oil level with arrow (B) up. Do not get oil on belts.
lower sight glass and below top sight glass.
4. Engine Gear Case-Drain at plug (A). Clean
2. Straw Walker Gear Case-Remove hose from breather on dipstick. Refill at tube (C). Clean screen
bracket to drain. Replace hose in bracket and fill with in sump at (B).
oil to level on decal.
HX,9000LM,S -19-24MAR97
85-26 240397
PN=261
AS REQUIRED
-UN-03OCT96
H48110
1. Fuel Filter-Replace filter (A) water separator filter 4. Windshield Washer Reservoir (Optional).
(B) and bleed system.
5. Air Cleaner Element-Service primary filter (A) only
2. Recirculating Filter-Remove tray, reach in and lift when shown by warning light (B). Check precleaner
out filter. Clean or replace filter. Replace filter in for plugging. Check for leaks and for collapse of
same position as when removed. aspirator tube. Replace element if plugged.
3. Cab Fresh Air Filter-Turn knob and pull out door 6. Batteries-Clean off top of batteries and check level
with dirt tray. Remove wing nut and pull out filter. in each cell. Fill to bottom of filler neck with distilled
Clean or replace filter. water.
H01,9000LM,T -19-17OCT96
85-27 240397
PN=262
Engine Service
REAR LADDER AND LANDING
Push up on lever (A) and swing ladder out until it

latches.
-UN-16JUL92
Use handle (B) to pull ladder to rear.
Swing panel (C) rearward until it latches.
H44922
H01,9000ES,A -19-11SEP92
ENGINE COMPARTMENT DOOR
This door folds forward against grain tank to service

engine. Prop door up with strap (A).
-UN-06AUG91
Fold door down over engine when not servicing.
H43584
H01,9000ES,B -19-09OCT91
CLEANING ENGINE COMPARTMENT
N CAUTION: A combination of dirt, oil and chaff

in the engine compartment is a fire hazard. Do
not clean engine compartment with engine
running.
-UN-11OCT96
H48124
H01,9000ES,C -19-17OCT96
90-1 240397
PN=263
Engine Service
CHANGING STARTING FLUID CANS
To install a new can, remove safety cap and spray

button from can. Loosen thumb wheel (A) enough to
change cans, then tighten.
-UN-11OCT88
IMPORTANT: To avoid drawing dust into engine,
always keep can in position.
Protect starting fluid can from extreme heat or damage.
H39275
Check for fluid and valve operation by installing and
pressing spray nozzle. If no fluid sprays out, replace can.
N CAUTION: To prevent possible injury from

exploding container, do not carry extra or
empty ether cans inside cab.
H01,9000OE,M -19-13DEC93
STARTING FLUID CAN HOLDER (STORAGE

POSITION)
IMPORTANT: Dust can damage engine. The starting

fluid can holder should be folded for
-UN-12JUL89
storage when starting fluid can is not
installed to avoid drawing dust into
engine.
Remove and fold the sides (A) of the holder.
H40919
Install sides of support onto top support (B).
Tighten thumb wheel (C) until snug against support (D).

A—Side of Holder
B—Top Support
C—Thumb Wheel
D—Support
H01,9000OE,N -19-13DEC93
BELT SHIELD
N CAUTION: Drive belts on engine are enclosed

behind a shield. Keep shield in place except to
service. Shut off engine before opening.
-UN-06AUG91
Remove wing screws (A) to open shield.

H43585
H01,9000ES,D -19-09OCT91
90-2 240397
PN=264
Engine Service
ENGINE ACCESS PANEL
From grain tank side, remove screws and lift out panel
for access to the front side of the engine.
-UN-11OCT88
H39299
H01,9000ES,E -19-09OCT91
DO NOT MODIFY FUEL SYSTEM
IMPORTANT: Modification or alteration of the

injection pump, injection pump timing,
or fuel injectors in ways not
-UN-17JUN91
recommended by the manufacturer will
terminate the warranty obligation to the
purchaser. See warranty information
inside front cover.
H43587
Do not attempt to service injection
pump or fuel injectors yourself. Special
training and special tools are required.
See your John Deere dealer.
Never steam clean or spray water on a

warm injection pump. This could cause
damage to pump parts.
H01,9000ES,G -19-09OCT91
90-3 240397
PN=265
Engine Service
FUEL TANK, CAP AND BREATHER
N CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. Do not refuel

the machine while smoking. Turn off engine
before filling tank. Rotary screen is turning
when engine is running.
Fuel tank cap (A) is non-vented. Instead, a breather (B)

extends from top of fuel tank.
A light tap against breather body will normally knock out

dirt. If screen is plugged, remove breather from tank for
-UN-16JUL92
cleaning in a safe solvent. Wipe dirt and chaff from area
before removing breather.
N CAUTION: Do not overfill fuel tank. Bodily
H44923
injury can result from fuel splash back.
Leakage can result from expansion of fuel. If
the tank is filled too full, then left in direct
sunlight or if temperature gets too hot, the
tank will overflow.
HX,9000ES,H -19-13DEC93
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP
If engine is losing power from a possible faulty electric

fuel pump (A), change water filter separator (B) first.
-UN-18OCT90
If changing separator does not help, then change the
engine fuel filter before replacing this pump.
H42707
H01,9000ES,I -19-09OCT91
DRAINING WATER SEPARATOR
Inspect fuel tank water separator bowl (A) each time fuel
tank is filled. If water shows, drain off at (B).
-UN-06NOV90
Change water separator filter as required or when the

engine lacks power.
If dirty fuel has been used, change this water separator

filter before changing the fuel filter.
H42708
H01,9000ES,J -19-09OCT91
90-4 240397
PN=266
Engine Service
WATER SEPARATOR FILTER

REPLACEMENT
Shut off valve (A).
-UN-03FEB93
Drain fuel from separator (B). Remove and replace filter.
Open valve (A). Let air bleed through (B) and (C).
See BLEEDING FUEL LINES IF NECESSARY.
H44991
HX,9000ES,K -19-13DEC93
DRAINING FUEL TANK
Petcock (A) at bottom of fuel tank is used for draining.

Close finger tight.
-UN-06AUG91
Use a clean container when draining to see if fuel is
dirty.
H43789
H01,9000ES,L -19-09OCT91
DRAINING WATER FROM FUEL FILTER
Drain filter (A) by loosening bleed plug (B) and opening

drain plug (C).
-UN-11OCT88
Turn on key switch and pump the transfer pump to bleed
the system.
H39745
H01,9000ES,M -19-11SEP92
90-5 240397
PN=267
Engine Service
FUEL FILTER REPLACEMENT
Change water filter separator before changing this filter.

Water filter may be plugged, making fuel filter change
unnecessary.
-UN-11OCT88
How often this filter is changed depends on how clean
the fuel is and how it was stored.
Snap loose spring latches (A).
H39675
Pull filter (B) off and push new filter on.
Bleed air from filter after a filter change or when engine

has run out of fuel.
IMPORTANT: Any dirt lodged in groove or hollow

center of spring pin (C) can be washed
into injection system and will result in
damage to injection pump or nozzles.
HX,9000ES,N -19-13DEC93
BLEEDING 9400 ENGINE FUEL FILTER
Air can enter the fuel system when changing the filter or
running out of fuel. Air in the system could prevent
engine from starting. If engine will not start in a couple
-UN-01OCT91
attempts, use the following procedure to bleed the filter.
Loosen, but do not remove, filter bleed plug (A).
Pump primer lever (B) until fuel appears at bleed plug.
H43892
NOTE: If the primer does not pump fuel and no
resistance is felt at the upper end of the lever
stroke, turn the engine slightly with the starter to
change the fuel pump cam position.
Turn key on so electric pump can help hand priming.
Tighten bleed plug and leave primer lever in the down

position.
H01,9000ES,O -19-09OCT91
90-6 240397
PN=268
Engine Service
BLEEDING 9500 AND 9600 ENGINE FUEL

FILTER
Air can enter the fuel system when changing the filter or
running out of fuel. Air in the system could prevent
-UN-06AUG91
-UN-17JUN91
engine from starting. If engine will not start in a couple
attempts, use the following procedure to bleed the filter.
Loosen, but do not remove, filter bleed plug (A).
H43790
H43623
Loosen primer (B) until it can be pulled upward.
Pump primer until fuel appears at bleed plug.
Turn key on so electric pump can help hand priming.
Tighten bleed plug. Push primer down and tighten.
H01,9000ES,P -19-09OCT91
BLEEDING FUEL LINES
If the engine still will not start after bleeding the filter, it
may be necessary to bleed the lines as follows:
-UN-17JUN91
Use two wrenches to loosen the high pressure line on
three injectors.
Pump the transfer pump by hand until fuel (free of

bubbles) flows from the loose connections.
H43589
H01,9000ES,Q -19-09OCT91
90-7 240397
PN=269
Engine Service
CHECKING AND SETTING LOW IDLE SPEED

(9400 COMBINES ONLY)
NOTE: Before adjusting engine speed, make sure engine

has reached its normal operating temperature;
usually this will take about 15 minutes.
Low idle speed should be 1350 rpm ± 40 rpm. Adjust as

follows:
1. Loosen lock nut and adjust low idle screw (A) until
-UN-25OCT90
cornerpost tachometer reads 1350 +/- 40 rpm.
2. Tighten lock nut.
3. Press idle switch to high idle then to low idle.
H42715
4. Read low idle and readjust if necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not adjust fast idle screw (B).
H01,9000ES,R -19-05NOV90
90-8 240397
PN=270
Engine Service
DRAIN COOLING SYSTEM
Every two years or 800 hours, drain cooling system by

opening drains on radiator (A) and engine block (B).
Open breather valve (C) on top of engine block to allow
-UN-16JUL92
coolant to drain faster.
H44924
-UN-17JUN91
H43591
-UN-22JAN92
H44080
HX,9000ES,S -19-17OCT96
90-9 240397
PN=271
Engine Service
Remove hose (A) from bottom of recovery tank and

drain tank.
Close drains, install hose on recovery tank and fill

system with clean water.
Run engine until it reaches operating temperature with

heater on.
Stop engine and drain water out before rust or sediment

settles.
-UN-29JUL92
Close drains and refill system with a solution of clean
water and John Deere Cooling System Cleaner PT500 or
its equal. Follow instructions with cleaner.
H44925
After using cleaner, flush system with clean water and
drain.
Close drains, close and latch rotary screen door and fill
system with correct coolant and conditioner (see the
recommendations given in Fuels and Lubricants in this
manual).
To fill system:
Open breather valve on top of engine.
Fill system until fluid begins to run out of breather valve.

Close breather valve and finish filling system until fluid is
at fill mark on recovery tank.
Install cap on radiator, turn on the heater and run engine

until it reaches operating temperature.
Remove cap from recovery tank and refill tank to fill

mark. Do not fill recovery tank from radiator. Install cap
on recovery tank.
HX,9000ES,AL -19-25OCT95
90-10 240397
PN=272
Engine Service
FILLING RADIATOR
N CAUTION: Avoid being scalded when radiator

cap is removed. First turn cap slightly to the
stop. This lets steam safely out the vent. Never
fill radiator when engine is overheated unless
engine is idling slowly. Pour coolant in slowly.
Check coolant level when engine is cold.
Check coolant level in recovery tank.
IMPORTANT: Never pour cold water into a hot engine

as it might crack cylinder block or
head. Do not operate engine without
coolant for even a few minutes.
H01,9000ES,T -19-09OCT91
WINTERIZE COOLING SYSTEM
IMPORTANT: Do not drain cooling system to See Fuels and Lubricants in this manual for the
protect against freezing. The heater correct recommendations.
does not drain completely, so
damage would result. After adding antifreeze, turn heater on and run engine
until it reaches operating temperature. This mixes the
Before cold weather, be sure the cooling system has solution and circulates it through the system.
enough antifreeze. Use a reliable brand of
permanent-type ethylene glycol antifreeze which
contains a rust inhibitor and water pump lubricant, but
does not contain a leak-stopping additive.
HX,9000ES,U -19-13DEC93
90-11 240397
PN=273
Engine Service
THERMOSTAT REPLACEMENT
N CAUTION: Avoid being scalded. Before

changing thermostats, release pressure from
system by turning the radiator cap slowly to
-UN-06AUG91
first stop. This releases steam. Drain 4L (6
qts.) of coolant out radiator petcock.
The engine has two 82˚C (180˚F) thermostats.
H43791
Remove air intake pipe on 9500 and 9600 Combines.
Remove bolts and pry water manifold head off slowly.

Clean surfaces before using new gasket.
H01,9000ES,V -19-09OCT91
CHANGING ENGINE FAN SPEEDS (9400

GRAIN COMBINES ONLY)
Pull down on spring loaded idler (A), slip belt (B) into
desired groove and release idler to change to these
speeds:
Slow Speed:
-UN-23AUG91
Belt in smaller diameter crankshaft sheave groove.
Sufficient cooling in temperatures under 20˚C (70˚F).
Fast Speed:
H43874
Belt in larger diameter crankshaft sheave groove.
Requires slightly more power but provides sufficient

cooling in temperatures above 20˚C (70˚F). The fast
speed also provides more cooling when harvesting
conditions do not require a great deal of power.
H01,9000ES,AM -19-17OCT96
90-12 240397
PN=274
Engine Service
REPLACING ENGINE FAN BELT
(9600 Combines) Remove cap screws and spacers (A).
(9600 Combines) Pull down on spring loaded idler (B).
(9600 Combines) Remove rotary screen drive belt (C)

from sheave.
-UN-01OCT91
(9600 Combines) Pull down on spring loaded idler (D).
(9600 Combines) Remove engine fan belt (E) from

sheave and remove belt through opening left by spacers.
H43916
(9400 and 9500 Combines) Pull up on spring loaded
idler (F) and remove rotary screen drive belt (G) from
sheave.
(9400 and 9500) Pull down on spring loaded idler (H)

and remove fan belt (I). Guide belt around fan to
remove.
-UN-01OCT91
H43917
-UN-01OCT91
H43918
H01,9000ES,Y -19-09OCT91
90-13 240397
PN=275
Engine Service
ROTARY SCREEN BELT ROUTING
A—Rotary Screen
B—Belt
C—Idlers
-UN-11OCT88
D—Drive Sheave
H39170
H01,9000ES,W -19-09OCT91
REPLACING ROTARY SCREEN DRIVE BELT
Raise idler (A) and remove drive belt.
-UN-16JUL92
H44927
H01,9000ES,Z -19-11SEP92
CLEANING ROTARY SCREEN, OIL COOLER,

CONDENSER, RADIATOR AND CHARGE AIR
COOLER
N CAUTION: Turn off engine and remove key
-UN-16JUL92
before cleaning rotary screen.
Pull latch (A) and open rotary screen door (B).
H44928
H01,9000ES,AA -19-11SEP92
90-14 240397
PN=276
Engine Service
Check the rotary screen daily to be certain it turns freely.
Clean the rotary fan screen with a brush and

compressed air when dirt and chaff build up on or
behind the screen.
Pull oil cooler and condenser (A) out.
Clean oil cooler, condenser and radiator.
Clean charge air cooler.
-UN-16JUL92
To clean with compressed air, blow from the inside out.
Clean out dirt from lower vacuum duct (B) and duct (C).
H44929
IMPORTANT: When using high pressure air or water,
be careful of fin damage to coolers.
Use a fin comb to straighten bent fins.
Bent fins will decrease cooler
performance.
-UN-16JUL92
H44930
H01,9000ES,AG -19-11SEP92
ADJUST ROTARY SCREEN KNIFE COMB
Loosen cap screws (A) and position knife comb so rake

bar (B) passes through comb without interference. -UN-20JUL92
H44931
HX,9000ES,AH -19-13DEC93
90-15 240397
PN=277
Engine Service
REPLACING ROTARY SCREEN RAKE BAR

before cleaning rotary screen.
-UN-16JUL92
Pull latch (A) and open rotary screen door (B).
H44928
H01,9000ES,AJ -19-11SEP92
Remove screws from rake bar support (A). Remove rake

bar.
-UN-20JUL92
H44932
H01,9000ES,AK -19-11SEP92
90-16 240397
PN=278
Engine Service
REMOVING AIR CLEANER FILTERS
IMPORTANT: When servicing filters, turn off engine

and remove key so dirt cannot be
pulled into engine.
Service filters only when engine air filter light stays on.
Remove wing nut (A) and dust cover (B).
Remove screw (C) and pull out primary filter (D). The
safety filter stops dirt that would pass through a
damaged primary filter.
Clean, wash or replace the primary filter. Do not clean or

wash the safety filter (H), but install a new one if
needed. Do not remove the metal wrap on the filter.
IMPORTANT: Never run the engine without both

filters in place.
Check all connections in the air intake system. Be

certain they are tight.
IMPORTANT: Do not use any exhaust flow cleaning

unit to blow chaff off combine. Using
such a unit can cause air filter failure,
-UN-11OCT88
followed by engine failure.
A—Wing Nut
B—Dust Cover
C—Wing Screw
H39171
D—Primary Filter
E—Nut
F—Washer
G—Wing Nut
H—Safety Filter
H01,9000ES,AC -19-20MAR90
INSPECTING ELEMENT
1. Hold a bright light inside element (A) and check

carefully for holes. Discard any element which shows the
slightest hole.
-UN-09DEC88
2. Be sure outer screen (B) is not dented. Vibration

would quickly wear a hole in filter.
3. Be sure filter gasket (C) is in good condition. If gasket

RW6824
is damaged or missing, replace element.
H01,9000ES,AD -19-20MAR90
90-17 240397
PN=279
Engine Service
CLEANING ELEMENT
1. Pat sides of element gently (A) to loosen dirt. Do not

tap element against a hard surface.
-UN-09DEC88
-UN-09DEC88
2. Using a John Deere AR62377 Dry Element Cleaner
Gun (B), clean element with compressed air. Hold nozzle
next to inner surface, and move up and down pleats.
RW6821
IMPORTANT: Do not direct air against outside of
RW8852
element, as it might force dirt through
to inside.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 to remove additional dirt.
4. Inspect element before reinstalling.
H01,9000ES,AE -19-20MAR90
WASHING ELEMENT
IMPORTANT: Never wash element in gasoline or any

solvent. Never use compressed air on a
-UN-09DEC88
-UN-09DEC88
wet element. Do not oil element.
1. If element is coated with oil or soot, wash in a

solution of warm water and John Deere R36757 Filter
Element Cleaner or its equivalent. Let element soak at
RW8874
least 15 minutes (A), then agitate gently to flush out dirt. RW6823
2. Rinse element thoroughly from inside with clean

water. Use element cleaning gun (B) or a free-running
hose. Keep pressure low to avoid damaging element.
3. Allow element to dry completely before using. This

usually takes from one to three days. Do not oven dry or
use drying agents. Protect element from freezing until
dry.
4. Inspect element before installing.
NOTE: Primary element can be washed up to six times.
H01,9000ES,AF -19-20MAR90
90-18 240397
PN=280
Electrical System Service
CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND RELAYS (ENGINE
COMPARTMENT)
Three 50 amp circuit breakers will continue to reset and

trip as long as an overload or short exists.
-UN-25OCT90
Three breakers protect the main power cable for the
electrical system (A), lighting system (B) and cab air
control system (C). If a breaker does not reset, replace
it. If it does reset and trips again, determine cause and
H42726
correct.
Relays carry large electrical loads and are controlled by

switches.
A—Electrical System
B—Lighting System
C—Air Treating System
D—Air Treating System
E—Electrical System
H01,9000ESS,A -19-05NOV90
CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND RELAYS

(CENTRAL ELECTRONICS BOX)
20 and 30 amp breakers, located on the power

distribution board in the central electronics box, provide
-UN-29JUL92
individual circuit protection.
Open door and brush out any dust. Release latches (A).
Remove cover with circuit boards.
H44938
To reset a breaker, turn off all switches. Wait two
minutes for breaker to cool, then try again.
H01,9000ESS,B -19-11SEP92
95-1 240397
PN=281
CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND RELAYS
If a breaker does not reset, replace it. If it does reset

and trips again, determine cause and correct.
-UN-25OCT90
Circuit breakers (A) are plug-in type and can be
replaced.
IMPORTANT: Breakers can be pulled out. They are

made with a tight fit for good contact.
H42727
Pull straight out. Do not pry with a
screwdriver etc.
Each breaker is marked, by circuit, on the power

distribution board.
Relays (B) carry large electrical loads and are controlled

by switches.
Relays in the central electronics box are on the power

distribution board and can be replaced. All relays are the
same part number.
IMPORTANT: Relays can be pulled out. They are

made with a tight fit for good contact.
Pull straight out, do not pry with a
screwdriver, etc.
Each relay is marked, by circuit, on the power

distribution board.
H01,9000ESS,AP -19-09OCT91
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD RELAY

IDENTIFICATION
K1-Concave Clearance Decrease

K2-Concave Clearance Increase
K3-Engine Running Power
K4-Road Lamps (Cab)
K5-Field Lamps
K6-Auxiliary Lamps
K7-Okay to Start
K8-Right Turn Lamps
K9-Fan Speed Decrease
K10-Fan Speed Increase
K11-Road Lamps
K12-Stubble Lamps
K13-Left Turn Lamps
H01,9000ESS,AM -19-05NOV90
95-2 240397
PN=282
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD CIRCUIT

BREAKER IDENTIFICATION
1-Concave Clearance Adjustment

2-Engine Running Power
3-Road Lamps (Cab)
4-Control Circuit Power
5-Ignition Switch Power
6-EMIP Power (electro-magnetic interference protected)
7-Wiper Power
8-Turn Signal Power
9-Field Lamps
10-Service Power
11-Fan Speed Adjustment
12-Road Lamps
13-Turn Lamps
H01,9000ESS,AN -19-11SEP92
REPLACING BULBS
If all of the lights fail in a particular system at the same

time, check for a tripped circuit breaker or relay.
If a single light fails, bulb may be burned out.
If problem is other than circuit breaker, relay or bulb, see

H01,9000ESS,F -19-20MAR90
95-3 240397
PN=283
BULB PART NUMBERS

John Deere Trade (ANSI) John Deere Trade (ANSI)
Location Part Number Number Location Part Number Number
Cab Head light Concave indicator AH114882 904

or optional
side finder
light AH127718 9006 Turn signal AA27536
indicators and or
Unloading auger AR42591 4422 gauges R77436 161
Grain tank AD2062R 1156 Dome and console 57M7173 211-2
Turn signals, Warning display

tail lights and panel AH108380 73
flasher H133384 2458
Accumulator
Side lights AR62407 194 gauge AH108380 73
Auxiliary Light AT130104 Combine Data AH108380 73

Kit (optional) Center
H01,9000ESS,G -19-25OCT95
CAB HEAD LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT

AND ADJUSTMENT
N CAUTION: Raise feeder house all the way up

and lower safety stop before standing on
-UN-11OCT88
feeder house to replace or adjust these bulbs.
Remove three screws (A) evenly and remove headlamp

(B).
H39475
Disconnect wiring (C). Clean dirt from headlamp.
Push in and twist retainer ring (D) counterclockwise. Bulb

pulls straight out.
When installing headlamp, adjust as follows:
IMPORTANT: Over tightening the screws until they

bottom out can break the headlamp.
Start with the two end screws first, then the bottom
screw last. Adjust the screws until all three tabs are flush
with the panel.
HX,9000ESS,H -19-13DEC93
95-4 240397
PN=284
AUXILIARY FIELD LIGHT (OPTIONAL) BULB

REPLACEMENT
Remove four screws (A) and remove housing.
-UN-12FEB97
Push bulb in and turn to remove.
H48240
HX,9000ESS,AL -19-24MAR97
SIDE FINDER (OPTIONAL) LIGHT BULB

REPLACEMENT
Disconnect wiring (A) and clean dirt from light.
-UN-11OCT88
Push in and twist ring retainer (B) counterclockwise. Bulb
pulls straight out.
H39306
H01,9000ESS,I -19-17SEP96
GRAIN TANK LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
Unscrew housing (A) from base.
-UN-06AUG91
H43792
H01,9000ESS,J -19-09OCT91
WARNING LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove nuts (A).
Remove shield (B) from light (C).

-UN-03FEB93
Unscrew light from bulb base.

H44993
SH,9500ESS,L -19-18MAR93
95-5 240397
PN=285
FRONT TURN SIGNAL, TAIL LIGHT,

WARNING (FLASHER) LIGHT AND SIDE
LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove two screws (A) and remove light housing.
-UN-11OCT88
Twist sockets counterclockwise (B) from housing. The
bulbs pull straight out.
H39173
H01,9000ESS,K -19-20MAR90
CONCAVE INDICATOR BULB

REPLACEMENT
From behind front panel, twist socket (A) to remove.
-UN-11OCT88
Bulb pulls straight out.
H39174
H01,9000ESS,L -19-20MAR90
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR BULB

REPLACEMENT
Sit in seat and tilt steering column toward you.
-UN-11OCT88
Remove four screws and remove steering column cover
(A).
Pull out bulb socket (B). Bulb pulls straight out.
H39476
H01,9000ESS,M -19-20MAR90
DOME AND CONSOLE LIGHT BULB

REPLACEMENT
To replace either light bulb, remove lens cover by

pressing sides of cover.
-UN-11OCT88
Replace bulb.
Replace lens cover by snapping into place.

H39477
H01,9000ESS,N -19-20MAR90
95-6 240397
PN=286
GAUGE LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove four screws (A) and remove gauge panel (B).
Unplug harness, remove four screws and circuit board.
-UN-14MAR89
Pull bulb out.
H39747
H01,9000ESS,O -19-20MAR90
WARNING DISPLAY PANEL BULB

REPLACEMENT
(Not Illustrated) Remove screws securing warning display

panel and lower panel.
-UN-12JUL89
Remove Phillips-head screws (A) securing circuit board
to panel.
H40944
H01,9000ESS,Q -19-11SEP92
Remove torx screws securing bulb holder (A).
-UN-12JUL89
H40945
H01,9000ESS,R -19-11SEP92
Remove bulb by pulling straight out.
Replace bulb with new AH108380 bulb on the board.

-UN-12JUL89
H40946
H01,9000ESS,S -19-11SEP92
95-7 240397
PN=287
ACCUMULATOR GAUGE (OPTIONAL) BULB

REPLACEMENT
Pull off cover (A) to replace bulb (B) behind cover.
-UN-11OCT88
H39635
H01,9000ESS,T -19-20MAR90
CONTROL PANEL ROCKER TYPE SWITCH

REPLACEMENT
Pry off switch cap (A).
Pull switch (B) straight up with pliers.
To install the new switch push it straight down, making

sure that rib and groove (C) align.
-UN-25OCT90
H42730
H01,9000ESS,U -19-05NOV90
CONTROL PANEL KNOB AND TOGGLE

TYPE SWITCH REPLACEMENT
Remove four screws (A) under control panel (B). One is

under ashtray. Lift up panel, pulling harness with it.
-UN-11OCT88
Turn panel over and remove four screws. Remove circuit

board if you are replacing toggle switch or unloading
auger engage switch.
H39748
H01,9000ESS,V -19-20MAR90
95-8 240397
PN=288
HYDRO-HANDLE ROCKER SWITCH

REPLACEMENT
IMPORTANT: Be certain of your diagnosis before

removing this switch for replacement.
-UN-25OCT90
The tangs holding the switch in place
will be broken when it is removed.
Trace switch cable to rear of arm rest and cut cable at

connector. Disconnect connector from harness.
H42731
Pry switch (A) out of handle and pull switch cable up
and out of handle tube (B).
Route cable on the new switch down and through handle

tube.
Use the old (cut-off) connector as a guide and insert the

new switch wires into a new connector, then snap
connector to harness.
-UN-25JAN95
IMPORTANT: Be certain the new switch wires are in
the correct holes in the new connector,
just like the old one.
H46258
Hydro-Handle w/ Manual Tilt Switch
H01,9000ESS,W -19-30JAN95
OBSERVE ELECTRICAL PRECAUTIONS
N CAUTION: Keep all sparks and flames away

from batteries as gas given off by electrolyte
is explosive. To avoid sparks, connect ground
-UN-25OCT90
cable last and disconnect it first. To avoid

shocks and burns, disconnect battery ground
cable before servicing any part of electrical
system or when removing batteries.
H42732
H01,9000ESS,X -19-05NOV90
95-9 240397
PN=289
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR HANDLING
Electrical connectors must not be forcibly mated or

unmated. All are designed to be mated easily. If you
have to use tools, you may be doing something wrong.
Prying or forcing connectors may cause permanent
damage to the locking mechanism, contacts, or both.
-UN-01FEB89
When working on connectors, make sure you are
working on the correct terminal. Remember that male
and female halves are mirror images of one and other.
Look for the terminal number on the connector body.
H37083
The connection of improper electrical circuits can cause
unusual electrical symptoms.
When an electrical connector is repaired, it is important

that the proper terminals are used. In some of these
connectors, different terminals are used to carry different
currents. If contacts of different materials are mated,
corrosion may develop that could affect performance.
When removing terminals from a connector, it is very

important to use the correct extraction tool and gently
remove the terminal. The connector body can be
damaged if terminals are just “jerked” out of it. The
damage caused will prevent the new terminal from
staying in the connector and cause replacement of the
connector body.
When installing a new terminal on a wire, make sure the

insulation crimp and wire crimp are both made properly.
Each part of the terminal crimps is designed for a
specific purpose. Failure to properly crimp the wire
contact area can result in poor or no electrical contact.
Failure to crimp the insulation support properly can result
in problems getting the terminal into the connector body,
thus causing premature failure.
H01,9000ESS,Y -19-20MAR90
95-10 240397
PN=290
PREVENT DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
To prevent damage to electrical system components,

always observe these precautions:
-UN-25OCT90
Never disconnect the batteries with the key switch on or
the engine running.
Never connect jumper cables with the key switch on.
H42732
Disconnect batteries when charging them.
The combine should be jump started by 12 volts only.
Always charge the batteries with a charger for 12 volts.
Never connect or disconnect wiring harness connectors

with the key switch on.
Do not apply power or ground to any component as a

test, unless instructed.
H01,9000ESS,Z -19-09OCT91
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Two 12-volt batteries connected in parallel provide a

12-volt electrical system.
-UN-01MAR89
When replacing batteries, use John Deere batteries or
equivalent. Both batteries must have the same rating.
H39308
Cold Cranking Amps Reserve Capacity

Volts John Deere Part No. BCI Group 0˚F (-18˚C) Minutes at 25 Amps
12 TY6127 (Not Avail. in Canada) 31 625 160

12 TY21773 (Canada Only) 27 700 170
H01,9000ESS,AA -19-05NOV90
95-11 240397
PN=291
CONNECTING BATTERY CABLES
IMPORTANT: Batteries must have same terminal

locations.
-UN-25OCT90
CAUTION: BATTERIES ARE NEGATIVE
GROUNDED ONLY. Always connect battery
ground strap to negative (-) posts of battery.
Connect starter cable to positive (+) post of
battery. Reversed polarity in battery or
H42732
alternator connections results in permanent
damage to electrical system. Connect ground
strap to negative (-) terminal last.
When connecting batteries:
Turn off all switches and accessories. Clean battery

posts and terminals.
QUICKLY TAP ground strap to negative post. Arcing

must not occur. If arcing occurs, DO NOT MAKE
CONNECTION. Check to see if battery position is
reversed.
If arcing still occurs, check again that all switches and

accessories are off. Then check for shorts, broken wires
and loose or corroded connections.
Connect negative (-) battery ground straps.
H01,9000ESS,AB -19-05NOV90
95-12 240397
PN=292
CHARGING BATTERIES
Keep battery fully charged, especially during cold

weather.
-UN-14MAR89
CAUTION: Never charge a frozen battery. Thaw
at room temperature before connecting to
battery charger. Only charge batteries in a well
ventilated area. Disconnect both cables from
battery terminals when charging batteries in
H39309
combine.
Determine which battery needs to be charged.
Disconnect both battery cables and connect charger

positive cable to “+” terminal and charger negative cable
to “-” terminal.
Follow instructions provided with charger. Always charge

batteries with a 12-volt charger.
H01,9000ESS,AC -19-20MAR90
PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS
Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away

from the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.
-UN-23AUG88
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.
Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm

battery to 16˚C (60˚F).
TS204
DX,SPARKS -19-03MAR93
95-13 240397
PN=293
CHECKING SPECIFIC GRAVITY
N CAUTION: Battery gas can explode. Keep

sparks and flames away from batteries. Use a
flashlight to check battery electrolyte level.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal

object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or
hydrometer.
Check specific gravity of electrolyte in each cell with a

battery hydrometer to determine battery condition.
Charge battery if reading is below 1.215. Replace battery
if difference between cells is more than 0.050.
Always correct specific gravity reading for electrolyte

temperature variation. Add 0.004 for every 10˚F above
80˚F. (Add 0.007 for every 10˚C above 27˚C.) Subtract
at same rate if electrolyte temperature is below 80˚F
(27˚C). Corrected specific gravity of a fully charged
-UN-23AUG88
battery is 1.260.
TS182
H01,9000ESS,AD -19-20MAR90
CONNECTING BOOSTER BATTERIES
Cold weather starting can be easier by connecting an

additional 12-volt battery in parallel.
-UN-11OCT88
CAUTION: Gas given off by batteries is
explosive. Avoid sparks near batteries.
IMPORTANT: Never connect jumper cables with key

switch on. Never jump-start with more
H39310
than 12 volts.
First jumper cable (A) must connect positive (+) post of

booster battery to positive (+) post of combine battery.
Second jumper cable must first be connected to negative
(-) post of booster battery and then to a good ground on
combine, away from combine batteries.
H01,9000ESS,AE -19-20MAR90
95-14 240397
PN=294
STARTER
If starter fails to operate or operates sluggishly, the

cause may not be in starter but one of the following:
-UN-17JUN91
- Loose, dirty, broken or corroded cables and wires.
- Low battery output.
- Run down batteries.
H43594
- Crankcase oil of wrong viscosity.
Remove access panel in grain tank to get at starter.
If these checks do not correct the problem, see your

John Deere dealer.
H01,9000ESS,AF -19-12JUL91
ALTERNATOR AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Always disconnect battery ground cable before working

on alternator or regulator.
This combine is equipped with a 95 amp alternator.

Never attempt to polarize alternator or regulator.
Never ground a terminal or connect a jumper wire to any

alternator terminals.
-UN-21AUG91
Never connect or disconnect alternator wires with
batteries connected or alternator operating.
H43803
HX,9000ESS,AG -19-13DEC93
95-15 240397
PN=295
ALTERNATOR BELT ADJUSTMENT OR

REPLACEMENT
-UN-17JUN91
Loosen mounting bracket (A). Pull alternator away from
engine to tighten belt. To replace belt, push in on
alternator and remove belt. Correct belt tension (at the
center of the belt) is 12 mm (1/2 in.) deflection with 67N
(15 lb.).
H43595
IMPORTANT: Do not pry on the rear half of the
alternator housing or damage could
result.
HX,9000ESS,AH -19-13DEC93
HEADER DRIVE ELECTROMAGNETIC

CLUTCH
-UN-11OCT88
If the clutch will not work, check the following:
Check and tighten all electrical connections between

clutch and batteries. Examine wiring and repair as
needed.
H39314
Clean any grease from drive plate friction surface. Check
drive plate for free movement.
Voltage across hot terminals must be 11 volts minimum

with engine off and electric clutch on. If voltage light on
the display panel is off, the electrical system has a
minimum of 11 volts.
If these checks do not correct the problem, see your

John Deere dealer.
H01,9000ESS,AI -19-20MAR90
95-16 240397
PN=296
COMMUNICATIONS/CB RADIO MOUNTING
Can be connected to the auxiliary power outlet located

behind the operator’s seat The auxiliary power outlet
contains two 30-amp terminals for quick accessible
-UN-30AUG94
power. Order (1) RE37651 connector from service parts
to connect the auxiliary power outlet to your electronic
equipment.
H46210
H01,9000ESS,AJ -19-17OCT96
95-17 240397
PN=297
FM RADIO INSTALLATION
FM RADIO OUTPUT POWER TO CIRCUIT BREAKER/WIRE GAUGE
RADIO APPROX. CIRCUIT WIRE

OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKER SIZE
POWER PROTECTION SIZE AND (AWG)
(WATTS) NEEDED * PART NO. *
Up to 5** - - -
10 5 Amps 6A - AT41395 16
-19-08MAR90
20 10 Amps 10A - AT42014 14
AR55649
30 15 Amps 15A - AT42040 12
H41735
40 20 Amps 20A - AT41394 10
50 25 Amps 25A - AM33621 10 Typical Lower Power Radio Installation
60*** 30 Amps 30A - AR49352 8
80*** 40 Amps 40A - AT29162 8
100*** 50 Amps 50A - AH112189 8
Using the chart above, determine the circuit breaker and

wire size needed for your radio.
The circuit breakers should be mounted to the side of

the relay panel as shown above. Due to the different
styles available, the circuit breakers mounting feet should
-19-08MAR90
be used as a template for drilling the mounting holes.
Route the power wire from the circuit breakers thru the
cab wall connector plate grommet to the radio along side
the left main wiring harness.
H41736
Use a protective harness covering anywhere that the
wire insulation might come into contact with sharp edges. Typical Higher Power Radio Installation
NOTE:
* These are guidelines only. Consult your radio

manual for actual values.
** May use the power leads supplied with the

machine. If this is not desirable, use the wire and
circuit breaker for a 10 watt radio.
*** If two input power leads are needed for your

radio, the wire size shown is for the transmit
section only. Consult your radio manual for the
low current requirements.
H01,9000ESS,AK -19-20MAR90
95-18 240397
PN=298
Monitors
DIGITAL TACHOMETER (GENERAL
INFORMATION)
The tachometer displays five different functions on a

digital display. Engine and separator hours are also
-UN-13JUN91
available for display.
The tachometer is accurate within ± 10 rpm in displaying

all four rpm functions and is accurate within ± 1/2 km/h
(1/10 mph) in displaying ground speed. If ground speed
H43597
drops below 3/4 km/h (1/2 mph) digital display shows
0.0.
The engine and separator hour meters are accurate to ±

one hour. Only full hours are shown but the computer A—Selector Symbol
memory is updated in quarter hours. B—Digital Display
C—Separator Hours
D—Cylinder RPM
The digital display (B) dims by 50% when the headlights E—Cleaning Fan RPM
are turned on and can be dimmed even more with the F—Engine RPM
dimmer switch on light panel. G—Ground Speed
H—Engine Hours
I—Backshaft Speed
H01,9000MON,A -19-09OCT91
100-1 240397
PN=299
Monitors
DIGITAL TACHOMETER ENGINE CONTROL

DIAGNOSTIC CODES
On 9500 and 9600 Combines, the tachometer may

display a number of diagnostic codes relating to engine
operation. The 9400 Combine does not have an
electronic engine control and should not display these
codes. If your 9400 Combine displays a code other than
SEV1, see your John Deere dealer.
The diagnostic codes will appear as ---E on the

tachometer. If any of these codes appear, you can
continue to operate the combine, but write the code on a
piece of paper and call your John Deere dealer at your
earliest convenience. However, certain codes may
appear which indicate that the combine engine might die
or may not start.
After making a written note of the code, press the

desired speed symbol to return the tachometer to normal
operation. The diagnostic code will not appear again until
the engine is turned off, restarted and the problem
occurs again.

switches simultaneously.

H01,9000MON,B -19-24MAR97
100-2 240397
PN=300
Monitors
TACHOMETER OPERATION
When key is turned on, the tachometer first shows

ground speed.
-UN-13JUN91
Select function to be shown and press symbol. Square
(A) will move to show the function displayed.
The engine hourmeter (H) shows whole hours when

ground speed (G) and engine rpm (F) are touched at the
H43597
same time.
The separator hourmeter (C) shows whole hours when

cylinder rpm (D) and cleaning fan rpm (E) are touched at
the same time. A—Selector Symbol
B—Digital Display
The backshaft speed rpm is shown when engine rpm (F) C—Separator Hours
D—Cylinder RPM
and cleaning fam rpm (E) are touched at the same time. E—Cleaning Fan RPM
F—Engine RPM
The tachometer also sends an alarm to the light and G—Ground Speed
buzzer in overhead warning display panel for low engine H—Engine Hours
speed and low cylinder speed. I—Backshaft Speed
The engine alarm turns on when rpm drops below 2000.
Cylinder speed alarm turns on when speed drops below

80 percent of setting and engine is at full rpm with
header drive engaged.
H01,9000MON,C -19-09OCT91
100-3 240397
PN=301
Monitors
SENSOR LOCATIONS
-UN-10OCT91
H43897
A—Engine Speed C—Cylinder Speed D—Fan Speed E—Backshaft Speed

B—Ground Speed
H01,9000MON,D -19-09OCT91
100-4 240397
PN=302
Monitors
SERVICE INTERVALS
N CAUTION: To prevent injury, never lubricate or

service combine, header, or engine while it is
running. Engine must be off and key removed.
-UN-06AUG91
Use hour meter as a guide when servicing the combine.

H43781
switches simultaneously and turning the key to “ON”
(third position).

-UN-22AUG91
IMPORTANT: The service times are for average

conditions. Service more often if
H43802
combine is used in extreme conditions.
HX,9000LM,A -19-13DEC93
100-5 240397
PN=303
Monitors
LOW SHAFT SPEED MONITOR (GENERAL

INFORMATION)
The low shaft speed monitor shows with lights and a

buzzer when straw chopper, straw walkers, conveyor
-UN-22AUG91
augers, grain elevator and tailings elevator are operating
less than 85 percent of their designed speed.
The electric clutch and low shaft speed monitor are both
on the same circuit. To check operation of monitor, turn
H43794
key to “ON” (do not start engine) and engage separator
and header drive switches. All lights must turn on and
buzzer must sound. If they do not, see Low Shaft Speed
Monitor Troubleshooting in this section.
If all the lights come on and the buzzer sounds, start

engine, engage separator and header drive switches and
run engine at fast idle. If lights continue to stay on,
disengage separator and header switches and idle
engine. Shut off engine, remove key, and see Low Shaft
Speed Troubleshooting in this section.

before working on combine.
The sensors are not adjustable. If combine is not

equipped with a straw chopper, be certain sensor leads
are connected to ground plugs to prevent a false alarm.
HX,9000MON,E -19-14DEC93
100-6 240397
PN=304
Monitors
LOW SHAFT SPEED MONITOR

TROUBLESHOOTING
A yellow light comes on and the buzzer sounds

whenever any of these five functions are running below
proper speed. The header drive switch must be on to
turn on this system.
When the buzzer sounds, check for:
Plugged straw chopper, straw walkers or augers, or a

broken belt. Then check for:
Broken or disconnected sensor wires.
Damaged sensor.
Loose sensor actuator on shaft collar.
If the light and buzzer still stay on after checking those

items, short both harness wires to ground. If the light
and buzzer then go out, replace that sensor.
If, after replacing the sensor the light and buzzer still
stay on, see your John Deere dealer.
H01,9000MON,F -19-11SEP92
100-7 240397
PN=305
Monitors
SENSOR LOCATIONS
-UN-25OCT90
H42734
A—Straw Chopper Sensor C—Tailings Elevator Sensor E—Conveyor Augers

B—Straw Walker Sensor D—Clean Grain Elevator
Sensor
H01,9000MON,G -19-05NOV90
100-8 240397
PN=306
Monitors
HARVESTRAK (GENERAL INFORMATION)
The HARVESTRAK Combine Monitor checks grain loss

by measuring a representative sample of losses over the
cleaning shoe and/or straw walkers. It provides a visual
-UN-14MAR89
indication of separator loss. A change in loss rate is
indicated by the control panel meter.
The solid state HARVESTRAK continuously monitors

combine performance to enable the operator to use
H39096
maximum combine capacity. When the operator has
adjusted his combine and header to an acceptable loss
level, the monitor can then be set to this level indicating
whether to increase or decrease ground speed.
The HARVESTRAK monitor can also be used to detect

plugged or closed straw walkers, sieves and chaffers.
-UN-21AUG91
A sudden move to the + side of the meter, when field
conditions are unchanged, can indicate that the straw
walkers, sieve or chaffer are plugged or closed. When
this happens, stop the combine and correct the problem.
H43795
The location and basic function of each system
component are:
COMPONENT LOCATION BASIC FUNCTION
Start switch Steering column Both switches must

and header and control be on to provide
drive switch. panel. electrical power
for the monitor.
Control panel Overhead console Contains operator

and meter. and on R.H. controls for
cab post. monitor. Provides a
visual indication
of separator loss
during operation.
Sensors. Two on rear of Detects impacts

cleaning shoe. from kernels and
Two on rear of transmits these as
two outside straw electrical impulses
walkers. to preamplifier.
Preamplifier On separator up- Receives low

Circuit Box. right R.H. side current electrical
about mid-way impulses from
back. sensing pads,
amplifies those
signals and sends
them to the
gauge.
HX,9000MON,H -19-24MAR97
100-9 240397
PN=307
Monitors
HOW THE MONITOR WORKS
-UN-25OCT90
H42735
A—Sensors (Four) B—Preamplifier C—Meter D—Control Panel
The four sensors (A) detect impacts from grain Adjustment for grain size lets the control panel allow
coming off the cleaning shoe and/or straw walkers for different impulses made by various kernel sizes.
and transmit these impacts as electrical impulses to
the preamplifier (B). The preamplifier eliminates or These various electrical impulses are averaged into a
“filters out” those signals from straw stems or chaff. signal that drives the meter. This signal is adjusted
by the meter zone adjustment knob. The signal then
The control panel (D) receives these impulses from drives the meter needle, which indicates loss rate.
the preamplifier and displays the loss selected
(cleaning shoe, straw walkers, or total loss) on meter
(C).
H01,9000MON,I -19-05NOV90
100-10 240397
PN=308
Monitors
OPERATING MONITOR
1. Adjust combine and header to an acceptable loss

level for the particular crop and condition. Ignore the
monitor at this time.
-19-06FEB89
2. Turn knob (A) for the closest grain size.
3. Turn knob (B) to read BOTH the walkers and the

shoe.
H37353
4. Operate combine at the acceptable loss level while
adjusting knob (C) to position meter needle (D) in center
of green zone. An increase or decrease in separator loss
will be indicated by the change in needle position.
5. If the needle moves to “-”, combine is not operating at

maximum productivity. Increase ground speed slightly to
-UN-21AUG91
bring meter needle into green zone.
6. If the needle moves to “+”, combine is either

incorrectly adjusted for an acceptable loss level or is
moving too fast a ground speed. Make combine and/or
H43796
header adjustments as necessary or reduce ground
speed to bring meter needle into green zone.
7. After reaching an acceptable combine performance

level, set monitor as described in step 4. Remember, an
incorrectly adjusted combine, traveling at a slow ground
speed, can make meter needle indicate an acceptable
loss rate (green zone). By correctly adjusting combine
-UN-14MAR89
and increasing ground speed, harvesting productivity can
be increased.
8. When crop conditions change during the day (straw

moisture, dew, etc.) knob (C) must be readjusted. Do not
H39753
“set and forget” this knob. Make an occasional loss
check to determine if readjustment is necessary.
9. It takes 15-20 seconds for a slug to pass through the

combine. When this occurs, the meter needle will move
slightly toward “+” and will then return to its previous
reading after slug has passed through. Ignore these
fluctuations.
H01,9000MON,J -19-09OCT91
100-11 240397
PN=309
Monitors
OPERATIONAL CHECKS
NOTE: Two persons are required to perform the

operational checks. One person must remain
seated in the drivers seat while the other person
-UN-21AUG91
taps on the sensor.
1. Turn key switch to the on position, but do not start

engine.
H43796
2. Turn on header drive switch.
3. Turn knob (A) to the small grain position.
4. Turn knob (B) to the cleaning shoe symbol.
5. Turn knob (C) to the “+”.
-UN-11OCT88
6. Tap rapidly on the left-hand cleaning shoe sensor with
a hard object. Tell another person to watch meter needle
(D). Needle must move into green scale. The sensor
does not have to be struck hard.
H39177
7. Repeat step 6 for right-hand cleaning shoe sensor.
8. Turn knob (B) to straw walker symbol. Check both

straw walker sensors in the same way used for cleaning
shoe.
9. Turn light switch to 4th position (field lights). Check to

see that the light for meter (D) is lit.
-UN-14MAR89
10. Turn off key switch and header.
11. If HARVESTRAK Monitor system does not work after

these checks, see your John Deere dealer.
H39753
H01,9000MON,K -19-11SEP92
100-12 240397
PN=310
Hydraulic System
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (GENERAL INFORMATION)
The combine hydraulic system is an open center There are three pumps supplying oil to the
system. In an open center system the pump runs steering/engine gearcase system, hydraulic system
continuously, even when system components are not and the reel/belt pickup system. The hydrostatic
activated (system is in neutral). When the system is system uses it’s own charge pump to supply oil to
in neutral, oil flows through the system and back to the hydrostatic unit.
N
the reservoir - the “open center” feature.
CAUTION: It is normal for the system to
There are two reservoirs in the hydraulic system; the allow a raised feeder house (with or without
hydraulic/hydrostatic reservoir and the steering/engine a header) to slowly lower to the ground
gearcase reservoir. The hydraulic/hydrostatic reservoir after a long period of time. Always lower
supplies oil for the hydraulic, reel/belt pickup and the safety stop when the combine is
hydrostatic systems. The steering/engine gearcase unattended. If the feeder house should
reservoir supplies oil for the steering, separator lower itself to the ground in less than 12
engage wet clutch, gearcase lubrication and hours (approximate), see your John Deere
unloading auger engage systems. dealer.
There are two oil coolers; one each for the reservoirs. IMPORTANT: The components in this system are
Oil cooler bypass valves provide quick warmup of the built to very close tolerances and
oil in cold weather. have been adjusted at the factory.
Do not attempt to service these
There are three oil filters providing filtration for the components except to maintain
hydrostatic system, the steering/engine gearcase proper oil level and to change oil
system and the combined return oil from the hydraulic and filter. See your John Deere
and reel/belt pickup systems. dealer for all other service.
H01,9000HYD,A -19-20MAR90
105-1 240397
PN=311
Hydraulic System
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CLEANLINESS
N CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can

penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
-UN-23AUG88
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten
all connections before applying pressure.
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard.
Protect hands and body from high pressure
fluids.
X9811
If an accident occurs, see a doctor
immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin
must be surgically removed within a few hours
or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
with this type of injury may call the Deere &
Company Medical Department in Moline,
Illinois, or other knowledgeable medical
source.
CLEANLINESS
If the hydraulic system should be disconnected for

service, protect the ends of hoses, tubing and ports of
components from contamination with clean, lint-free
towels or clean plastic bags.
Before installing any replacement hose, flush the inside

with unused diesel fuel or unused commercial petroleum
cleaning solvent for ten seconds minimum. Do not use
water, water soluble cleaners or compressed air.
H01,9000HYD,B -19-14MAR97
LEFT-HAND HOSE STORAGE

-UN-12JUL89
H40934
H01,9000HYD,D -19-20MAR90
105-2 240397
PN=312
Hydraulic System
RIGHT-HAND HOSE STORAGE
IMPORTANT: Reel hoses must be connected together

in storage position. Relief valve will
operate and cause overheating and
-UN-25OCT90
damage if hoses are not connected.
H42736
HX,9000HYD,E -19-13DEC93
ADJUSTING HEADER DROP RATE
Loosen nut and turn screw (A) out for faster drop, in for
slower drop.
Tighten nut after adjustment.
On combines with DIAL-A-MATIC, adjust drop rate (A)

as described, open accumulator two turns and adjust
screw (B) as needed.
-UN-21AUG91
H43797
H01,9000HYD,F -19-09OCT91
ACCUMULATOR (GENERAL INFORMATION)
The accumulator system is connected to the header lift

system between the lift cylinders and solenoid control
valve. It suspends the header over uneven ground by
compressing nitrogen gas with a piston in the
accumulator tank.
-UN-21AUG91
H43798
H01,9000HYD,G -19-09OCT91
105-3 240397
PN=313
Hydraulic System
ONE GALLON ACCUMULATOR SYSTEM

(OPTIONAL)
The one gallon accumulator system, with an in-cab

gauge, works as protection for any header which may
receive ground contact. It can aid in floating a rigid
platform with skid plates.
See your John Deere dealer for parts.
-UN-22NOV93
H46111
HX,9000HYD,H -19-13DEC93
ACCUMULATOR PRECHARGE
The accumulator precharge should be matched to the

specific header and feeder house lift cylinders on a
combine. When changing heads during a harvest
season, there is no need to change the pre charge. If
operating with different heads, the precharge should be
set for the one with the lowest precharge.
NOTE: See the following chart to determine if the

precharging needs to be changed.The factory
-UN-23AUG91
precharge setting is 1200 psi.
To adjust accumulator precharge, see your John Deere

dealer.
H43875
H01,9000HYD,M -19-24MAR97
105-4 240397
PN=314
Hydraulic System
ACCUMULATOR PRECHARGE
Recommended Accumulator Precharge kPa (psi)
9500 and
9600 Combines 9600 Combines
With Ring and Pinion With Planetary
Header Model 9400 Combines Final Drives Final Drives
912 BPU 5653 (820) 4378 (635) 3516 (510)
913 5929 (860) 4654 (675) 3723 (540)
914 BPU 6308 (915) 4895 (710) 3930 (570)
915 6653 (965) 5171 (750) 4137 (600)
918 7653 (1110) 5929 (860) 4757 (690)
920 8274 (1200) 6446 (935) 5171 (750)
922 8963 (1300) 6963 (1010) 5584 (810)
925 9928 (1440) 7756 (1125) 6205 (900)
493 7300 (1059) 5689 (825) *
930 * 9032 (1310) 7239 (1050)
444 7653 (1110) 5964 (865) *
494 7653 (1110) 5964 (865) *
592 7653 (1110) 5964 (865) *
594 8298 (1204) 6446 (935) 5170 (750)
643 8963 (1300) 6963 (1010) 5584 (810)
692 8963 (1300) 6963 (1010) 5584 (810)
693 8963 (1300) 6963 (1010) 5584 (810)
644 10928 (1585) 8515 (1235) 6826 (990)
694 10928 (1585) 8515 (1235) 6826 (990)
645 11032 (1600) 8618 (1250) 6895 (1000)
843 * 9963 (1445) 7963 (1155)
890 * 9550 (1385) 7633 (1107)
892 * 9767 (1417) 7807 (1132)
893 * 9963 (1445) 7963 (1155)
844 * 10825 (1570) 8653 (1255)
894 * 10825 (1570) 8653 (1255)
1092 * 11476 (1664) 9188 (1333)
1290 * * 9880 (1433)
1291 * * 10595 (1537)
1243 * * 11032 (1600)
1293 * * 11032 (1600)
454 9894 (1435) 7722 (1120) *
653 11583 (1680) 9032 (1310) 7239 (1050)
654 12307 (1785) 9584 (1390) 7653 (1110)
655 13272 (1925) 10342 (1500) 8274 (1200)
853 * 11204 (1625) 8963 (1300)
* = Not Recommended
HX,9000HYD,N -19-24MAR97
105-5 240397
PN=315
Hydraulic System
HEADER FLOTATION GAUGE
Lower header to 150 mm (6 in.) above ground. Rotate

plastic cover (A) on gauge so right-hand pointer (B) on
cover aligns with gauge. Lower header more until
-UN-11OCT88
pressure is reduced 50 to 150 psi on gauge to determine
correct operating range for a given field condition.
For soft ground conditions, use a minimum of “down

suspension” or a very light pressure on ground. This will
H39636
give maximum header suspension with least amount of
force. Header will not move below this position or drop
down into hollows.
H01,9000HYD,I -19-24MAR97
ACCUMULATOR ADJUSTMENT
A full open accumulator valve position is generally

needed for headers that require protection when floating
on the ground.
The first valve position for headers that do not require

ground float protection is one turn open. If lift shock is
still too much, the valve is further opened in half turns to
the point that lift shock and response are satisfactory.
-UN-21AUG91
Refer to the decal on the combine for more information.
H43798
H01,9000HYD,J -19-24MAR97
REEL/BELT PICKUP PUMP BELT

ADJUSTMENT
This belt also drives the header.

-UN-01OCT90
H42398
HX,9000HYD,K -19-13DEC93
105-6 240397
PN=316
Hydraulic System
HEADER/REEL/BELT PICKUP PUMP BELT

REPLACEMENT
IMPORTANT: It is not necessary to disconnect any

hydraulic hoses to replace this belt.
Remove shields.
Loosen idler (A).
Remove bolt (B).
Disconnect electric clutch connector (C).
Remove belt (D). Install new belt in reverse and check

feeder house sheave gap.
-UN-21AUG91
H43800
H01,9000HYD,L -19-09OCT91
105-7 240397
PN=317
Ground Drive and Rear Axle Service
SERVICE TIRES SAFELY
Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause

serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the

proper equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate

the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension

hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
-UN-23AUG88
rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
TS211
DX,RIM -19-24AUG90
110-1 240397
PN=318
CARE AND SERVICE OF TIRES
Check tires daily for damage or noticeably low pressure.
At least every 100 hours of operation, check tire

pressure. If tires contain liquid ballast, use a special
air-water gauge and measure with valve stem at bottom.
A small puncture in a tubeless tire can be temporarily

repaired without dismounting the tire, thus avoiding down
time during a busy season.
Protect tires from exposure to sunlight, petroleum

products, and chemicals.
Drive carefully. Try to avoid rocks and sharp objects.
IMPORTANT: A permanent repair should be made as

soon as possible to prevent further tire
damage.
INFLATION PRESSURE
Ply
Tire Size Rating Air Pressure
Drive Tires kPa PSI
18.4R38 (Radial) one star 165 (24)

18.4R42 (Radial) two stars 205 (30)
20.8R-38 (Radial) one star 165 (24)
20.8R-42 (Radial) two stars 205 (30)
20.8-38 12 250 (36)
24.5-32 10 180 (26)
24.5-32 12 220 (32)
30.5L-32 10 140 (24)
30.5L-32 12 180 (26)
30.5L-32 14 195 (28)
30.5L-32 16 235 (34)
35.5L-32 12 180 (26)
68 x 50-32 16 103 (15)
Steering Tires
11.00-24 8 275 (40)

14.9-24 6 180 (26)
16.9-26 10 250 (36)
18.4-26 6 140 (20)
18.4-30 6 140 (20)
28L-26 10,12 103 (15)
Steering Tires
(France Only)
18.4 x 26 10 235 (34)
HX,9000DRA,C -19-24MAR97
110-2 240397
PN=319
USING LIQUID WEIGHT
N CAUTION: Installing liquid weight (ballast)

requires special equipment and training. Have
the job done by your John Deere dealer or a
-UN-11OCT88
tire service store.
IMPORTANT: Cover rim completely with solution to

avoid corrosion, but NEVER fill any tire
more than 90 per cent full. More
H39183
solution would leave too little air space
to absorb shocks. Damage to tire could
occur.
A solution of water and calcium chloride provides safe,

economical ballast. Used properly, it will not damage
tires, tubes or rims.
Use calcium chloride to prevent water from freezing. A

mixture of 1.6 kg (3-1/2 lb.) of calcium chloride per 0.4
kg/L (1 gal.) will not freeze solid above -45˚C (-50˚F).
NOTE: Use of alcohol as liquid ballast is not

recommended. Calcium chloride solution is
heavier and more economical.
Fill tubeless tires at least to valve level (minimum 75 per

cent full). Less solution would expose part of rim,
possibly causing corrosion. Tube-type tires may be filled
to any level below 90 per cent.
H01,9000DRA,B -19-20MAR90
TIRE LOADING DECAL
This decal (A) (located on the cab ladder) contains

important information concerning tire loading.
-UN-05JUN89
H41017
H01,9000DRA,C -19-20MAR90
110-3 240397
PN=320
ALLOWABLE CARRYING CAPACITY OF TIRES (9400 COMBINE)
The load carrying capacity of drive tires should not be 30.5-32 in., 10 PR cleat (R-1)
exceeded. The largest headers that can be used are 30.5-32., 10 PR can/rice (R-2)
listed for each tire size.
For header sizes up to and including 6-Row Wide
For header sizes up to and including 4-Row Wide Row-Crop Head, 6-Row Wide Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt
Row-Crop Head,6-Row Narrow Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt Pickup, 25 ft. Flexible and 25 ft. Rigid Platforms.
Pickup, 18 ft. Flexible and 25 ft. Rigid Platforms. Draper Platform not recommended.
Draper Platform not recommended:
24.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1)
24.5-32 in., 10 PR cleat (R-1) 24.5-32 in., 12 PR low profile (R-3)
30.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1)
For header sizes up to and including 6-Row Narrow 30.5-32 in., 12 PR cane/rice (R-2)
Row-Crop Head, 6-Row Wide Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt 30.5-32 in., 12 PR low profile (R-3)
Pickup, 25 ft. Flexible and 25 ft. Rigid Platforms.
Draper Platform not recommended:
HX,9000DRA,D -19-24MAR97
The load carrying capacity of drive tires should not be 24.5-32 in., 12 PR low profile (R-3)
exceeded. The largest headers that can be used are
listed for each tire size. For header sizes up to and including 8-Row Narrow
Row-Crop Head, 8-Row Wide Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt
For header sizes up to and including 4-Row Wide Pickup, 30 ft. Flexible and 30 ft. Rigid Platforms.
Row-Crop Head, 6-Row Narrow Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt
Pickup, 18 ft. Flexible and 25 ft. Rigid Platforms. 30.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1)
30.5-32 in., 12 PR cane/rice (R-2)
30.5-32 in., 10 PR cleat (R-1) 30.5-32 in, 12 PR low profile (R-3)
30.5-32 in., 10 PR cane/rice (R-2) 18.4R-38 in., one star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
duals
For header sizes up to and including 6-Row Wide 20.8R-38., one star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
Row-Crop Head, 8-Row Narrow Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt duals.
Pickup, 25 ft. Flexible and 30 ft. Rigid Platforms. 20.8R-38., one star cane/rice (R-2) radial, wide
spaced duals.
24.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1) 68 x 50-32 16 PR HF3 Flotation Tire
H01,9000DRA,E -19-24MAR97
110-4 240397
PN=321
The load carrying capacity of drive tires should not be 30.5-32 in., 14 PR cleat (R-1)
exceeded. The largest headers that can be used are 18.4R-38 in., one star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
listed below with each tire size. duals
20.8-38 in., one star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
For header sizes up to and including 6-Row Narrow duals
Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt Pickup, 15 ft. Flexible and 22 ft. 20.8-38 in., one star cane/rice (R-2) radial, wide
Rigid Platforms. No Row-Crop heads are spaced duals
recommended. 68 x 50-32 16 PR HF3 Flotation Tire
24.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1) For header sizes up to and including 8-Row Narrow
24.5-32 in., 12 PR low profile (R-3) Row-Crop Head, 12 Row Narrow Cornhead, 14 ft.
Belt Pickup, 30 ft. Flexible and 30 ft. Rigid Platforms.
For header sizes up to and including 6-Row Wide
Row-Crop Head, 8-Row Narrow Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt 30.5-32 in., 16 PR cleat (R-1)
Pickup, 25 ft. Flexible and 30 ft. Rigid Platforms. 35.5-32 in., 12 PR cane/rice (R-2)
18.4R-42 in., two star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
30.5-32 in., 12 PR cleat (R-1) duals
30.5-32 in., 12 PR cane/rice (R-2) 20.8-42 in. two star cleat (R-1) radial, wide spaced
30.5-32 in., 12 PR low profile (R-3) duals
68 x 50-32 16PR HF3 Flotation Tire
For header sizes up to and including 8-Row Narrow
Row-Crop Head, 8-Row Wide Cornhead, 14 ft. Belt
Pickup, 30 ft. Flexible and 30 ft. Rigid Platforms.
H01,9000DRA,F -19-24MAR97
TRANSPORTING
Under certain conditions the drive tires may develop a

hopping or loping action at transport speeds. Speeding
up or slowing down eliminates the problem.
H01,9000DRA,G -19-20MAR90
110-5 240397
PN=322
DRIVE WHEEL STARTER STUD
If a wheel is removed, thread rim starter stud into axle,

then install wheel.
-UN-11OCT88
NOTE: Wheel bolts are M20 x 1.5.
H39318
H01,9000DRA,H -19-17FEB97
REAR WHEEL BOLT TORQUE
Each time a rear wheel is removed, torque wheel bolts

to 200 N·m (150 lb-ft). Then, retorque wheel bolts after
one hour of operation.
-UN-11OCT88
NOTE: Mount rear tires with the offset “in” and valve
stems to the outside.
H39184
H01,9000DRA,I -19-24MAR97
DRIVE WHEEL BOLT TORQUE
IMPORTANT: Wheel bolts must be clean and free of

lube before installing. Torque value is
for clean, dry bolt. Lubricating reduces
-UN-11OCT88
friction and overloads the bolts.
1. Each time a drive wheel is removed, torque wheel

bolts to 200 N·m (150 lb-ft) without using a torque
multiplier. Tighten bolts in a criss/cross pattern.
H39319
2. Use a 4 to 1 torque multiplier and turn bolt head 1/4
turn (ratchet or torque wrench will make a full turn). Pull
multiplier handle against inside of wheel when tightening.
A—Wheel Bolt
NOTE: If the combine is equipped with 100 mm (4 in.) B—30 mm Socket (3/4 In. Drive)
wheel spacers, turn each bolt head 1/2 turn C—4 to 1 Multiplier (1000 lb-ft capacity) (1/2 In.
Input Drive,
(ratchet or torque wrench will make two full turns. 3/4 In. Output Drive)
D—1/2 In. Drive x 18 In. Long Extension
E—Torque Wrench
F—Wheel
H01,9000DRA,J -19-24MAR97
110-6 240397
PN=323
DUAL WHEELS BOLT TORQUE
IMPORTANT: Wheel bolts must be clean and free of

lube before installing. Torque value is
for clean, dry bolt. Lubricating reduces
-UN-11OCT88
friction and overloads the bolts.
1. Each time a dual wheel is removed, torque wheel

bolts to 200 N·m (150 lb-ft) without using a torque
multiplier. Tighten bolts in a criss/cross pattern.
H39685
2. Use a 4 to 1 torque multiplier and turn bolt head 1/4
turn (ratchet or torque wrench will make a full turn). Pull
multiplier handle against inside of wheel when tightening.
A—Wheel Bolt
B—Bolt Spacer
C—30 mm Socket (3/4 In. Drive)
D—3/4 In. x 16 In. Extension
E—4 to 1 Multiplier
F—1/2 In. x 10 In. Extension
G—Torque Wrench
H—Outside Dual Wheel
H01,9000DRA,K -19-24MAR97
110-7 240397
PN=324
DRIVE TIRE SPACING (9400 AND 9500

COMBINES)
Wheels Wheels Wheels Wheels Wheels Wheels Wheels
Dished Dished Dished Dished Dished Dished Dished
Out with In with Out with In with Out with In with Out with
100 mm 300 mm 300 mm 400 mm 400 mm 454 mm 454 mm
(4 in.) (12 in.) (12 in.) (16 in.) (16 in.) (18 in.) (18 in.)
Tire Wheels Wheels Wheel Axle Axle Axle Axle Axle Axle
Size Dished Out Dished In Spacers Spacers Spacers Spacers Spacers Spacers Spacers
18.4-38* 4584 mm 3060 mm NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
(Duals) (180 in.) (120 in.)
24.5-32 3048 mm 2958 mm NR NR 3648 NR NR 3866 mm 3956 mm

(120 in.) (116 in.) (144 in.) (152 in.) (156 in.)
30.5L-32 3156 mm 3060 mm** 3356 mm NR NR 3650 mm 3956 mm NR NR

(124 in.) (120 in.) (132 in.) (144 in.) (156 in.)
68 X 50-32 NR NR NR NR 3690 mm NR MR NR NR
(145 in.)
*Furnished with 400 mm (16 in.) axle spacers. Not

available on 9400 Combines.
**With 100 mm (4-in.) wheel spacer.
NR= Not Recommended.
HX,9000DRA,L -19-30JAN95
110-8 240397
PN=325
DRIVE TIRE SPACING (9600 COMBINES

WITH PLANETARY FINAL DRIVES)
Wheels Dished Wheels Dished Wheels Dished Wheels Dished Wheels Dished
Out w/300 mm In w/300 mm In w/400 mm Out w/400 mm Out w/165 mm
Wheels Wheels (12 in.) (12 in.) (16 in.) (16 in.) (6-1/2 in.)
Tire Size Dished Out Dished In Axle Spacers Axle Spacers Axle Spacers Axle Spacers Axle Spacers
18.4-42* 4592 mm 3068 mm NR NR NR NR NR
(Duals) (181 in.) (121 in.)
30.5L-32 3679 mm 3291 mm NR 3891 mm 4091 mm NR NR

(145 in.) (130 in.) (153 in.) (161 in.)
35.5L-32 3679 mm NR NR 3891 mm 4091 mm NR NR

(145 in.) (153 in.) (161 in.)
20.8-42* 4592 mm 3068 mm NR NR NR NR NR

(Duals) (181 in.) (121 in.)
68 x 50-32 NR NR NR NR NR NR 3899 mm
(154 in.)
NOTE: If combine is equipped with 762 mm (30 in.)

crawler tracks, spacing will be 3507 mm (138
in.).
H01,9000DRA,M -19-12SEP94
110-9 240397
PN=326
DRIVE TIRE SPACING (9600 COMBINES

WITH RING AND PINION FINAL DRIVES)
Wheels Dished Wheels Dished
Out With In With
Wheels Wheels 165 mm (6 in.) 165 mm (6 in.)
Tire Size Dished Out Dished In Axle Spacers Axle Spacers
18.4-38* 4552 mm 3028 mm - -
(Duals) (180 in.) (120 in.)
24.5-32 3647 mm 3237 mm NR NR

(144 in.) (127 in.) (153 in.)
35.5L-32 3595 mm 3289 mm 3925 mm NR

(142 in.) (130 in.) (155 in.)
20.8-38* 4552 mm 3028 mm NR NR

(Duals) (180 in.) (120 in.)
68 x 50-32 NR NR 3859 mm NR
(152 in.)
*Furnished with 165 mm (6 in.) axle spacers.
NR=Not Recommended
H01,9000DRA,AK -19-12SEP94
110-10 240397
PN=327
CRAWLER TRACKS (SWECO BRAND) (9600

COMBINES WITH PLANETARY FINAL
DRIVES)
A new track assembly is very stiff. To loosen it properly,
-UN-11OCT88
run combine backward and forward several times. After
tracks have loosened, check track tension.
To help prevent mud from hardening overnight, leave

combine sitting in water or run back and forth a number
H39320
of times after it has reached dry ground.
NOTE: Tracks must be lubricated every 10 hours when

operating in mud and water.
The proper adjustment of tracks is important when

operating under heavy mud conditions. If tracks are
adjusted properly for operation on hard ground, they may
be too tight in muddy or underwater sections of the field.
Maintain 38 mm (1-1/2 in.) slack in track measured at a

point half-way between center of drive sprocket and rear
idler. This is with all other slack removed from tracks.
Adjust front idler for track tension with two adjusting bolts
(A). Be certain to adjust bolts (A) equally so not to twist
track.
H01,9000DRA,P -19-20MAR90
AXLE SPACERS AND WHEEL SPACERS

(OPTIONAL)
Various sizes of axle and wheel spacers are available

from your John Deere dealer to properly center the drive
-UN-11OCT88
tires between crop rows. H39759
H01,9000DRA,R -19-20MAR90
110-11 240397
PN=328
DUAL WHEELS (OPTIONAL)(9500 AND 9600

COMBINES)
For added flotation or for 30 in. row spacing, 18.4-38,

18.4-42, 20.8-38 and 20.8-42 dual wheels with axle
-UN-11OCT88
spacers are available from your John Deere dealer. A
ladder landing extension and different handrails are also
required.
H39765
HX,9000DRA,S -19-12SEP94
SINGLE ATTACH WIDE SPACED DUAL

WHEELS (OPTIONAL)
A center attaching ring (A), allows each wheel to be

singularly attached to the combine.
The attaching ring lets you install or remove your outer

wheels without removing the inner drive wheels. This
-UN-19AUG96
makes it easier to prepare the combine for loading or
unloading from a trailer, or when a narrow transport
width is needed.
H48058
HX,9000DRA,B -19-17SEP96
HIGH FLOTATION TIRES
A high flotation 68 x 50-32 drive tire and a 28L-26

steering wheel tire are available from your John Deere
dealer to provide mobility, traction, and flotation to move
fully loaded grain tanks and large headers over soft, wet,
or muddy ground.
-UN-02SEP94
H46226
HX,9000DRA,AM -19-30JAN96
110-12 240397
PN=329
RUBBER BELTED TRACKS (OPTIONAL)
Offer improved stability and mobility on slopes, easy

steering and decreased footprint load compared to tire.
The tracks use a air bladder suspension system and
pivoting bogey wheels. The tracks are available from
-UN-14DEC94
H46255
HX,CTSDRA,B -19-21DEC94
HYDRO LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
If combine “creeps” with hydrostatic drive control lever in

neutral, then adjust as follows:
N CAUTION: Control cable is designed and

assembled to be non-repairable. Do not
attempt to modify or repair cable; replace if
damaged.
Do not adjust or install control cable with the
-UN-25OCT90
engine running, machine may move. Shut off
engine and remove key.
Place hydrostatic drive control lever in neutral. Remove

balljoint (A) from pump arm (B) (be certain pump arm is
H42376
in neutral [spring loaded detent]). Turn balljoint off or on
rod until balljoint stud will pass freely into arm hole. Do
not move arm from its neutral position.
If adjustment at the ball joint (fine thread end) is not

adequate, more adjustment (coarse thread end) is
available using the cable bulkhead jam nuts (C). Be
certain adequate thread remains in the ball joint and all
hardware is tightened.
If creeping still occurs, see your John Deere dealer.
H01,9000DRA,T -19-24MAR97
110-13 240397
PN=330
CLEANING HYDROSTATIC OIL COOLER
Release latch (A) and pull out rotary screen door (B).
-UN-16JUL92
Pull out oil cooler and condenser to clean.
Clean out lower vacuum duct after cleaning. Keep fins

on cooler straight.
H44928
HX,9000DRA,U -19-13DEC93
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
Check fluid through cap (A). Be careful to keep dirt out

of system.
-UN-11OCT88
Fluid should be 6 mm (1/4 in.) from top.
Use SAE J1703d or DOT-3 hydraulic brake fluid.
Keep fluid off painted surfaces.
H39414
H01,9000DRA,V -19-20MAR90
BRAKE SYSTEM
If you experience soft or spongy brakes, a loss of

braking power or the park brake will not hold, see your
John Deere dealer.
H01,9000DRA,X -19-09OCT91
110-14 240397
PN=331
ADJUSTING GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
If the gearshift lever is hard to shift, it does not

necessarily mean that the cable needs adjustment.
-UN-25OCT90
Hard shifting can be caused by:
A damaged, dirty, rusty or pinched shift cable. For these

problems, inspect, clean, adjust or replace the cable.
H42382
Internal transmission problems. If you suspect a
transmission problem, see your John Deere dealer.
To adjust the linkage, shift transmission into second

gear. The gearshift lever should be leaning slightly
forward when in second gear.
From under cab, loosen nut (A) and adjust balljoint (B)
-UN-11OCT88
to get 237 mm (9-5/16 in.) (C).
Do not adjust clamp (D).
At the transmission, shift arm (E) should be straight
H39322
down as shown. Loosen nut (F) and adjust balljoint (G)
until the stud on the balljoint aligns with the hole in shift
arm (E). Shield Removed for Clarity
Check for 237 mm (9-5/16 in.) at (H).
Do not adjust clamp (I).
H01,9000DRA,AB -19-05NOV90
110-15 240397
PN=332
REAR AXLE ADJUSTMENT
The axle is adjustable to let the rear tires track the drive
tires.
-UN-11OCT88
CAUTION: When changing axle widths, the rear
frame of combine must be raised and blocked
properly.
Jack up one end of the axle (A). Remove bolts (B), (C),
H39191
cylinder bolts (D) and tie rod bolts (E).
Loosen power steering hose clamps (F) to adjust hoses.

Extra hose must be stored in axle frame. Tighten clamps
after moving hoses.
If combine is equipped with 4-wheel drive, loosen hose

clamp (G) and hose tie strap (H). Pull enough hose
-UN-11OCT88
through clamp to be able to reposition axle. Tighten
clamp and tie strap after moving axle.
Refer to the chart and position axle to correct width. Tie

rod holes will go in or out the same amount of holes and
H39192
align correctly.
A drift may be needed to align axle holes and start

upper bolts (C). Place bolts (B), (C), (D) and (E) back in
correct holes.
Torque cap screws (B), (C) and (D) to 620 N·m (460
lb-ft).
Repeat steps on other side.
-UN-18MAY89
Retorque first side to 620 N·m (460 lb-ft), then retorque
second side to 620 N·m (460 lb-ft).
IMPORTANT: This sequence must be followed
H40963
because of “relaxing” of the bolts.
H01,9000DRA,AD -19-09OCT91
110-16 240397
PN=333
ALL COMBINES EXCEPT THOSE EQUIPPED WITH 35.5L-32 DRIVE TIRES, DUALS OR
TRACKS
-UN-14MAR89
H39637
AXLE POSITION AND
WHEEL SPACING FROM 11.00-24 14.9-24 16.9-26 18.4-26
CENTER OF TIRES Steering Tires Steering Tires Steering Tires Steering Tires
A 2904 mm (114 in.) 2963 mm (117 in.) 2912 mm (115 in.) 3087 mm (122 in.)*
B 3107 mm (122 in.) 3166 mm (125 in.) 3115 mm (123 in.) 3290 mm (130 in.)
C 3310 mm (130 in.) 3369 mm (133 in.) 3318 mm (131 in.) 3493 mm (138 in.)
D 3514 mm (138 in.) 3573 mm (141 in.) 3522 mm (139 in.) 3697 mm (146 in.)
E 3717 mm (146 in.) 3776 mm (149 in.) 3725 mm (147 in.) 3900 mm (154 in.)
*Not Recommended for 9600 Combines (see Steering Cylinder Mounting Bolts (black triangles).
following page).
NOTE: The steering cylinder anchors may move
Clamp Bolts (black squares). slightly if the combine is turned to full left or
right while on cement.
HX,9000DRA,AG -19-24MAR97
110-17 240397
PN=334
COMBINES EQUIPPED WITH 35.5L-32 TIRES, 18.4, 28L-26 DUALS OR TRACKS
-UN-14MAR89
H39486
AXLE POSITION REAR TIRE SIZES
AND WHEEL SPACING
FROM CENTER 18.4-26
OF TIRES 11.00-24 14.9-24 18.4-30 28L x 26
A 2904 mm (114 in.) 2963 mm (117 in.) 3087 mm* (122 in.) NR
B 3107 mm (122 in.) 3166 mm (125 in.) 3290 mm (130 in.) 3520 mm (139 in.)
C 3310 mm (130 in.) 3369 mm (133 in.) 3493 mm (138 in.) 3723 mm (147 in.)
D 3514 mm (138 in.) 3573 mm (141 in.) 3697 mm (146 in.) 3927 mm (155 in.)
E 3717 mm (146 in.) 3776 mm (149 in.) 3900 mm (154 in.) 4130 mm (163 in.)
*Use with 9600 Combines with 18.4 Duals and NR=Not Recommended
Four-Wheel Drive.
NOTE: The steering cylinder anchors may move
Clamp Bolts (black squares). slightly if the combine is turned to full left or
right while on cement.
Steering Cylinder Mounting Bolts (black triangles).
HX,9000DRA,AH -19-14JAN97
110-18 240397
PN=335
PULLING COMBINE OUT OF THE MUD
N CAUTION: Always use a suitable chain. Do not

exceed the breaking strength. Do not mix
chain with tow straps or ropes. Energy stored
-UN-11OCT88
in the towing device could cause serious
bodily injury if it should break.
Secure a chain to hook (A) to pull out the combine. Do

not use this hook for pulling a trailer.
H39193
-UN-19OCT95
H47135
HX,9000DRA,AE -19-25OCT95
JACKING LOCATIONS
N CAUTION: Always empty grain tank before

jacking up the combine.
-UN-26JUN89
-UN-26JUN89
Do not jack combine at any other location than those
with a jack pocket.
H39323
H39324
H01,9000DRA,AF -19-11SEP92
110-19 240397
PN=336
BALLAST REQUIREMENTS (NORMAL CONDITIONS)
-19-21MAR97
H48251
HX,9000DRA,AI -19-24MAR97
110-20 240397
PN=337
BALLAST REQUIREMENTS (EXTREMELY HILLY CONDITIONS)
-19-21MAR97
H48252
HX,9000DRA,AJ -19-24MAR97
110-21 240397
PN=338
Air Conditioning and Heater Service
OBSERVE AIR CONDITIONING
PRECAUTIONS
N CAUTION: Refrigerant (R134A) under pressure.

Improper servicing may cause refrigerant to
penetrate eyes and skin or cause burns.
-UN-20JUL92
Special equipment and procedures are required to
service air conditioning system. (See your John Deere
dealer.)
H44933
H01,9000ACH,A -19-11SEP92
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (GENERAL

INFORMATION)
Air is drawn into the cab through holes (A). This air
flows down air duct (B) and into the pressurizer fan (C).
The air is then pushed through the pre-cleaner (D)
where the majority of dirt and a small amount of air is
discharged out through the cab floor. Be certain this
opening is open.
This cleaned air then passes through fresh air filter (E)
into the evaporator compartment. The air is now mixed
with air from inside the cab, being drawn into the
evaporator compartment through the recirculating filter
(F) . It then passes through the evaporator and heater
core.
Treated air (heated or cooled) is now drawn into the

recirculator blower (G) and discharged into the cab
through ducts. (H).
-UN-11OCT88
H39194
HX,9000ACH,B -19-13DEC93
115-1 240397
PN=339
REMOVING FRESH AIR FILTER AND TRAY
Loosen knob (A), remove cover, lift out and dump dirt
tray (B) attached to cover.
Remove wing nut (C) and pull out and clean filter (D).
Secure cover with knob.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten knob (A).
In dusty conditions, check every day. Normal service is

50 hours.
-UN-11OCT88
H39325
H01,9000ACH,C -19-20MAR90
CLEANING PRECLEANER
Whenever the fresh air filter is serviced, clean the

precleaner as follows:
-UN-11OCT88
Remove fresh air filter and tray. Push down on
precleaner (A) and pull it out from the top (B). Hole in
floor under precleaner must be kept open.
Wash and dry precleaner and reinstall. Be certain to
H39770
service fresh air filter and tray.
HX,9000ACH,D -19-13DEC93
REMOVING RECIRCULATING FILTER
Lift out tray. Reach in opening pull filter out.
In dusty conditions, check this filter daily. Normal

-UN-11OCT88
recommended service is 200 hours.
When replacing filter, it should drop easily into place. Do

not force it. Be certain filter is installed as shown on the
filter.
H39387
H01,9000ACH,E -19-24MAR97
115-2 240397
PN=340
CLEANING FRESH AIR AND RECIRCULATING FILTERS
Clean filter by one of the following methods: Rinse until clean with water from hose. Do not use a
high pressure washer.
Tap gently on flat surface, dirty side down. Do not
tap on a tire. Shake extra water from filter and allow element to
dry. Do not use compressed air to dry filter. It may
Blow compressed air through filter in opposite rupture it.
direction of arrows on filter.
Soak 15 minutes in warm (not hot) water with

R36757 John Deere Dry Filter Element Cleaner or its
equal (non-sudsing detergent).
H01,9000ACH,F -19-24MAR97
REMOVING EVAPORATOR FILTER
Clean this filter only if other service does not provide

enough cooling. The evaporator filter can be inspected
from outside the cab after removing the fresh air filter. If
it looks clean, do not remove and clean it.
Remove five screws (A) in seat console.
Remove six screws (B) and evaporator cover.
Remove evaporator filter (C).
Clean as you would the other filters.
-UN-11OCT88
H39488
H01,9000ACH,G -19-09OCT91
115-3 240397
PN=341
CLEANING CAB ROOF INLET PANEL
Clean this panel only when it looks plugged.
Remove six screws (A) and remove panel (B). Air is
-UN-11OCT88
brought in through the left-hand side panel only. The
right-hand side panel does not provide cab air.
Clean with compressed air or water.
H39755
H01,9000ACH,H -19-20MAR90
CLEANING CONDENSER
Release latch (A) and pull out rotary screen door (B).
-UN-16JUL92
Pull out condenser and oil cooler (C) to clean.
Clean out lower vacuum duct. Keep fins on condenser

straight. After cleaning, close and latch rotary screen
H44928
door.
-UN-25OCT90
H42742
HX,9000ACH,I -19-13DEC93
115-4 240397
PN=342
REMOVING COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
Loosen locking nut (A) and adjusting nut and remove
-UN-02SEP92
belt.
H44935
H01,9000ACH,J -19-11SEP92
CHECKING REFRIGERANT LEVEL
Check refrigerant level every 200 hours. With controls

set at maximum cold and engine at high idle, check sight
glass (A).
-UN-03AUG92
It is normal to see bubbles at the sight glass when
compressor clutch is disengaged. After clutch engages
again, bubbles must disappear and sight glass must be
clear after 30 seconds of compressor operation.
H44936
If bubbles do not disappear, see your John Deere
dealer.
H01,9000ACH,K -19-11SEP92
HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
A high pressure condition can result from insufficient air

flow across the condenser. When this happens, switch
(A) (next to radiator) shuts off the compressor.
-UN-01OCT91
Stop combine and remove key.
Clean condenser and filters.

H43907
Check for a broken fan belt.
Start engine and turn on air conditioning. If switch shuts

off compressor again, see your John Deere dealer.
HX,9000ACH,L -19-13DEC93
115-5 240397
PN=343
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
This switch (A) (located under passenger seat) protects

the compressor if refrigerant is lost. The switch can also
activate if there is insufficient air flow across the
-UN-08DEC93
evaporator. It can also cause the compressor to cycle on
cool days or if there is a slow leak in the system.
If the compressor cycles excessively, or if there is no

cooling, see your John Deere dealer.
H46116
Passenger Seat Removed
HX,9000ACH,M -19-13DEC93
115-6 240397
PN=344
Trouble Shooting
TROUBLESHOOTING
The majority of combine operating problems can be

traced to improper adjustment. These troubleshooting
charts will help you by suggesting a probable cause and
a recommended remedy.
H01,9000TS,A -19-05NOV90
FEEDER HOUSE
Symptom Problem Solution
Uneven or bunched feeding of Header auger too high. Adjust auger down and back. See
crop to cylinder. header operator’s manual.
Buildup of grain on cutterbar. Lower reel and set fore-and aft

position as close as possible to
cutterbar and auger. See platform
operator’s manual.
Front of feeder conveyor chain Adjust feeder drum so conveyor slat

adjusted too high. clears bottom with correct
clearance.
Feeder conveyor chain too tight and Adjust conveyor chain to correct
holds drum up. tension.
Header drive belt slipping. Spring-loaded idler must be free

and tight against belt.
Auger too far ahead of stripper. Adjust auger back to stripper. See
header operator’s manual.
Feeder conveyor drive chain not on Place chain on correct sprocket.

correct sprocket.
Feeder conveyor slats bowed up. Straighten or replace bent slats.
Dirt and sap buildup on feeder Clean bottom.

house bottom.
Too great a distance between Add links to feeder house chain.

platform auger and feeder house
front drum.
Header or Reel Will Not Lift Air in hydraulic system. Tighten clamps on leaking lines or
Correctly hoses. Bleed reel lift system. See
Platform operator’s manual.
H01,9000TS,B -19-11SEP92
120-1 240397
PN=345
Trouble Shooting
SEPARATOR
Cylinder Not Getting Full Speed Loose belts. Adjust belts.

Range
Slugging or Overloading of Engine not up to correct speed. See your John Deere dealer.
Cylinder.
Variable speed cylinder belt slipping Adjust sheave gap.
at slow speed.
Concave-to-cylinder spacing too Adjust concave-to-cylinder spacing.

close or too wide.
Cylinder speed too slow for crop. Increase cylinder speed.
Too much material entering Reduce ground speed.

cylinder.
Backfeeding of Cylinder. Engine not up to correct speed. See your John Deere dealer.
Separator curtains slowing crop too Remove front curtain.

much.
Beater grate in upper position. Lower beater grate.
Grain Not Threshed Crop not ready to thresh. Test moisture of crop before
combining.
Cylinder speed too slow. Increase cylinder speed enough to

do a good job of threshing but do
not increase speed to the point
where grain cracks.
Concave not level. Level concave.
Cylinder to concave spacing too Close cylinder-to-concave spacing

wide. until tight bar ticks to increase
threshing action.
Unthreshed heads passing through Install concave cover plates to keep

concave. unthreshed heads from passing
through grate.
Uneven feeding to cylinder. Check feeder conveyor chain

tension and float in feeder house.
Not enough material entering Increase ground speed.

combine for proper threshing action.
Continued on next page
120-2 240397
PN=346
Trouble Shooting
Too Much Cracked Grain In Tank. Cylinder speed too fast for crop. Decrease cylinder speed just
enough to stop grain cracking, but
still do a good threshing job, and/or
open concave slightly.
Cylinder-to-concave spacing too Open cylinder-to-concave spacing

close. just enough to stop cracking.
Slow down reel speed.
Too much clean grain in tailings, Open sieve slightly to reduce

causing grain to crack when tailings.
rethreshed.
Reduce fan speed.
Not enough straw entering combine. Increase ground speed.
Dented auger housings or bent Remove dents from auger housings

auger shafts cracking grain between and/or straighten bent auger shafts.
flights and housings.
Grain Loss Over Straw Walkers. Damaged or missing straw walker Install new curtain.
curtain.
Straw walker overloaded due to Reduce cylinder to concave spacing

incomplete threshing or late and/or increase cylinder speed to
threshing at concave. increase threshing action.
Straw walker openings plugged so Clean out openings in straw

threshed grain cannot drop through walkers.
to walker return pan.
Straw walkers overloaded so grain Reduce ground speed. Check to be

cannot get through material to both curtains are in place.
walker return pan.
Raise platform to cut less material.
Beater grate in low position. Move grate to high position.
Material overthreshed and Cylinder-to-concave setting too

pulverized. close and/or cylinder speed too fast.
Increase spacing.
Straw walker pans not extended. Extend walker pans.
Almost No Chaff in Tailings. Fan speed is too high and/or Reduce fan speed and/or increase
Grain Tank Very Clean. chaffer not open far enough. chaffer opening.
120-3 240397
PN=347
Trouble Shooting
Material Lodging On Straw Material catching on straw walker Remove front curtain.
Walker and Not Being Evenly curtain and building up on front of
Discharged From Rear of walkers.
Combine
Material not flowing evenly to See “SLUGGING OR
walkers. OVERLOADING OF CYLINDER”.
Some Chaff in Tailings. Grain Sieve is closed too tight. Open sieve.
Tank Clean.
Heavy Chaff in Tailings. Grain Sieve is closed too tight and fan is Open sieve and increase fan speed.
Tank MAY Range From Good To too slow.
Dirty.
Too Much Trash (Ground Up Chaffer and extension too far open Close chaffer and extension.
Weeds) in Tailings. for weedy conditions.
Cylinder too fast or concave too Reduce cylinder speed and/or open
tight. cylinder-to-concave spacing.
Dirty Grain Tank (Unthreshed Sieve too far open. Close sieve.
Heads).
Pre-cleaner open. Close pre-cleaner.
Cylinder not threshing enough. Increase cylinder speed and/or

close cylinder-to-concave spacing.
Dirty Grain Tank (Mostly Chaff). Fan speed too slow. Increase fan speed.
Pre-cleaner too far open in corn or Adjust or close pre-cleaner.

pre-cleaner not closed in grain
crops.
Loss of Grain Over Cleaning Chaffer closed. Open chaffer.

Shoe (Grain Tank is Clean).
Pre-cleaner closed (corn only). Open pre-cleaner.
Fan speed incorrect. Adjust fan speed. Check tailings,

losses and grain tank.
High Grain Losses (Occurs At Fan speed too fast. Reduce fan speed.
Low Feedrates or High
Feedrates).
Chaffer not open far enough. Open chaffer.
Pre-cleaner not open far enough. Open pre-cleaner.
High Grain Losses (Occurs at Fan speed too low. Increase fan speed.
High Feedrates Only).
120-4 240397
PN=348
Trouble Shooting
Unloading Auger Will Not Shut Cylinder rod stop out of adjustment. Adjust stop.
Off.
HARVESTRAK Cleaning Shoe Trash is getting caught between Remove fingers over the sensor.
Sensors Plugging Up with Trash. plastic fingers and sensor.
H01,9000TS,C -19-09OCT91
120-5 240397
PN=349
Trouble Shooting
HYDROSTATIC GROUND DRIVE
Speed Range Selector Will Not Bent or broken parts in control Repair or replace as required.
Go In Reverse. linkage.
Linkages Binding. Frozen or worn ball joints on control Lubricate or replace.

cable.
Bell crank or pivots binding. Lubricate or replace.
Control cable kinked or frozen. Replace if needed.
System Overheats. Oil cooler or radiator plugged. Blow air through core and clean.
Lack of charge oil flow. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine fan belt slipping or broken. Check for worn belt.
Plugged oil filter. Change filter.
Exceeding relief valve pressure. Shift to lower gear.
Relief valve stuck closed. See your John Deere dealer.
By-pass valve fails to close. See your John Deere dealer.
High Oil Loss. Loose connections or leaking Tighten connections or replace

hydraulic lines, hoses or O-rings. damaged lines, hoses or O-rings.
Hydrostatic drive units leaking. See your John Deere dealer.
Combine Will Not Move Forward Transmission out of gear. Shift transmission.
or Reverse.
Low on oil. Check for leaks and correct. Fill
reservoir.
Air leak in system. Tighten connections.
Control linkages broken or loose. Tighten loose linkages or replace as

needed.
Lack of charge flow or charge See your John Deere dealer.

pressure.
Plugged filter. Change filter.
Exceeding maximum operating Shift to lower gear.

pressure setting.
120-6 240397
PN=350
Trouble Shooting
Drive system unable to build up See your John Deere dealer.

pressure.
Relief valve open. See your John Deere dealer.
Transmission Hard to Shift or Speed range control lever not in Move control lever to neutral.
Will Not Shift. neutral.
Transmission shift linkage out of Adjust transmission shift linkage.

adjustment.
Damaged, dirty, rusty or pinched Inspect, clean, adjust or replace

shift cable. cable.
Internal transmission problem. See your John Deere dealer.
Ground Travel Speed Erratic. Low oil. Check for leaks and correct. Fill
reservoir.
Oil leak from lines. Tighten line connections and clamps

or replace as needed.
Exceeding maximum operating Shift to lower gear.

pressure setting.
Speed control lever creeps toward See your John Deere dealer.
neutral.
System unable to keep charge See your John Deere dealer.

pressure.
Combine Will Not Stop When Control cable out of adjustment. Adjust cable for neutral position.
Speed Range Selector is in “N”
Neutral Position.
Lack of Power or Lost Power. Low on oil. Check for leaks and correct. Fill
Combine Not Responding To reservoir.
Speed Range Selector.
Lack of charge flow or charge See your John Deere dealer.

pressure.
Leaking or broken oil line or Check and repair as needed.

connection.
120-7 240397
PN=351
Trouble Shooting
Broken or leaking O-ring. Check and repair or replace as

needed.
Dirty fuel filter(s). Replace filter(s).
Drive system unable to keep or See your John Deere dealer.

build up pressure.
H01,9000TS,D -19-20MAR90
4-WHEEL DRIVE (OPTIONAL)
Combine Will Not Move When One or both rear wheels in spin-out Increase hydrostatic pump flow by
4-Wheel Drive Is Engaged. condition. moving hydrostatic control lever
forward.
Bad electrical control switch on Replace switch.

console.
Bad solenoid valve on control valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Spool will not work in control valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Combine Will Not Move When Faulty line or connection between Repair or replace parts as needed.
4-Wheel Drive Is Disengaged. main system and rear wheel drive
control valve.
4-Wheel Drive Will Not Bad electrical control switch on Replace switch.
Disengage. console.
Bad solenoid valve on control valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Spool will not work in control valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Rear Wheels Wander During Toe-in out of adjustment. Adjust toe-in.

Transport Speeds.
H01,9000TS,E -19-20MAR90
120-8 240397
PN=352
Trouble Shooting
STEERING
Rear Wheels Wander During Toe-in out of adjustment. Adjust toe-in.

Transport Speeds.
Steering Arms Do Not Contact Steering cylinder out of adjustment. Adjust cylinder.
Stops at Full Turns.
Hard Steering. Low oil level in engine gearcase Add oil.

reservoir.
HX,9000TS,F -19-13DEC93
BRAKES
Spongy Brake Pedal Pressure. Low brake fluid level. Add brake fluid.
Air in the system. See your John Deere dealer.
Loss of Braking Power. Glazed linings. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn linings. See your John Deere dealer.
Parking Brake Not Holding. Park brake not adjusted properly. Adjust park brake.
Glazed linings. See your John Deere dealer.
H01,9000TS,G -19-09OCT91
120-9 240397
PN=353
Trouble Shooting
ENGINE
Engine Hard to Start Or Will Not No fuel. Fill tank with correct fuel and bleed
Start. system.
Clogged water filter. Change filter.
Switches not in correct positions. Move hydro lever to neutral.
Water, dirt or air in fuel system. Drain, flush, fill and bleed system.
Clogged fuel filter. Replace filter and bleed air.
Wrong type of fuel. Use correct fuel for operating

conditions.
Fuel pump disconnected. Check wiring to fuel pump.
Dirty or faulty injectors. See your John Deere dealer.
Too much resistance in starting Clean and tighten all connections

circuit. on batteries and starter relay.
Crankcase oil of too heavy Drain and fill crankcase with oil of
viscosity. correct viscosity and quality.
Low compression. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Knocks Low oil. Add oil of correct viscosity.
Air in fuel system. Bleed fuel system.
Injection pump out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
Injection nozzle valve sticking. See your John Deere dealer.
Internal engine problem. See your John Deere dealer.
Digital Tachometer Displays ---E 9500 and 9600 Combines have an Write the code on a piece of paper
electronic engine control that is and call your John Deere dealer.
sending a diagnostic code to the
tachometer.
Engine Runs Irregularly or Stalls Low coolant temperature. Run engine until warm.
Often.
Clogged water filter. Change filter.
Clogged fuel filter. Replace filter and bleed air.
Clogged fuel tank filter vent. Clean filter vent.
120-10 240397
PN=354
Trouble Shooting
Water, dirt or air in fuel system. Drain, flush, fill and bleed system.
Bent push rods or sticky valves. See your John Deere dealer.
Lack of Power. Clogged water filter. Change filter.
Overheated engine. See “Engine Overheats” below.
Intake air restriction. Clean air cleaner.
Clogged fuel filter. Replace filter and bleed system.
Clogged water filter. Replace filter.
Clogged fuel tank filter vent. Clean filter vent.
High altitude operation. Engine loses horsepower with

increases in altitude. Use correct
type of fuel for high altitude.
Air intake leaks. Check for air leaks and repair.
Engine Overheats. Low coolant level. Fill radiator with coolant to the
correct level. Check hoses and
radiator for leaks or loose
connections.
Dirty cooling system radiator core Clean radiator and rotary screen.
or rotary cooling screen.
Rotary cooling screen not turning. Broken drive belt.
Belt off sheaves.
Loose or broken fan belt. Replace worn belt.
Cooling system limed up. Drain and flush cooling system.
Defective thermostats. Remove and check thermostats.
Vacuum duct plugged. Clean duct.
120-11 240397
PN=355
Trouble Shooting
Fan on low speed. Increase speed.
Low Oil Pressure. Low oil level. Check crankcase oil level and add
oil if needed.
Wrong type of oil. Drain and fill crankcase with oil of

correct viscosity.
Oil cooler plugged. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Uses Too Much Oil. Restricted air intake system. Check air cleaner and clean air
intake.
Oil leaks. Check for leaks in lines and around

gaskets and drain plugs.
Too low viscosity crankcase oil. Drain and fill crankcase with oil of
the correct viscosity.
Oil cooler plugged. Clean oil cooler.
Scored piston. See your John Deere dealer.
Internal parts worn. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Uses Too Much Fuel. Clogged or dirty air cleaner. Clean air cleaner.
Wrong type of fuel. Use correct type of fuel for

operating conditions.
Engine out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Blows Black Or Gray Clogged or dirty air cleaner. Check air cleaner for plugging. Filter
Exhaust Smoke. element must be clean.
Wrong type of fuel. Use correct type of fuel for

operating conditions.
Dirty or defective injectors. See your John Deere dealer.
Air in fuel system. Bleed fuel system.
Defective muffler. Check muffler for possible damage

that might create back pressure.
120-12 240397
PN=356
Trouble Shooting
Engine Blows White Exhaust Cold engine. Warm engine to normal operating
Smoke. temperature.
Wrong type of fuel. Low cetane fuel will cause misfiring.

Use only fuel which has correct
cetane number.
Defective thermostat. Remove and check thermostat.
Batteries Will Not Charge. Loose or defective alternator belt. Adjust belt or replace worn belt.
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten battery

connections.
Alternator or voltage regulator not See your John Deere dealer.

working right.
Starter Cranks Slowly or Will Not Relay not working. Check relay and wire connections.
Operate.
Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten loose
connections. connections.
Key switch worn or terminals loose. Check switch and terminals.
Too high viscosity crankcase oil. Drain and fill crankcase with oil of
correct viscosity and quality.
H01,9000TS,H -19-20MAR90
HEATER
Heater Not Heating. Dirty recirculating filter. Clean filter.
No thermostat in water outlet Install thermostat.

manifold.
Defective thermostat in water outlet Replace thermostat.

manifold.
Heater temperature control Replace control.

defective.
Kinked heater hose. Defective Straighten or replace. Replace

heater valve. valve.
H01,9000TS,I -19-20MAR90
120-13 240397
PN=357
Trouble Shooting
AIR CONDITIONING
Lack Of Or Insufficient Cooling Temperature slide lever in OFF Select AIR CONDITIONING
position. position.
Compressor belt off or broken. Replace belt.
Compressor not functioning (if both See your John Deere dealer.
the large and small hoses in the
left-hand access panel are at the
same temperature).
High-pressure switch on - Clean condenser. Check fan belt

insufficient air flow across condition. Check engine fan speed
condenser. belt position. Check rotary screen
function.
Low-pressure switch on - insufficient Clean filters. Check cab fan

air flow across evaporator. operation.
Low-pressure switch on - low Move slide lever to warmer setting.

outside air temperature.
Low-pressure switch on - insufficient See your John Deere dealer.

refrigerant level (bubbles in sight
glass).
Heater valve partially on - (with Adjust control rod through tray

temperature lever in max. air opening. Move lever to OFF.
conditioning, feel both heater hoses Loosen set screw in balljoint and
on right-hand side of cab. If both when applying slight pressure down
are warm, valve is open). on rod, tighten balljoint.
Compressor clutch cycles Evaporator icing. Adjust controls correctly. See

excessively or compressor stays OPERATOR’S STATION. Open
off up to 15 minutes. louvers. Clean filters. Move lever to
warmer setting.
Bad smell (foul odor) in cab. Plugged drain tube. Dirty filters. Blow out condensate tube. Clean
Dirty cab. filters. Vacuum out cab.
Be certain weep valve in

condensate drain tube is installed.
H01,9000TS,K -19-20MAR90
120-14 240397
PN=358
Storage
PREPARING AIR CONDITIONER FOR
STORAGE
Swing out condenser and oil cooler. Clean radiator with

air, water or a vacuum cleaner. Clean condenser and oil
cooler after cleaning radiator. Clean the charge air cooler
on 9600 Combines.
Every 60 to 90 days start engine and turn air

conditioning on. Run engine at low idle for several
minutes for compressor seal lubrication. Outside
temperature should be above 5˚C (40˚F) for proper air
conditioning operation.
H01,9000ST,A -19-20MAR90
PREPARING ENGINE FOR STORAGE
Clean outside of engine with a safe solvent. Run engine to circulate. Add .94L (1 qt.) of RE23182
N
coolant conditioner.
CAUTION: Do not use gasoline.
Drain water separator.
Clean inside of air cleaner and install new elements.
Remove and clean batteries. Store them in a cool,
With engine warm, drain crankcase. Replace filter and dry place and keep them charged.
fill with correct oil. Add 0.66L (22 oz.) of corrosion
inhibitor to crankcase. Run engine to circulate. Fill optional windshield washer reservoir with
automotive windshield washer solution.
Drain, flush, and refill cooling system with 50/50
mixture of antifreeze and water.
HX,9000ST,B -19-13DEC93
125-1 240397
PN=359
Storage
PREPARING COMBINE FOR STORAGE
Clean combine inside and out. Leave elevator doors NOTE: It is not necessary to wax your combine.
and drain covers open. However, if desired, use a good clear wax
that contains no abrasives. These type of
Cycle concave up and down several times to prevent waxes usually do not contain cleaners.
material buildup in the concave area.
Lubricate combine and grease adjusting bolt threads.
IMPORTANT: Do not use high pressure washer
spray directly on bearings. High Perform all 400 hour (yearly) service.
pressure water can get past most
seals and cause damage. Dry these Fill fuel tank to prevent condensation.
areas, then lube and run combine.
If combine is to be stored for a long period of time,
Repaint areas where needed. disconnect cables from batteries.
H01,9000ST,C -19-09OCT91
REMOVING COMBINE FROM STORAGE
Check transmission, final drives and Check tire inflation.

hydraulic/hydrostatic oil levels. Inspect for leaks and
add the correct oil if needed. Check freon in sight glass. If there are bubbles in the
sight glass after the compressor has run for 30
Close elevator doors and drain hole. seconds or more, see your John Deere dealer.
Reconnect and/or charge batteries. Review operator’s manual.
Check oil and coolant levels. Inspect for leaks and Review the following FEEDER HOUSE and
add oil and coolant if needed. COMBINE ADJUSTMENTS.
Adjust compressor drive belt tension.
H01,9000ST,D -19-30JAN95
125-2 240397
PN=360
Storage
FEEDER HOUSE ADJUSTMENTS
Before the start of each harvesting season, check the touches wear strip. This setting is the tightest the
following feeder house adjustments. chain should ever be run (see ADJUSTING FEEDER
CONVEYOR CHAIN in the Feeder House section of
• Level the Header - Check tire pressure. Raise the this manual).
header and take a position approximately 4.6 m (15
ft.) in front of the combine. Compare the bottom of NOTE: The chain adjustment must be done with
the header with the bottom of the front axle; they header attached.
should be parallel.
• Changing Feeder Conveyor Speed - The variable
If the header is not level, more crop will be taken in speed feeder house changes the speed of the corn
on the low side and will cause uneven feeding (see head or row-crop head. If it is used with a platform,
LEVELING THE HEADER in the Feeder House the drive must be slowed all the way down to prevent
section of this manual). rapid wear to cutterbar parts.
• Adjust Conveyor “Float” - Conveyor chain must be 3 Running the drive chain on the small sprocket (slow
mm (1/8-in.) for grain or 25 mm (1-in.) for corn as speed) is the recommended position for ALL crops.
measured between a conveyor slat and feeder house The large sprocket (high speed) is available for
bottom, directly under feeder drum. unique crop conditions (see CHANGING FEEDER
CONVEYOR SPEED in the Feeder House Section of
If the feeder drum is not level, more crop will be this manual).
taken in on the wide side and will cause uneven
feeding to the cylinder/concave (see ADJUSTING • Adjusting Variable Speed Feeder House Belt -
CONVEYOR “FLOAT” in the Feeder House section of Adjust the feeder house drive belt to get the slow
this manual). front shaft speed for the cutting platform (see
ADJUSTING VARIABLE SPEED FEEDER HOUSE
• Adjust Feeder Conveyor Chain Tension - Set BELT in the Feeder House section of this manual).
conveyor drum “float” to grain position. See
ADJUSTING CONVEYOR FLOAT in the Feeder • Adjusting Fixed Speed Feeder House Belt -
House section of this manual). Improper adjustment may cause belt slipping or belt
failure (see ADJUSTING FIXED SPEED FEEDER
Remove left-hand side feeder house shield. Adjust HOUSE BELT in the Feeder House section of this
eyebolt until left- and right-hand side outer chains just manual).
HX,9000ST,E -19-24MAR97
125-3 240397
PN=361
Storage
COMBINE ADJUSTMENTS
Before the start of each harvesting season, check the excessive material from passing through the open
following combine adjustments. area at the rear of the short wire and spike tooth
concave to insure complete threshing (see REAR
• Setting Cylinder Access Door to Cylinder - If the CONCAVE INSERTS [9400, 9500 AND 9600 CORN
front door is not correctly adjusted, crop can feed COMBINES] in the Separator section of this manual.
back down on the top of the feeder house (see
SETTING CYLINDER ACCESS DOOR TO • Adjusting Beater Grate - The beater grate is
CYLINDER in the Separator section of this manual. assembled in the upper position for all crops. If
backfeeding is a problem, move the beater grate to
• Adjusting Cylinder Drive Gap - Run cylinder the lower position (see ADJUSTING BEATER GRATE
sheaves to close the intermediate sheaves. If sheave [RASP BAR CYLINDER] in the Separator section of
gap is more than 8 mm (5/16-in.) it limits sheave this manual.
travel. If sheave gap is less than 4 mm (3/16-in.), it
limits torque sensing (see ADJUSTING CYLINDER • Adjusting Finger Bar (Spike-Tooth) - The finger bar
DRIVE GAP in the Separator section of this manual. is assembled in the upper position for all crops. If
backfeeding is a problem, move finger bar to the
• Cylinder Belt Idler Adjustment - If cylinder belt lower position (see ADJUSTING FINGER BAR
tension is not set properly, belt slipping (burning) or [SPIKE-TOOTH CYLINDER] in the Separator section
belt failure may occur (see CYLINDER BELT IDLER of this manual.
ADJUSTMENT in the Separator section of this
manual. • Clean Grain Elevator Chain Adjustment - Improper
adjustment will result in premature wear to chain
• Concave Adjustment - Proper concave adjustment is paddles, sprockets and elevator housing (see
CRITICAL to the overall harvesting performance of ADJUSTING CLEAN GRAIN ELEVATOR CHAIN in
the combine. If the concave is not adjusted correctly, the Separator section of this manual).
the following symptoms may occur:
• poor threshing • Tailings Elevator Belt Adjustment - Improper
• poor separating adjustment will result in belt slipping or belt failure
• poor grain quality (see ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR BELT in the
• straw walker loss Separator section of this manual).
• reduced combine capacity
• Tailings Elevator Drive Chain Adjustment - Improper
See CONCAVE ADJUSTMENT in the Separator adjustment will result in premature wear of chain and
section of this manual. sprocket (see ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR
BELT in the Separator section of this manual).
• Concave Indicator Adjustment - If the concave
indicator is not adjusted correctly, it will not accurately • Tailings Elevator Paddle Chain Adjustment -
reflect the intended concave opening. Leveling the Improper adjustment will result in premature wear to
concave and setting the actuator stop must be done chain, paddles, sprocket and elevator housing (see
before making the concave indicator adjustment (see ADJUSTING TAILINGS ELEVATOR PADDLE CHAIN
ADJUSTING CONCAVE INDICATOR in the Separator in the Separator section of this manual).
• Upper Tailings Auger Drive Chain Adjustment -
• Spike Tooth Clearance and Replacement - If Improper adjustment will result in premature wear to
spike-tooth clearance is not correct, damage to teeth sprockets and chain (see ADJUSTING UPPER
may occur and threshing performance will be affected TAILINGS AUGER DRIVE CHAIN in the Separator
(see REPLACING SPIKE-TEETH AND CHECKING section of this manual).
CLEARANCE in the Separator section of this
manual). • Straw Chopper Baffle Adjustment - Adjust baffle up
or down to control distance chopped material is
• Rear Concave Inserts - The inserts which can also spread (see ADJUSTING BAFFLE in the Straw
be used with the spike tooth concave, prevent Chopper and Spreaders section of this manual).
HX,9000ST,G -19-24MAR97
125-4 240397
PN=362
Storage
• Straw Chopper Fin Adjustment - Adjust fins so material

is spread over a wide area but does not cover uncut
crop (see ADJUSTING STRAW CHOPPER FINS in the
Straw Chopper and Spreaders section of this manual).
• Knife Adjustment - Position of knives determines the

cut length of straw, to adjust knives (see ADJUSTING
KNIVES in the Straw Chopper and Spreaders section of
this manual).
• Changing Straw Chopper Speeds - The front belt can

be installed on the outside sheave grooves for 1595 rpm
or installed on the inside sheave grooves for 2130 rpm
(see CHANGING STRAW CHOPPER SPEEDS in the
Straw Chopper and Spreaders section of this manual).
• Adjusting Auger Swing Limit Switch - Swing the auger

out and back in. If the hydraulics do not shut off, the
switch is out of adjustment and needs to be reset (see
ADJUSTING AUGER SWING LIMIT SWITCH in the
Grain Tank and Unloading System section of this
manual).
HX,9000ST,I -19-30JAN95
125-5 240397
PN=363
Specifications
OPERATING SPEEDS
Speeds shown are average and can vary from machine

to machine. Speeds are rated at high idle with separator
engaged, no load.
Engine:
Slow Idle (Separator Off) . . . . . . . . 9400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1350 rpm
Slow Idle (Separator Off) . . . . . . . . 9500 and 9600 . . . . . . . . 1200 rpm

Mid Speed (Separator Off) . . . . . . . 9500 and 9600 . . . . . . . . 1680 rpm
Fast Idle (Separator Engaged) . . . . 9400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2350 rpm
9500 and 9600 . . . . . . . . 2340 rpm
Full Load Rated Speed . . . . . . . . . 9400, 9500 and 9600 . . . . 2200 rpm
Separator Drive Shaft Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 rpm

Main Countershaft Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1550 rpm
Cylinder Speed:
High Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9500 and 9600 . . .. . . 480-980 rpm
Low Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9500 and 9600 . . .. . . 240-480 rpm
Grain Special . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9400, 9500, 9600 .. . . 470-960 rpm
Edible Bean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9500 and 9600 . . .. . . 150-250 rpm
Extended Single Range . . . . . . . . . 9400 . . . . . . . . . .. . . 300-980 rpm
Extended Dual Range . . . . . . . . . . 9400 (High Range) . . 310-1000 rpm
Extended Dual Range . . . . . . . . . . 9400 (Low Range) .. . . 150-480 rpm
Feeder House Lower Shaft:
Variable Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520-715 rpm

Fixed Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 rpm
Secondary Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 rpm
Cleaning Fan:
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750-1600 rpm

Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500-1100 rpm
Clean Grain Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 rpm

Tailings Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 rpm
Shoe Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 rpm
Straw Walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 rpm
Unloading Auger Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060 rpm
H01,9000SP,A -19-17SEP96
130-1 240397
PN=364
Specifications
Loading Auger:
9400 and and 9500 . . . . . . 430 rpm
9600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 rpm
Inner Grain Tank Unloading Augers:

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9400, 9500 and 9600 . . . . . . 405 rpm
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9400, 9500 and 9600 . . . . . . 380 rpm
Vertical and Horizontal Unloading Augers:

9400, 9500 and 9600 . . . . . . 440 rpm
Straw Chopper:
Low (Corn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 rpm
High (Grain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2130 rpm
Fine Cut Straw Chopper (Optional)(Grain and Rice Combines):

Low speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600 rpm
High speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2500 rpm
Straw Spreader Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 rpm

Shoe Grain Supply Augers Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 rpm
HX,9000SP,L -19-17OCT96
130-2 240397
PN=365
Specifications
GROUND SPEEDS (FAST IDLE)
For combines equipped with ring and pinion final drives.
Speed in Km/h (mph)
COMBINE TIRE
MODEL SIZE 2WD 4WD FIRST GEAR SECOND GEAR THIRD GEAR
9400 20.8x38 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 11.1 (6.9) 29.4 (18.4)

20.8x38 R1 X 4.8 (3.0) 7.7 (4.8) 13.4 ( 8.4)
9400 (Australia
Only) 24.5x32 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 14.3 (9.0) 29.4 (18.4)
9400, 9500 24.5x32 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 11.1 (6.9) 29.4 (18.4)

24.5x32 R1 X 4.8 (3.0) 7.7 (4.8) 13.4 ( 8.4)
24.5x32 R3 X 5.7 (3.6) 10.6 (6.7) 28.3 (17.6)
9400, 9500, 9600 30.5Lx32 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 11.1 (6.9) 29.4 (18.4)
30.5Lx32 R1 X 4.8 (3.0) 7.7 (4.8) 13.4 ( 8.4)
30.5Lx32 R2 X 6.3 (3.9) 11.7 (7.2) 31.2 (19.3)

30.5Lx32 R2 X 5.2 (3.2) 8.0 (5.0) 14.0 ( 8.7)
30.5Lx32 R3 X 5.7 (3.6) 10.6 (6.7) 28.3 (17.6)

9500,9600
(Australia Only) 30.5Lx32 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 14.3 (9.0) 29.4 (18.4)
9500, 9600 18.4x38 R1 X 5.9 (3.7) 11.1 (6.9) 29.4 (18.4)

18.4x38 R1 X 4.8 (3.0) 7.7 (4.8) 13.4 ( 8.4)
18.4x38 R2 X 6.2 (3.8) 11.4 (7.1) 30.4 (19.0)

18.4x38 R2 X 4.9 (3.1) 7.9 (4.9) 13.8 ( 8.7)
High Clearance 18.4x38 R2 X 6.2 (3.8) 11.4 (7.1) 30.4 (19.0)

18.4x38 R2 X 4.7 (2.9) 07.3 (4.5) 12.2 ( 7.5)
High Clearance 30.5Lx32 R2 X 6.3 (3.9) 11.7 (7.2) 31.2 (19.3)

30.5Lx32 R2 X 4.8 (3.0) 07.4 (4.6) 12.4 ( 7.6)
NOTE: High clearance includes 18.4 x 30R2 Rear Tires

and 1600 cc rear motors.
H01,9000SP,B -19-10OCT91
130-3 240397
PN=366
Specifications
GROUND SPEEDS (SEPARATOR FULL

LOAD)
For 9600 Combines equipped with planetary final drives.
Speed in Km/h (MPH)

TIRE
SIZE 2WD 4WD First Gear Second Gear Third Gear
18.4x42 R1 X 6.2 (3.8) 11.6 (7.2) 30.9 (19.3)

18.4x42 R1 X 1200 cc 5.2 (3.3) 8.5 (5.3) 15.5 ( 9.7)
18.4x42 R1 X 1600 cc 4.9 (3.0) 07.8 (4.8) 13.3 (08.2)
30.5Lx32 R1 X 6.1 (3.8) 11.4 (7.1) 30.2 (18.9)

30.5Lx32 R1 X 4.8 (3.0) 7.7 (4.8) 13.2 ( 8.3)
35.5Lx32 R2 X 6.7 (4.1) 12.5 (7.9) 33.5 (20.9)

35.5Lx32 R2 X 1200 cc 5.5 (3.5) 9.0 (5.6) 16.3 (10.2)
35.5Lx32 R2 X 1600 cc 5.3 (3.3) 08.2 (5.1) 13.9 (08.6)
H01,9000SP,C -19-09OCT91
TURNING RADIUS
Combine Rear Wheel Turning
Model Tread Width Radius
9400, 9500, 9600 3.1 m (10 ft. 2 in.) 7.4 m (24 ft. 2 in.)
H01,9000DRA,O -19-10APR90
130-4 240397
PN=367
Specifications
SPECIFICATIONS - 9400 COMBINES
Engine: Make . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . John Deere

Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6068H
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . six-cylinder, in line,
valve-in-head, diesel
turbocharged
Brake Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 kW (185 hp)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 L (414 cu. in.)

Bore and Stroke: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 x 110 mm (4.20 x 4.33 in.)
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-3-6-2-4
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Type with Safety Element
Thermostats (Two) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82˚C (180˚F)
Electrical
System: ................................ 12 volt, negative ground with 95 amp alternator
Transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . three speeds
Brakes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulic shoe
Cylinder: Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rasp bar or spike tooth

Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 mm (26 in.)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 mm (55 in.)
Number of bars: rasp bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

spike tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Concave: Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open bar or spike tooth

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 m 2 (1255 sq. in.)
Beater: Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 mm (15-1/2 in.)

Number of wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Beater Grate: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open bar two-position adjustable

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 m 2 (821 sq. in.)
HX,9000SP,K -19-13DEC93
130-5 240397
PN=368
Specifications
Finger Bar: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . adjustable
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4780 cm 2 (744 sq.in.)
Separator: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . straw walkers

Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 mm (55 in.)
Cleaning Shoe: Chaffer width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)

Chaffer length (with extension) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 mm (32-3/4 in.)
Sieve width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)
Sieve length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 mm (46 in.)
Precleaner width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)
Precleaner length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840 mm (33 in.)
Total area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 m 2 (6370 sq. in.)
Straw Walkers: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. Lip

Number of walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. . 4
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4000 mm (157 in.)
Total area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.56 m 2 (8624 sq. in.)
Grain Tank: Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6410L (182 bu.)

Average Unloading Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4200L/min. (120 bu./min.)
Weights: Less header (base equipment on a Corn Combine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 080 kg (22,220 lb.)
Capacities: Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530L (140 gal.)

Cooling system (with heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36L (38 U.S. qts.)
Engine crankcase (with filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.9L (20 U.S. qts.)
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6L (10 U.S. qts.)
Final Drives (each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0L (8-1/2 U.S. qts.)
Feeder House Reverser Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9L (2 U.S. pts.)
Primary Countershaft Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4L (2-1/2 U.S. pts.)
Straw Walker Drive Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7L (1-1/2 U.S. pts.)
Dual-Range Cylinder Drive Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9L (2 U.S. qts.)
Engine Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16L (17 U.S. qts.)
Loading Auger Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8L (4 U.S. qts.)
Hydraulic/Hydrostatic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34L (36 U.S. qts.)
HX,9000SP,D -19-31JAN95
130-6 240397
PN=369
Specifications

Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6076II
valve-in-head, air-to-air
aftercooled diesel turbocharged
Brake Horsepower Corn and Rice Special 175 rated with 187 kW boost (235 with 250 hp boost)
Grain . . . . . . . . . . . 160 rated with 170 kW boost (215 with 228 hp boost)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6L (466 cu. in.)

Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-3-6-2-4
Electrical
System: . . . 12 volt, negative ground with 95 amp alternator
Transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . three speeds
Brakes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulic shoe
Cylinder: Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rasp bar or spike tooth

Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 mm (26 in.)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1362 mm (53-1/2 in.)

spike tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 sq. cm (1259 sq. in.)

Number of wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Beater
Grate: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open bar two-position adjustable
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 sq. cm (817 sq. in.)
HX,9000SP,E -19-13DEC93
130-7 240397
PN=370
Specifications

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.48 m 2 (744 sq. in.)

Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1397 mm (55 in.)
Cleaning Shoe:
Chaffer width . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)
Chaffer length . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220 mm (48 in.)
Sieve width . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)
Sieve length . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 mm (46 in.)
Precleaner width .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1286 mm (51 in.)
Precleaner length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840 mm (33 in.)
Total area . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 m 2 (6370 sq. in.)
Straw Walkers: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. Lip

Number of walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............. . 4
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4500 mm (177 in.)
Total area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.26 m 2 (9702 sq. in.)
Grain Tank: Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 200L (204 bu.)

Average unloading rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4200L/min (120 bu./min.)
Weights: Less header (base equipment on a Corn Combine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 968 kg (24,185 lbs.)

Cooling system (with heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36L (38 U.S. qts.)
Engine crankcase (with filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25L (26-1/2 U.S. qts.)
Final Drives (each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5L (9 U.S. qts.)
HX,9000SP,F -19-30JAN95
130-8 240397
PN=371
Specifications

Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6076II
valve-in-head, air-to-air
aftercooled diesel turbocharged.
Brake Horsepower Corn and Rice Special 194 rated with 213 kW boost (260 with 285 hp boost)
Grain . . . . . . . . . . . 160 rated with 170 kW boost (215 with 228 hp boost)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6L (466 cu. in.)

Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-3-6-2-4
Electrical
System: .................................. 12 volt, negative ground with 95 amp alternator
Transmission: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . three speeds
Brakes: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulic shoe
Cylinder: Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rasp bar or spike tooth

Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 mm (26 in.)
Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 mm (64-1/2 in.)

spike tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 sq. cm (1508 sq. in.)

Number of wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Beater
Grate: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . open bar two-position adjustable
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 sq. cm (981 sq. in.)
H01,9000SP,G -19-11SEP92
130-9 240397
PN=372
Specifications

Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.57 m 2 (884 sq. in.)

Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 mm (66 in.)
Cleaning Shoe: Chaffer width . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562 mm (61-1/2 in.)

Chaffer length . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 mm (32-3/4 in.)
Sieve width . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562 mm (61-1/2 in.)
Sieve length . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169 mm (46 in.)
Precleaner width .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1562 mm (61-1/2 in.)
Precleaner length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 mm (32-3/4 in.)
Total area . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 sq. cm (7734 sq. in.)
Straw Walkers: Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ Lip

Number of walkers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................ . 5
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4500 mm (177 in.)
Total area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 sq. cm (11,625 sq. in.)
Grain Tank: Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8460L (240 bu.)

Unloading rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4600L/min. (132 bu./min.)
Weights: Less header (base equipment on a Corn Combine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 746 kg (25,900 lbs.)

Cooling system (with heater) (all except 9600 Corn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36L (38 U.S. qts.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9600 Corn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40L (42 U.S. qts.)
Engine crankcase (with filter): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25L (26-1/2 U.S. qts.)
Final Drives (each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ring and Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5L (9 U.S. qts.)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planetary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2L (6-1/2 U.S. qts.)

Dual-Range Cylinder Drive Gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9L (2 U.S. qts.)
HX,9000SP,H -19-30JAN95
130-10 240397
PN=373
Specifications
DIMENSIONS
The grain tank auger is 217 mm (8-1/2 in.) above the

cab roof on 9400 and 9500 Combines and 342 mm
(13-1/2 in.) on 9600 Combines.
Additional clearance can be gained by removing the

grain tank loading auger. See “REMOVING GRAIN
TANK LOADING AUGER”.
DIMENSION 9400 w/24.5-32 9500 w/24.5-32 9600 w/30.5-32

Cleat R-1 Cleat R-1 Cleat R-1 and
17 ft.
Unloading
Auger
A 7.91 m (25 ft. 11 in.) 7.91 m (25 ft. 11 in.) 8.82 m (28 ft. 11 in.)
w/14 ft. Unloading Auger w/14 ft. Unloading Auger
8.82 m (28 ft. 11 in.) 9.73 m (31 ft.11 in.)
w/17 ft. Unloading Auger w/20 ft. Unloading Auger
B 7.71 m (25 ft. 3 in.) 8.21 m (26 ft. 11 in.) 8.21 m (26 ft. 11 in.)
C 4.08 m (13 ft. 5 in.) 4.08 m (13 ft. 5 in.) 4.22 m (13 ft. 10 in.)
D 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 4.00 m (13 ft. 2 in.) 4.14 m (13 ft. 7 in.)
E 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.)
F 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.)
G 0.55 m (1 ft. 10 in.) 0.55 m (1 ft. 10 in.) 0.55 m (1 ft. 10 in.)
H 3.94 m (12 ft. 11 in.) 3.94 m (12 ft. 11 in.) 4.10 m (13 ft. 5 in.)
I 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.77 m (12 ft. 4 in.) 3.93 m (12 ft. 11 in.)
J 4.59 m (15 ft. 1 in.) 4.59 m (15 ft. 1 in.) 5.28 m (17 ft. 4 in.)
K 3.09 m (10 ft. 2 in.) 3.09 m (10 ft. 2 in.) 3.60 m (11 ft. 10 in.)
L* 11.00 x 24 (2 wheel drive) 11.00 x 24 (2 wheel drive) 11.00 x 24 (2 wheel drive)

3.59 m (9ft. 10 in.) 3.59 m (9ft. 10 in.) 3.59 m (9ft. 10 in.)
14.9 x 24 (2 wheel drive) 14.9 x 24 (2 wheel drive) 14.9 x 24 (2 wheel drive)

3.67 m (10 ft. 1/2 in.) 3.67 m (10 ft. 1/2 in.) 3.67 m (10 ft. 1/2 in.)
18.4 x 26 (2 wheel drive) 18.4 x 26 (2 wheel drive) 18.4 x 26 (2 wheel drive)

3.82 m (10 ft. 5 in.) 3.82 m (10 ft. 5 in.) 3.82 m (10 ft. 5 in.)
NOTE: * “L” dimension is for fixed rear axle. For

adjustable rear axle, see REAR AXLE
ADJUSTMENT.
H01,9000SP,I -19-09OCT91
130-11 240397
PN=374
Specifications
DIMENSION REFERENCE POINTS
-UN-06JUN91
H39195
H01,9000SP,J -19-09OCT91
130-12 240397
PN=375
Specifications
METRIC BOLT AND CAP SCREW TORQUE VALUES
-19-04MAR91
TS1163
Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Size Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya
N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft
M6 4.8 3.5 6 4.5 9 6.5 11 8.5 13 9.5 17 12 15 11.5 19 14.5

M8 12 8.5 15 11 22 16 28 20 32 24 40 30 37 28 47 35
M10 23 17 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 47 80 60 75 55 95 70
M12 40 29 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120

M14 63 47 80 60 120 88 150 110 175 130 225 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 73 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 240 400 300
M18 135 100 175 125 260 195 330 250 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 240 180 375 275 475 350 530 400 675 500 625 460 800 580
M22 260 190 330 250 510 375 650 475 725 540 925 675 850 625 1075 800
M24 330 250 425 310 650 475 825 600 925 675 1150 850 1075 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 450 950 700 1200 875 1350 1000 1700 1250 1600 1150 2000 1500
M30 675 490 850 625 1300 950 1650 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2150 1600 2700 2000
M33 900 675 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1650 2500 1850 3150 2350 2900 2150 3700 2750
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2750 4750 3500
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value Make sure fasteners threads are clean and that you
or tightening procedure is given for a specific properly start thread engagement. This will prevent
application. Torque values listed are for general use them from failing when tightening.
only. Check tightness of fasteners periodically.
Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel-type lock nuts
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined to approximately 50 percent of the dry torque shown
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical in the chart, applied to the nut, not to the bolt head.
property class. Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
torque value.
Fasteners should be replaced with the same or
higher property class. If higher property class
fasteners are used, these should only be tightened to
the strength of the original.
a “Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, or
fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings. “Dry” means plain or zinc
plated without any lubrication. DX,TORQ2 -19-20JUL94
130-13 240397
PN=376
Specifications
UNIFIED INCH BOLT AND CAP SCREW TORQUE VALUES
-19-04MAR91
TS1162
Grade 1 Grade 2b Grade 5, 5.1, or 5.2 Grade 8 or 8.2
Size Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya Lubricateda Drya
N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft N·m lb-ft
1/4 3.7 2.8 4.7 3.5 6 4.5 7.5 5.5 9.5 7 12 9 13.5 10 17 12.5
5/16 7.7 5.5 10 7 12 9 15 11 20 15 25 18 28 21 35 26
3/8 14 10 17 13 22 16 27 20 35 26 44 33 50 36 63 46
7/16 22 16 28 20 35 26 44 32 55 41 70 52 80 58 100 75
1/2 33 25 42 31 53 39 67 50 85 63 110 80 120 90 150 115
9/16 48 36 60 45 75 56 95 70 125 90 155 115 175 130 225 160
5/8 67 50 85 62 105 78 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 300 225
3/4 120 87 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 225 375 280 425 310 550 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 625 450 700 500 875 650
1 290 210 360 270 290 210 360 270 725 540 925 675 1050 750 1300 975
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 900 675 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 425 725 530 570 425 725 530 1300 950 1650 1200 2050 1500 2600 1950
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2150 1550 2700 2000 3400 2550
1-1/2 1000 725 1250 925 990 725 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
DO NOT use these values if a different torque value Fasteners should be replaced with the same or
or tightening procedure is given for a specific higher grade. If higher grade fasteners are used,
application. Torque values listed are for general use these should only be tightened to the strength of the
only. Check tightness of fasteners periodically. original.
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined Make sure fasteners threads are clean and that you
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. properly start thread engagement. This will prevent
them from failing when tightening.
Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel-type lock nuts

to approximately 50 percent of the dry torque shown
in the chart, applied to the nut, not to the bolt head.
a “Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, or Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings. “Dry” means plain or zinc torque value.
plated without any lubrication.
b Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 152 mm
(6-in.) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 152 mm (6-in.)
long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length. DX,TORQ1 -19-20JUL94
130-14 240397
PN=377
Machine Identification Numbers
IDENTIFICATION PLATES
Your combine has these identification plates. The letters

and numbers stamped on these plates identify a
component or assembly. ALL of these characters are
-UN-14MAR89
needed when ordering parts or identifying a combine or
component for any John Deere product support program.
Also, they are needed for law enforcement to trace your
combine if it is ever stolen. ACCURATELY record these
characters in the spaces provided in each of the
H39669
following photographs.
H01,9000ID,A -19-09OCT91
COMBINE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Located on left-hand side above rear axle.
-UN-29OCT90
H42377
HX,9000ID,B -19-13DEC93
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER FOR 9400

COMBINES
Located on rear side of engine.
-UN-10OCT91
H43939
H01,9000ID,C -19-09OCT91
135-1 240397
PN=378
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER FOR 9500 AND

9600 COMBINES
The engine serial number is located on rear side of

engine.
-UN-24JUN91
H43631
H01,9000ID,D -19-09OCT91
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE UNIT PUMP
Located on the side of the pump section.
-UN-21AUG91
H43804
H01,9000ID,E -19-09OCT91
HYDROSTATIC DRIVE UNIT MOTOR
Located on top of the motor section.
-UN-21AUG91
H43805
H01,9000ID,F -19-09OCT91
CAM LOBE 4-WHEEL DRIVE MOTOR
Located on top of motor.

-UN-10JUL91
H43678
H01,9000ID,G -19-09OCT91
135-2 240397
PN=379
ENGINE GEARCASE
Located on the back side.
-UN-03AUG92
H44937
H01,9000ID,H -19-11SEP92
TRANSMISSION (LATER UNITS)
Located on the side of the transmission.
-UN-19OCT95
H47136
HX,9000ID,C -19-27SEP96
135-3 240397
PN=380
Crime Prevention Tips
HELP PREVENT CRIME
You can help take a bite out of crime by properly

documenting ownership and discouraging theft.
-19-07OCT88
TS140
DX,CRPRV,A -19-03MAR93
RECORD IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
1. Mark your machines with your own unique numbering

system.
-UN-23MAR89
2. Record the Product Identification Number (PIN) of the
unit and also individual component identification numbers
for engines, axles, pumps, etc. Include the PIN numbers
on all documentation, such as insurance, financial, and
warranty papers.
TS161
DX,CRPRV,B -19-03MAR93
KEEP PROOF OF OWNERSHIP
1. Take color photographs from several angles of each

machine.
-UN-23MAR89
2. Maintain an up-to-date inventory of all your machines.
3. Keep your documented identification numbers, color

photographs, and inventory in a safe, secure location.
TS142
DX,CRPRV,C -19-03MAR93
PARK INDOORS OUT OF SIGHT
Make machines hard to move:

• Park large equipment in front of exits.
• Lower equipment to the ground. Remove key.
-UN-23AUG88
• Remove battery when unit is in storage.

• Lock cab doors, windows, and vandal-proof devices.
• Set wheels in widest position making loading more
difficult. Lock building.
TS143
DX,CRPRV,D -19-03MAR93
140-1 240397
PN=381
Crime Prevention Tips
WHEN PARKING OUTDOORS
Make machines hard to move:

• Park in a well-lighted, fenced area.
• Lower all equipment to the ground.
-UN-23AUG88
• Remove ignition key. Remove battery when unit is in
storage.
• Lock cab doors, windows, and vandal-proof devices.
• Set wheels in widest position making loading more
difficult.
TS155
DX,CRPRV,E -19-03MAR93
REDUCE VANDALISM
1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. Participate in a neighborhood watch program. Take
-UN-23AUG88
written notes of suspicious vehicles or persons and
report your findings to law enforcement agency.
3. Regularly verify that identification plates have not

been removed. If they have, notify law enforcement
agency. Order duplicate plates from your dealer.
TS145
DX,CRPRV,F -19-03MAR93
REPORT THEFTS IMMEDIATELY
1. Immediately notify your local law enforcement agency

and insurance agent.
2. Provide a complete description of the machine, all of

the documented identification numbers and color
photographs.
3. Request verification of the identification numbers after

they have been entered with any regional or national
crime information center. Double check the numbers to
be sure they are correct.
4. Notify your John Deere dealer of the theft and request

that its loss be posted with full description and
identification numbers.
-UN-09JAN89
TS146
DX,CRPRV,G -19-03MAR93
140-2 240397
PN=382
John Deere Literature Available
ARE WE MEETING YOUR NEEDS
This operator’s manual was written by the Service

Publications Department at John Deere Harvester Works.
-UN-17JAN89
In our effort to meet customer needs, we invite you to
mail comments on this manual to:
John Deere Harvester Works 1100 13th Avenue East

Moline, Illinois 61244 Attn: Service Publications
TS190
HX,9000ID,A -19-13DEC93
PARTS CATALOG
The parts catalog lists service parts available for your

machine with exploded view illustrations to help you
identify the correct parts. It is also useful in assembling
-UN-17JAN89
and disassembling.
TS189
DX,PARTS -19-03MAR93
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
The operator’s manual provides safety, operating,

maintenance, and service information about John Deere
machines.
-UN-17JAN89
An extra copy of the operator’s manual is available. The
operator’s manual and safety signs on your machine
may also be available in other languages. (See your
John Deere dealer to order.)
TS190
DX,OM -19-03MAR93
TECHNICAL AND SERVICE MANUALS
Technical and service manuals are service guides for

your machine. Included in the manual are specifications,
diagnosis, and adjustments. Also illustrations of assembly
-UN-17JAN89
and disassembly procedures, hydraulic oil flows, and

wiring diagrams.
Component technical manuals are required for some

products. These supplemental manuals cover specific
components.
TS224
DX,TM -19-03MAR93
145-1 240397
PN=383
JOHN DEERE PUBLISHING BOOKS
Covering all types of vehicles, regardless of manufac-

turer, each book starts with basic theory and proceeds
through complex systems. There are four series:
-UN-02OCT95
• Farm Business Management (FBM)
• Fundamentals of Machine Operation (FMO)
• Fundamentals of Service (FOS)
• Fundamentals of Compact Equipment Service (FCP)
TS1646
DX,FMOFOS -19-02OCT95
145-2 240397
PN=384
John Deere Distribution Service Center Name

Service Publications Department
Address
P.O. Box 186, Moline, IL. 61266-0186
To order, fill out this form and mail it to the address above. Check forCity
prices with your John Deere dealer or call 1-800-522-7448. You may
also place credit card orders by calling this number. Make checks State Zip
payable to Deere & Co. Service Publications. Allow three weeks for
delivery. No COD orders. Do not send cash or stamps. If you want Phone ( )
manuals or catalogs for equipment not shown on this list, provide the
model number, serial number, and name of the product.
Title Order Number Price Each x Quantity = Total
Parts Catalog 9500 PC2179 x =

Operator’s Manual OMH161694 x =
Owners Video (North American) H146988 x =
Owners Video (Australia & South African) H146989 x =
Technical Manual (Repair) TM1401 x =
Technical Manual (Diagnostic) TM1402 x =
Component Technical Manuals:
6068 Engine CTM8 x =
6076 Engine CTM6 x =
Electrical Engine Components CTM11 x =
Cam Lobe Motors CTM19 x =
FMO Manual—Tractors FMO10103BX x =
FMO Manual—Tillage FMO11103B x =
FMO Manual—Planting FMO12103B x =
FMO Manual—Hay & Forage Harvesting FMO14104B x =
FMO Manual—Combine Harvesting FMO15104B x =
FMO Manual—Preventive Maintenance FMO16105B x =
FOS Manual—Hydraulics FOS1005B x =
FOS Manual—Electronic and Electrical Systems FOS2007B x =
FOS Manual—Engines FOS3007B x =
FOS Manual—Power Trains FOS4006B x =
FOS Manual—Welding FOS5207B x =
FOS Manual—Belts and Chains FOS5305B x =
FOS Manual—Bearings and Seals FOS5405B x =
FOS Manual—Tires and Tracks FOS5507B x =
FOS Manual—Mowers and Sprayers FOS5605B x =
FOS Manual—Air Conditioning FOS5708B x =
FOS Manual—Fuels, Lubricants & Coolants FOS5807B x =
FMO Manual—Machinery Maintenance FMW10103B x =
FBM Manual—Farm & Ranch Business Managmt. FBM10103B x =
FBM Manual—Farm & Ranch Safety Management FBM18104B x =
FBM Manual—Machinery Management FBM17104B x =
FBM Manual—Chemical Applications Management FBM19103B x =
1-in. 3-Ring Binder (400 pages max.) SX2062 x =
1-1/2-in. 3-Ring Binder (600 pages max.) SX2063 x =
1—1-1/2-in. 3-Post Binder (600 pages max.) SX2066 x =
2—3-1/2-in. 3-Post Binder (1400 pages max.) SX2064 x =
2—4-in. 4-Post Expandable (2000 pages max.) SX2056 x =
Subtotal
Shipping Illinois state residents add
Method of Payment Subtotal & Handling 6.25% and Iowa state residents
¼ Check or Money Order enclosed $ 0.50 to $ 24.99 . . . $ 3.50 add 5% for Retail Occupation
¼ John Deere ¼ Farm Plan 25.00 to 49.99 . . . . . 5.00 Tax or show tax exemption
¼ MasterCard ¼ Discover 50.00 to 99.99 . . . . . 6.50
¼ Visa ¼ American Express 100.00 to 199.99 . . . . 9.00 number. Other states excluded.
200.00 and over . . 4.5% of Total Shipping & Handling
subtotal
Credit Card Acct. No. (13 or 16 digits) Amount Due in U.S. Dollars (Prices
Optional shipping available. subject to change without notice.
Expiration date: Please check and add cost to SEP-95)
normal shipping above.
¼ 1 day air . . . . . . . $15.00
Your Signature ¼ 2 day air . . . . . . . $10.00
HX,HC,356 -19-24MAR97
145-3 240397
PN=385
Index
Page Page
Belt Replacement and Adjustment, Straw

A Spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-17
Belt Replacement for Clean Grain
Accumulator (General Information) . . . . . . . 105-3 Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-44
Accumulator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-6 Belt Replacement, Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-14
Accumulator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-6 Belt Replacement, Cylinder Intermediate . . . 70-14
Accumulator Gauge Bulb, Replacing . . . . . . . 95-8 Belt Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-2
Accumulator Precharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-5 Belt, Beater, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-29
Accumulator System, Dual (Optional) . . . . . . 105-4 Belt, Cleaning Fan, Replacement . . . . . . . . 70-36
Adjust rotary screen knife comb . . . . . . . . . 90-15 Belt, Cleaning Shoe, Replacement . . . . . . . 70-36
Adjusting auger swing limit switch . . . . . . . . 75-13 Belt, Drive, Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5
Adjusting Concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-19 Belt, Drive, Unloading Auger,
Adjustments, Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-8
Adjustments, Feeder House . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-3 Belt, Elevator, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-46
Air Cleaner Filters, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . 90-17 Belt, Rotary Screen, Routing . . . . . . . . . . . 90-14
Air Conditioner Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27 Belt, Secondary Countershaft, Adjustment . . . 70-30
Air Conditioner, Preparing for Storage . . . . . 125-1 Belt, Secondary Countershaft,
Air Conditioning Precautions, Observing . . . . 115-1 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-30
Air Conditioning System-General Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-1 Belts, Straw Chopper, Replacing . . . . . . . . . 70-15
Air Conditioning, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . 120-14 Black-Eyed Peas, Combining, Crop
Air Suspension Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-3
Alfalfa, Combining, Suggested Settings . . . . . 45-3 Bleeding Fuel Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-7
Alternator Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-16 Bolt Torque, Drive Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6
Alternator Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-15 Bolt Torque, Dual Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-7
Are We Meeting Your Needs? . . . . . . . . . . 145-1 Bolt Torque, Rear Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6
Auger Drive Chain, Upper Tailings, Brake Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-14
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-48 Brake Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-43
Auger swing limit switch, adjusting . . . . . . . 75-13 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-14
Auger Swing, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-12 Brakes, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-9
Auger, Unloading, Installing and Timing . . . . 75-11 Bulb Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-4
Auxiliary Field Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 Bulbs, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-3
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
C
B Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135-2
Baffle, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1 Cab Landing Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
Ballast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-20 Cam Lobe 4-Wheel Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . 135-2
Ballast, Liquid, Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-3 Canola, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . 45-4
Barley, Combining, Suggested Settings . . . . . 45-3 Capacities; Lubricant, Fuel, Cooling
Batteries, Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-10
Battery Cables, Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-12 Cassette Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-11 CB Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-17
Battery, Booster, Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . 95-14 Chaff Spreader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-17
Beater Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-29 Chaffer Bushings, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 70-35
Beater Grate Curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-26 Chaffer Finger Bar Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Beater Speed, 75 Percent, Optional . . . . . . 70-29 Chaffer Fingers, Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-38
Beater Wing, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-28 Chaffer Fingers, Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-38
Beater-Belt Idler Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-28 Chaffer Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39
Belt Adjustment, Straw Walker Gearcase . . . 70-32 Chaffer Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Belt Adjustment, Tailings Elevator . . . . . . . . 70-47 Chaffer Tool Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39
Index-1 240397
PN=389
Index
Page Page
Chaffer, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39 Concave Indicator, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . 70-18

Chaffer, General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40 Condenser, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-4
Chaffer, Non-Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-40 Connectors, Electrical, Handling . . . . . . . . . 95-10
Chaffer, Semi-Deep Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-41 Contour Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-19
Chain Adjustment, Clean Grain Elevator . . . 70-44 Contour Master Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . 55-22
Chain Links, Conveyor, Removing . . . . . . . . . 55-5 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Chain, Drive, Feeder Conveyor, Adjusting . . . . 55-7 Conveyor Auger Drive Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-4
Chain, Drive, Tailings Elevator, Conveyor Float, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-6
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-47 Coolant conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-4
Chain, Feeder Conveyor, Adjusting . . . . . . . . 55-4 Coolant, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-3
Chain, Paddle, Tailings Elevator, Cooler, After, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-14
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-47 Cooling System, Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-9
Chains, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37 Cooling System, Winterizing . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
Chopper Blade Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-6 Corn Kernel Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-15
Chopper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-7 Corn, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-4
Chopper, Straw (General Information) . . . . . . 70-1 Cover, Chaffer Finger Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Chopper, Straw, Changing Speeds . . . . . . . 70-12 Crawler Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-11
Chopper, Straw, Drive Alignment . . . . . . . . 70-15 Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-2
Chopper, Straw, Moving to Windrow Crop Settings, Combining Corncob Mix . . . . . 45-5
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-8 Crop Settings, Combining Flax . . . . . . . . . . . 45-5
Circuit Breaker Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-3 Cross Auger Drive Shear Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 75-4
Circuit Breakers (Central Electronics Box) . . . . 95-1 Cross Auger Drive, Grain Tank,
Circuit Breakers (Engine Compartment) . . . . . 95-1 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-6
Clean Grain Elevator Chain Adjustment . . . . 70-44 Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30
Cleaning Fan Drive, Slow-Speed Curtain, Beater Grate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-26
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-37 Curtains, Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-31
Cleaning Fan Intake Shields . . . . . . . . . . . 70-38 Cylinder Access Door, Setting . . . . . . . . . . 70-10
Cleaning Fan Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-3 Cylinder Belt Idler Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 70-13
Cleaning Fan, Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . 70-36 Cylinder Drive Gap, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . 70-11
Cleaning Out the Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1 Cylinder Drive, Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-12
Cleaning Precleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-2 Cylinder Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-11
Cleaning Shoe Auger Gear, Adjusting . . . . . 70-33 Cylinder, Hydraulic, Safety Stop . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Cleaning Shoe Augers Slip Clutch . . . . . . . 70-34 Cylinder, Power Unplugging of . . . . . . . . . . 70-10
Cleaning Shoe, Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . 70-36
Clutch, Electromagnetic, Header Drive . . . . . 95-16
Clutch, Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-8 D
Clutch, Slip, Tailings Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . 70-48 Data Center, Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13
Codes, Diagnostic, Engine Control . . . . . . . 100-2 Deere-Delco AM/FM Stereo Radio . . . . . . . 20-45
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-6 Deflector, Grain Tank Loading Auger . . . . . . . 75-5
Colors, Switch and Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-1
Combine Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-4 Digital Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-1
Combine and corn head check list . . . . . . . 45-11 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-11
Combine Data Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13 Door, Access, Straw Walkers . . . . . . . . . . . 70-27
Combine Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . 135-1 Door, Cylinder Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Combine Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29 Door, Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1
Combine, Cleaning Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1 Door, Feeder House, Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-2
Combine, Pulling Out of Mud . . . . . . . . . . 110-19 Doors, Feeder House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Compressor Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5 Doors, Top Access for Drives . . . . . . . . . . 70-43
Concave Closure Plates, Front . . . . . . . . . . 70-25 Drain Holes, Grain Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-1
Concave Closure Plates, Rear . . . . . . . . . . 70-25 Draining Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
Concave Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-18 Drive Adjustment for Unloading Auger . . . . . . 75-9
Index-2 240397
PN=390
Index
Page Page
Drive Belt Idler Adjustment, Straw Engine, Compartment, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 90-1

Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-11 Engine, Preparing for Storage . . . . . . . . . . 125-1
Drive Belt, Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5 Engine, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-10
Drive Belt, Unloading Auger, Evaporator Filter, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-3
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-8
Drive Chain, Auger, Upper Tailings,
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-48 F
Drive Chain, Feeder Conveyor, Adjusting . . . . 55-7
Fan Bottom Protection Shield . . . . . . . . . . . 70-37
Drive Chain, Tailings Elevator,
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-47 Feed Plate Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-2
Drive Cylinder, Unloading Auger, Feeder Conveyor Speed, Changing . . . . . . . . 55-7
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-10 Feeder Conveyor, Float, Checking . . . . . . . . 55-5
Drive Cylinder, Unloading Auger, Feeder House Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-3
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-10 Feeder House Belt Replacement, Fixed
Drive Tire Spacing (9400 and 9500 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-15
Combines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-8 Feeder House Belt Replacement,
Drive Tire Spacing (9600/Ring and Pinion Variable Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-14
Final Drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-10 Feeder House Belt, Adjusting, Fixed
Drive Tire Spacing, 9600/Planetary Drives . . . 110-9 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-14
Drive Wheel Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6 Feeder House Belt, Adjusting, Variable
Drive Wheel Starter Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-13
Drive, Cleaning Fan, Slow-Speed Feeder House Removal From Combine . . . . 55-17
(Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-37 Feeder house reverser gearcase oil
Drive, Cylinder Dual-Range 9400 Corn cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5 Feeder house strippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-3
Drive, Cylinder, Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-12 Feeder House Top Shaft Sprockets . . . . . . . . 55-9
Drive, Cylinder, Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-4 Feeder House, Top Shaft Stripper
Drive, Cylinder, Single-Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-8
Drive, Direct, High-Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-8 Feeder House, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 120-1
Drive, Slow-Speed (Dual-Range Only) . . . . . . 70-6 Feedplate Seal Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-2
Drives, Cylinder, Dual-Range Posi-Torq . . . . . 70-5 Field Light,Auxiliary, Bulb Replacement . . . . . 95-5
Drives, Left-Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-4 Field Peas, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . 45-6
Drives, Right-Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3 Fill fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-3
Dual Wheels (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-12 Filler Plate Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-16
Dual wheels, single attach wide spaced . . . 110-12 Filter Replacement, Water Separator . . . . . . . 90-5
Dual-Range Cylinder Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-7 Filter, Fresh Air, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-2
Filter, Fuel, Draining Water From . . . . . . . . . 90-5
Filter, Fuel, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-6
Filter, Recirculating, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 115-3
E Filter, Recirculating, Removing . . . . . . . . . . 115-2
Edible Beans, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . 45-3 Fin Adjustment, Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Electrical System Damage, Preventing . . . . . 95-11 Fine cut straw choppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-16
Emergency Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30 Finger Bar, Adjusting (Spike-Tooth
Engine Access Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3 Cylinder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-27
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4 Flaps, Sunflower, Straw Walker . . . . . . . . . 70-32
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-3 Flax, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-5
Engine coolant conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-4 FM Radio Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-18
Engine Fan Belt, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-13 Folding Grain Tank Loading Auger . . . . . . . . 75-6
Engine Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135-1 Four-Wheel Drive (Optional),
Engine Serial Number, 9400 Combines . . . . 135-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-8
Engine Serial Number, 9500 and 9600 Front Concave Closure Plates . . . . . . . . . . 70-25
Combines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135-2 Fuel Filter, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-6
Index-3 240397
PN=391
Index
Page Page
Fuel Lines, Bleeding . . . . . . ........ 90-6, 90-7 Hot Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
Fuel Pump, Electric . . . . . . ........ .... 90-4 Hydraulic Cylinder Safety Stop . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1
Fuel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .... 80-2 Hydraulic system
Fuel Tank, Draining . . . . . . ........ .... 90-5 Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-2
Fuel, Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .... 80-1 Hydraulic System (General Information) . . . . 105-1
Full Grain Tank Indicator . . . ........ .... 75-2 Hydraulic system, cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . 105-2
Full Grain Tank Indicator/Hilly Conditions .... 75-3 Hydro Linkage Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-13
Hydro-Handle Rocker Switch, Replacing . . . . . 95-9
Hydrostatic Drive Control Lever . . . . . . . . . 20-44
G Hydrostatic Drive Unit Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 135-2
Hydrostatic Drive Unit Pump . . . . . . . . . . . 135-2
Gauge Light, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 95-7
Hydrostatic Ground Drive,
Gauge, Accumulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-6
Gauge, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18
Hydrostatic Oil Cooler, Cleaning . . . . . . . . 110-14
Gear Shift Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
Gear, Auger, Cleaning Shoe, Adjusting . . . . 70-33
Gearshift Linkage, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . 110-15
Grain Saver, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-11 I
Grain Tank Cross Auger Drive Identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135-1
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-6 Idler, Beater-belt, Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 70-28
Grain Tank Drain Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-1 Idler, Cylinder Belt, Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 70-13
Grain Tank Full Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-2 Idler, Drive Belt, Straw Chopper,
Grain Tank Full Indicator/Hilly Conditions . . . . 75-3 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-11
Grain Tank Loading Auger, Deflector . . . . . . . 75-5 Inch torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-14
Grain Tank Loading Auger, Removing . . . . . . 75-5 Indicator, Concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-18
Grain Tank Sample Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-2 Indicator, Grain Tank Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-2
Grain Tank Unloading Auger Covers . . . . . . . 75-3 Indicator, Grain Tank Full/Hilly Conditions . . . . 75-3
Grass Seeds, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . 45-5 Inlet Panel, Cab Roof, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . 115-4
Greases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-8 Inserts, Rear Concave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-24
Greenstar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36 Instrument and Control Identification . . . . . . . 20-1
Ground Speeds (Fast Idle) . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-3
Guar, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-5
J
Jacking Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-19
H
Harvesting Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-1
Harvestrak (General Information) . . . . . . . . 100-9 K
Header Drop Rate, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . 105-3
Knife Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
Header Harness, Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-12
Knife Section Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-2
Header/Reel/Belt Pickup Pump, Belt
Knob, Control Panel, Replacement . . . . . . . . 95-8
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-31, 105-7
Header, Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-3
Heater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Heater, Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-7 L
Heater, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-13 Ladder, Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36
High Flotation Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-12 Ladder, Cab, Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-36
High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5 Ladder, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-1
High-Range Direct Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-8 Ladder, Grain Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-1
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-40 Ladder, Rear, and Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1
Hose Storage, Left-Hand . . . . . . . . . 55-15, 105-2 Left Hand, Hose Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105-2
Hose Storage, Right-Hand . . . . . . . . 55-15, 105-3 Left-Hand, Hose Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-15
Index-4 240397
PN=392
Index
Page Page
Light Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Monitor, How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-10

Light, Monitor, Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-11
Engine Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 Motor, Hydrostatic Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . 135-2
Park Brake On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21 Mud Shields, Separator Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-3
Separator Drive Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22 Mustard, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . 45-6
Light, Auger Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25
Light, Cab Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Light, Concave Indicator, Bulb O
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-6
Oats, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-6
Light, Cylinder Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26
Oil cooler, feeder house reverser
Light, Display Panel, Warning, Overhead . . . 20-20
gearcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-25
Light, Dome and Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-6
Oil Cooler, Hydrostatic, Cleaning . . . . . . . 110-14
Light, Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24
Operating Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-1
Light, Engine Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26
Operational Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-12
Light, Engine Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24
Outlet, Auxiliary Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
Light, Grain Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25
Light, Grain Tank Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23
Light, Hydraulic Oil Temp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
Light, Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21 P
Light, Panel, Display, Warning, Overhead . . . 20-20 Paddle Chain, Tailings Elevator,
Light, Separator Drive Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-47
Light, Separator Drive Pressure . . . . . . . . . 20-24 Paddles, Tailings Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-46
Light, Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25 Panel, Access, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3
Light, Tailings Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-26 Pans, Extension, Straw Walker . . . . . . . . . . 70-32
Light, Unloading Auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 Parking Brake, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
Light, Warning (Flasher), Bulb Personal posture seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-6 Popcorn, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . 45-7
Lights, Auxiliary Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3 Power shutdown procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-16
Lights, Grain Tank, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 95-5 Power strip electrical outlets . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35
Lights, Head, Cab, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 95-4 Precleaner Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39
Lights, Side Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Precleaner, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-2
Lights, Side Finder, Bulb Replacement . . . . . 95-5 Precleaner, Deep-Tooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Lights, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Precleaner, General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . 70-41
Linkage, Gearshift, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . 110-15 Precleaner, Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Lock, Cab Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30 Precleaner, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-35
Lockout,Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-23 Prestarting Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-6 Pulling Combine Out of Mud . . . . . . . . . . 110-19
Low Range (Reduced-Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-8 Pump, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
Low Shaft Speed Monitor Operation . . . . . . 100-6
Lowering Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-3
Lubricant R
Alternative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-9
Radiator, Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-9
Radio with Cassette/Weatherband . . . . . . . . 20-47
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-9
Radio, CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-17
Rake Bar, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-16
Rasp Bar Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-16
M Rear Axle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-16
Manual Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42 Rear Concave Closure Plates . . . . . . . . . . 70-25
Manual Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29 Rear Concave Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-24
Metric torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-13 Rear Wheel Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6
Millet, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-6 Receptacles, Service Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
Index-5 240397
PN=393
Index
Page Page
Reduced Speed Unloading System . . . . . . . . 75-7 Shield, Drive, Conveyor Auger . . . . . . . . . . . 65-4
Reel/Belt Pickup Pump, Belt Adjustment . . 70-30, Shield, Intake, Cleaning Fan . . . . . . . . . . . 70-38
105-6 Shield, Protection, Fan Bottom . . . . . . . . . . 70-37
Refrigerant Level, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5 Shield, Right-Hand Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-2
Relay Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-2 Shields, Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-1
Relays (Central Electronics Box) . . . . . . . . . . 95-1 Shoe, Cleaning, Right-Hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-4
Relays (Engine Compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . 95-1 Side Light, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 95-6
Replacing Beater Wings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-28 Sieve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-41
Replacing Engine Fan Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-13 Sieve Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39
Replacing Rake Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-16 Sieve Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-42
Replacing Rotary Screen Drive Belt . . . . . . 90-14 Sieve, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-39
Replacing Unloading Auger Drive Sieve, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-35
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-10 Single attach wide spaced dual wheels . . . 110-12
Reservoir, Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-14 Single-Range Cylinder Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-5
Reverser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41 Slip Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-8
Reverser Shifter Fork, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . 55-16 Slip Clutch, Cleaning Shoe Augers . . . . . . . 70-34
Rice, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . 45-7 Slow-Speed Drive (Dual-Range Only) . . . . . . 70-6
Right-Hand Hose Storage . . . . . . . . 55-15, 105-3 Sorghum, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . 45-8
Rocker Switch, Hydro-Handle, Replacing . . . . 95-9 Soybean Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-10
Rocker Type Switch Replacement, Soybeans, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . 45-3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-8 Spacers, Axle and Wheel (Optional) . . . . . 110-11
Rotary Screen Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-14 Specifications, 9400 Combines . . . . . . . . . . 130-5
Rotary Screen Drive Belt, Replacing . . . . . . 90-14 Specifications, 9500 Combines . . . . . . . . . . 130-7
Rotary screen knife comb, adjust . . . . . . . . 90-15 Specifications, 9600 Combines . . . . . . . . . . 130-9
Rotary Screen, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-14 Spike-Tooth Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-23
Rubber Belted Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-13 Spike-Tooth Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-23
Rye, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 45-7 Spreader, Chaff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-17
Sprockets, Top Shaft, Feeder House . . . . . . . 55-9
Start Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
S Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-15
Safety page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-1 Starting Fluid Cans, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 90-2
Safflower, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . 45-8 Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Screen, Cleaning Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-3 Steering Column, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-42
Screen, Rotary, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-14 Steering Wheel, Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-41
Screens, Perforated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-45 Steering, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-9
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-35 Stone Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-3
Seat, Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32 Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1
Seat, personal posture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31 Storage, Air Conditioner, Preparing for . . . . . 125-1
Secondary Countershaft Belt Adjustment . . . 70-30 Storage, Combine, Preparing for . . . . . . . . . 125-2
Seed Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-9 Storage, Combine, Removing from . . . . . . . 125-2
Sensor Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-4, 100-8 Storage, Engine, Preparing for . . . . . . . . . . 125-1
Separator Countershaft Strips . . . . . . . . . . . 70-46 Storage, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-2
Separator Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-31 Storing lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-9
Separator Drive Mud Shields . . . . . . . . . . . . 65-3 Straw Chopper (General Information) . . . . . . . 70-1
Separator Plugged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23 Straw Chopper Fin Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 70-1
Separator, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-2 Straw Chopper, Changing Speeds . . . . . . . 70-12
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85-1, 100-5 Straw Chopper, Drive Alignment . . . . . . . . . 70-15
Service Power Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4 Straw Chopper, Moving to Windrow
Setting Low Idle Speed (9400 Combines) . . . . 90-8 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-8
Shear Bolt, Cross Auger Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 75-4 Straw Chopper, Widespread . . . . . . . . . . . 70-15
Shield, Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-2 Straw choppers, fine cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-16
Index-6 240397
PN=394
Index
Page Page
Straw Spreader (General Information) . . . . . 70-17 Torque, Bolt, Dual Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-7
Straw Spreader Belt Replacement and Torque, Bolt, Rear Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-17 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-7
Straw Walker Extension Pans . . . . . . . . . . 70-32 Tracks, Rubber Belted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-13
Straw Walker Gearcase Belt Adjustment . . . 70-32 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120-1
Straw Walker Plugging Switch Adjustment . . . 70-33 Troubleshooting, Low Shaft Speed
Straw Walker Sunflower Flaps . . . . . . . . . . 70-32 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-7
Straw Walkers Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-27 Trough, Sample, Grain Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-2
Strips, Separator Countershaft . . . . . . . . . . 70-46 Turn Signal Indicator, Bulb Replacement . . . . 95-6
Sunflowers, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . 45-8 Turn Signal, Front, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 95-6
Switch and Knob Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2
Switch, High Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-5 Turning Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-4
Switch, Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115-6
Switch, Rocker, Hydro-Handle, Replacing . . . . 95-9
Switch, Toggle-Type, Replacement . . . . . . . . 95-8 U
Synthetic Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-9 Unloading Auger Covers/Grain Tank . . . . . . . 75-3
Unloading Auger Drive Adjustment . . . . . . . . 75-9
Unloading Auger Drive Belt Replacement . . . . 75-8
T Unloading Auger Drive Cylinder
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-10
Tachometer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-3
Unloading Auger Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Tachometer, Diagnostic Codes . . . . . . . . . . 100-2
Unloading Auger, Installing and Timing . . . . 75-11
Tachometer, Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100-1
Unloading Auger, Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-11
Tail Light, Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-6
Upper Tailings Auger Drive Chain
Tailings Auger Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 70-46
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-48
Tailings Elevator Belt Adjustment . . . . . . . . 70-47 Using Starting Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-8
Tailings Elevator Drive Chain Adjustment . . . 70-47
Tailings Elevator Paddle Chain
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-47
Tailings Elevator Paddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-46 V
Tailings Elevator Slip Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . 70-48 Vibration, Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-11
Tailings, Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-45 Video, Combine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29
Tank, Grain, Loading Auger Deflector . . . . . . 75-5 Voltage Regulator Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-15
Thermostat, Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-12
Tilt Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-23
Tire Loading Decal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-3 W
Tires, Care and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-2 Warning Display Panel Bulb Replacement . . . . 95-7
Tires, Carrying Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-4 Warning Light Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . 95-5
Tires, Drive, 35.5L-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-17 Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Tires, High Flotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-12 Washer, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Tires, Recommended Inflation Pressures . . . 110-4 Water Separator Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
Tires, 35.5L-32, Transporting With . . . . . . . 110-5 Water Separator Filter Replacement . . . . . . . 90-5
Toggle Type Switch, Control Panel, Weatherband Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-47
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-8 Wheat, Combining, Crop Settings . . . . . . . . . 45-8
Tool Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28 Wheels, Dual (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-12
Top Access Doors for Drives . . . . . . . . . . . 70-43 Widespread Straw Chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-15
Top Shaft Stripper Adjustment, Feeder Winterize Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-11
House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-8 Wiper, Full View (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
Torque values Wiper, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-27
Inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-14 Wiring, Alternator and Voltage Regulator . . . 95-15
Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-13
Torque, Bolt, Drive Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110-6
Index-7 240397
PN=395
JOHN DEERE IS AT YOUR SERVICE WHEN YOU NEED IT
-UN-25AUG92
TS1436
1. JOHN DEERE COMPANY 3. JOHN DEERE COMPANY 5. JOHN DEERE COMPANY
701 Georgesville Road P.O. Box 540598 2001 West 94th Street
Columbus, OH 43228-2499 Dallas, TX 75354-0598 Bloomington, MN 55431-3211
614-275-1500 (Fax. 614-275-1450) 214-385-1701 (Fax. 214-663-2390) 612-887-6200 (Fax. 612-887-6385)
2. JOHN DEERE COMPANY 4. JOHN DEERE COMPANY 6. JOHN DEERE LIMITED

2001 Deere Dr. 3210 East 85th Street South Service Road at Hunter
Conyers, GA 30208 Southeast Station Grimsby, Ontario, Canada L3M 4H5
404-922-7040 (Fax. 404-388-2138) Kansas City, MO 64132-2586 905-945-9281 (Fax. 905-945-0341)
816-361-4000 (Fax. 816-995-9381)
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION is important to John COMPLAINT-RESOLUTION PROCEDURE

Deere. We take pride in providing superior service. Your dealer is the best and fastest source to solving
We’ll be around when you need us: any problems you may experience with your product.
1. Be prepared with the following information:
• We maintain a large and varied parts inventory —Machine model and product identification number
to help minimize downtime. —Date of purchase
—Nature of problem
• Precision tools and testing equipment enable 2. Discuss problem with dealer service manager.
technicians to locate and correct troubles. 3. If unable to resolve, see the dealership manager.
Explain the problem and request assistance.
• We hold regular training schools for service 4. If you have a persistent problem your dealership is
technicians so they know your equipment and unable to satisfy, ask your dealer to contact the John
how to maintain it. Deere territory aftermarket manager for resolution.
5. If a problem is not resolved to your satisfaction,
• Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient contact the appropriate John Deere sales branch for
service through competent dealerships. your area and ask to speak with the division
aftermarket manager. (See map.)
DX,IBC,2 -19-18AUG95
4 240397
PN=386

John Deere 9400 9500 and 9600 Combine PDF Operator S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

John Deere 9400 9500 and 9600 Combine PDF Operator S Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

John Deere 9400 9500 and 9600 Combine PDF Operator S Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Y

OMH161694 Issue C7 English

John Deere Harvester Works

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05-1

Lights and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1

Prestarting Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125-1

Operating the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130-1

Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1 Machine Identification Numbers . . . . . . . . 135-1

Combine Cleanout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1 John Deere Literature Available . . . . . . . . 145-1

Feeder House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55-1 Index

Straw Chopper and Spreaders . . . . . . . . . . 70-1

Grain Tank and Unloading System . . . . . . . 75-1

Fuels and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-1

Lubrication and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 85-1

Engine Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1

Electrical System Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-1

All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on

Find manuals at https://best-manuals.com

This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see this

UNDERSTAND SIGNAL WORDS

A signal word—DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION—is

FOLLOW SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on

Learn how to operate the machine and how to use

Keep your machine in proper working condition.

If you do not understand any part of this manual and

Operate combine only when all guards are fitted and in

Before driving away, check immediate vicinity of machine

Attach headers to combine with extreme care.

KEEP RIDERS OFF MACHINE

Only allow the operator on the machine. Keep riders off.

Riders are subject to injury such as being thrown off the

On machines equipped with a passenger seat, one rider

BALLASTING FOR SAFE GROUND

Operating, steering and braking performance of combine

To maintain the necessary ground contact, ballast the

Find manuals at https://best-manuals.com

Put the grain tank unloading auger in transport position

PARK THE COMBINE SAFELY

Lower headers or other equipment to the ground before

OPERATE THE ENGINE OUTDOORS

Never operate the engine in a closed building.

HANDLE FUEL SAFELY—AVOID FIRES

Handle fuel with care: it is highly flammable. Do not

Always stop engine before refueling machine. Fill fuel

Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated

Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

HANDLE STARTING FLUID SAFELY

Starting fluid is highly flammable.

To prevent accidental discharge when storing the

WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

Find manuals at https://best-manuals.com

Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause

A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific

Check the MSDS before you start any job using a

(See your John Deere dealer for MSDS’s on chemical